1910012317 T1600G CLI

2018-01-11

: Tp-Link 1910012317 T1600G Cli 1910012317_T1600G_CLI 20180111 201801 2018

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 473 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

CLI Reference Guide
T1600G-28TS / T1600G-28PS / T1600G-52TS (TL-SG2452)
T1600G-52PS (TL-SG2452P) / T1600G-18TS (TL-SG2216)
1910012317 REV3.0.0
December 2017
COPYRIGHT & TRADEMARKS
Specifications are subject to change without notice. is a registered trademark of
TP-Link Technologies Co., Ltd. Other brands and product names are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective holders.
No part of the specifications may be reproduced in any form or by any means or used to make
any derivative such as translation, transformation, or adaptation without permission from
TP-Link Technologies Co., Ltd. Copyright © 2017 TP-Link Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights
reserved.
http://www.tp-link.com
I
CONTENTS
Preface
............................................................................................................................ 1
Chapter 1 Using the CLI
................................................................................................... 5
1.1 Accessing the CLI ......................................................................................................................... 5
1.1.1 Logon by Telnet ........................................................................................................... 5
1.1.2 Logon by SSH ............................................................................................................... 6
1.2 CLI Command Modes ................................................................................................................. 11
1.3 Privilege Restrictions .................................................................................................................. 14
1.4 Conventions ................................................................................................................................. 14
1.4.1 Format Conventions .................................................................................................. 14
1.4.2 Special Characters .................................................................................................... 15
1.4.3 Parameter Format ...................................................................................................... 15
Chapter 2 User Interface
............................................................................................... 16
2.1 enable ................................................................................................................................... 16
2.2 service password-encryption .......................................................................................... 16
2.3 enable password ................................................................................................................ 17
2.4 enable secret ...................................................................................................................... 18
2.5 configure ............................................................................................................................. 19
2.6 exit ........................................................................................................................................ 20
2.7 end ........................................................................................................................................ 20
2.8 clipaging .............................................................................................................................. 21
2.9 history .................................................................................................................................. 21
2.10 history clear ........................................................................................................................ 22
Chapter 3 User Management Commands
................................................................. 23
3.1 user name (password) ....................................................................................................... 23
3.2 user name (secret) ............................................................................................................. 24
3.3 show user account-list ...................................................................................................... 25
3.4 show user configuration ................................................................................................... 26
Chapter 4 System Configuration Commands
.......................................................... 27
4.1 system-time manual .......................................................................................................... 27
4.2 system-time ntp ................................................................................................................. 27
4.3 system-time dst predefined............................................................................................. 29
4.4 system-time dst date ........................................................................................................ 30
4.5 system-time dst recurring ................................................................................................ 31
II
4.6 hostname ............................................................................................................................. 32
4.7 location ................................................................................................................................ 33
4.8 contact-info ........................................................................................................................ 33
4.9 ip address ............................................................................................................................ 34
4.10 ip address-alloc .................................................................................................................. 35
4.11 reset ..................................................................................................................................... 36
4.12 reboot................................................................................................................................... 36
4.13 reboot-schedule ................................................................................................................ 37
4.14 copy running-config startup-config ............................................................................... 38
4.15 copy startup-config tftp ................................................................................................... 38
4.16 copy tftp startup-config ................................................................................................... 39
4.17 copy backup-config tftp ................................................................................................... 40
4.18 copy backup-config startup-config ............................................................................... 40
4.19 copy running-config backup-config ............................................................................... 41
4.20 copy tftp backup-config ................................................................................................... 41
4.21 boot application ................................................................................................................. 42
4.22 boot config .......................................................................................................................... 43
4.23 remove backup-image ...................................................................................................... 43
4.24 firmware upgrade ............................................................................................................... 44
4.25 ping ....................................................................................................................................... 45
4.26 tracert .................................................................................................................................. 46
4.27 show system-info............................................................................................................... 47
4.28 show image-info ................................................................................................................. 47
4.29 show boot ............................................................................................................................ 48
4.30 show running-config ......................................................................................................... 48
4.31 show startup-config .......................................................................................................... 49
4.32 show system-time ............................................................................................................. 49
4.33 show system-time dst ....................................................................................................... 50
4.34 show system-time ntp....................................................................................................... 50
4.35 show cable-diagnostics interface ................................................................................... 51
4.36 show cpu-utilization ........................................................................................................... 51
4.37 show memory-utilization .................................................................................................. 52
Chapter 5 EEE Configuration Commands
................................................................. 53
5.1 eee ........................................................................................................................................ 53
5.2 show interface eee ............................................................................................................ 53
III
Chapter 6 SDM Template Commands
........................................................................ 55
6.1 sdm prefer ........................................................................................................................... 55
6.2 show sdm prefer ................................................................................................................ 56
Chapter 7 Time Range Commands
............................................................................. 57
7.1 time-range ........................................................................................................................... 57
7.2 absolute ............................................................................................................................... 57
7.3 periodic ................................................................................................................................ 58
7.4 holiday (time-range mode) ............................................................................................... 59
7.5 holiday .................................................................................................................................. 60
7.6 show holiday ....................................................................................................................... 60
7.7 show time-range ................................................................................................................ 61
Chapter 8 Port Configuration Commands
................................................................ 62
8.1 interface gigabitEthernet .................................................................................................. 62
8.2 interface range gigabitEthernet ...................................................................................... 62
8.3 description .......................................................................................................................... 63
8.4 shutdown ............................................................................................................................. 64
8.5 flow-control ......................................................................................................................... 65
8.6 duplex ................................................................................................................................... 65
8.7 jumbo-size ........................................................................................................................... 66
8.8 speed ................................................................................................................................... 66
8.9 clear counters ..................................................................................................................... 67
8.10 show interface status ........................................................................................................ 68
8.11 show interface counters ................................................................................................... 68
8.12 show interface configuration ........................................................................................... 69
Chapter 9 Port Isolation Commands
.......................................................................... 70
9.1 port isolation ....................................................................................................................... 70
9.2 show port isolation interface ........................................................................................... 71
Chapter 10 Loopback Detection Commands
............................................................. 72
10.1 loopback-detection (global) ............................................................................................. 72
10.2 loopback-detection interval ............................................................................................. 72
10.3 loopback-detection recovery-time ................................................................................ 73
10.4 loopback-detection (interface) ........................................................................................ 74
10.5 loopback-detection config process-mode ................................................................... 74
10.6 loopback-detection recover ............................................................................................ 75
10.7 show loopback-detection global .................................................................................... 76
IV
10.8 show loopback-detection interface ............................................................................... 76
Chapter 11 Etherchannel Commands
.......................................................................... 78
11.1 channel-group .................................................................................................................... 78
11.2 port-channel load-balance ............................................................................................... 79
11.3 lacp system-priority .......................................................................................................... 80
11.4 lacp port-priority ................................................................................................................ 81
11.5 show etherchannel ............................................................................................................ 81
11.6 show etherchannel load-balance .................................................................................... 82
11.7 show lacp ............................................................................................................................. 83
11.8 show lacp sys-id ................................................................................................................. 83
Chapter 12 MAC Address Commands
.......................................................................... 85
12.1 mac address-table static .................................................................................................. 85
12.2 mac address-table aging-time ........................................................................................ 86
12.3 mac address-table filtering .............................................................................................. 86
12.4 mac address-table max-mac-count ............................................................................... 87
12.5 show mac address-table .................................................................................................. 89
12.6 clear mac address-table ................................................................................................... 89
12.7 show mac address-table aging-time .............................................................................. 90
12.8 show mac address-table max-mac-count .................................................................... 90
12.9 show mac address-table interface ................................................................................. 91
12.10 show mac address-table count ....................................................................................... 91
12.11 show mac address-table address ................................................................................... 92
12.12 show mac address-table vlan .......................................................................................... 93
Chapter 13 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Commands
................................................................. 94
13.1 vlan ....................................................................................................................................... 94
13.2 name ..................................................................................................................................... 95
13.3 switchport general allowed vlan ...................................................................................... 95
13.4 switchport pvid ................................................................................................................... 96
13.5 switchport check ingress ................................................................................................. 97
13.6 switchport acceptable frame ........................................................................................... 97
13.7 show vlan summary ........................................................................................................... 98
13.8 show vlan brief .................................................................................................................... 99
13.9 show vlan ............................................................................................................................. 99
13.10 show interface switchport .............................................................................................. 100
V
Chapter 14 MAC-based VLAN Commands
................................................................ 101
14.1 mac-vlan mac-address ................................................................................................... 101
14.2 mac-vlan ............................................................................................................................ 102
14.3 show mac-vlan .................................................................................................................. 102
14.4 show mac-vlan interface ................................................................................................ 103
Chapter 15 Protocol-based VLAN Commands
........................................................ 104
15.1 protocol-vlan template ................................................................................................... 104
15.2 protocol-vlan vlan ............................................................................................................ 105
15.3 protocol-vlan group ......................................................................................................... 106
15.4 show protocol-vlan template ......................................................................................... 106
15.5 show protocol-vlan vlan .................................................................................................. 107
Chapter 16 GVRP Commands
....................................................................................... 108
16.1 gvrp..................................................................................................................................... 108
16.2 gvrp (interface) ................................................................................................................. 108
16.3 gvrp registration ............................................................................................................... 109
16.4 gvrp timer .......................................................................................................................... 110
16.5 show gvrp interface ......................................................................................................... 111
16.6 show gvrp global .............................................................................................................. 112
Chapter 17 IGMP Snooping Commands
..................................................................... 113
17.1 ip igmp snooping (global) ................................................................................................ 113
17.2 ip igmp snooping version ............................................................................................... 113
17.3 ip igmp snooping drop-unknown .................................................................................. 114
17.4 ip igmp snooping header-validation ............................................................................. 115
17.5 ip igmp snooping vlan-config ........................................................................................ 115
17.6 ip igmp snooping vlan-config (immediate-leave) ....................................................... 117
17.7 ip igmp snooping vlan-config (report-suppression) .................................................. 117
17.8 ip igmp snooping vlan-config (router-ports-forbidden) ............................................ 118
17.9 ip igmp snooping vlan-config (rport interface) ........................................................... 119
17.10 ip igmp snooping vlan-config (static) ........................................................................... 120
17.11 ip igmp snooping vlan-config (querier) ........................................................................ 121
17.12 ip igmp snooping (interface) .......................................................................................... 122
17.13 ip igmp snooping max-groups ....................................................................................... 123
17.14 ip igmp snooping immediate-leave............................................................................... 124
17.15 ip igmp profile ................................................................................................................... 124
17.16 deny .................................................................................................................................... 125
VI
17.17 permit ................................................................................................................................. 125
17.18 range .................................................................................................................................. 126
17.19 ip igmp filter ...................................................................................................................... 127
17.20 clear ip igmp snooping statistics .................................................................................. 127
17.21 show ip igmp snooping ................................................................................................... 128
17.22 show ip igmp snooping interface .................................................................................. 128
17.23 show ip igmp snooping vlan ........................................................................................... 129
17.24 show ip igmp snooping groups ..................................................................................... 130
17.25 show ip igmp profile ......................................................................................................... 131
Chapter 18 MLD Snooping Commands
...................................................................... 132
18.1 ipv6 mld snooping (global) .............................................................................................. 132
18.2 ipv6 mld snooping drop-unknown ................................................................................ 132
18.3 ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config ...................................................................................... 133
18.4 ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config (immediate-leave) ..................................................... 134
18.5 ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config (report-suppression) ................................................ 135
18.6 ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config (router-ports-forbidden) .......................................... 136
18.7 ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config (rport interface) ......................................................... 137
18.8 ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config (static) ......................................................................... 137
18.9 ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config (querier) ...................................................................... 138
18.10 ipv6 mld snooping (interface) ........................................................................................ 140
18.11 ipv6 mld snooping max-groups ..................................................................................... 140
18.12 ipv6 mld snooping immediate-leave ............................................................................ 141
18.13 ipv6 mld profile ................................................................................................................. 142
18.14 deny .................................................................................................................................... 143
18.15 permit ................................................................................................................................. 143
18.16 range .................................................................................................................................. 144
18.17 ipv6 mld filter .................................................................................................................... 144
18.18 clear ipv6 mld snooping statistics ................................................................................ 145
18.19 show ipv6 mld snooping ................................................................................................. 145
18.20 show ipv6 mld snooping interface ................................................................................ 146
18.21 show ipv6 mld snooping vlan ......................................................................................... 147
18.22 show ipv6 mld snooping groups ................................................................................... 147
18.23 show ipv6 mld profile ...................................................................................................... 148
Chapter 19 MVR Commands
......................................................................................... 149
19.1 mvr (global) ........................................................................................................................ 149
19.2 mvr group .......................................................................................................................... 149
VII
19.3 mvr mode........................................................................................................................... 150
19.4 mvr querytime ................................................................................................................... 151
19.5 mvr vlan .............................................................................................................................. 152
19.6 mvr (interface) ................................................................................................................... 152
19.7 mvr type ............................................................................................................................. 153
19.8 mvr immediate .................................................................................................................. 154
19.9 mvr vlan (group) ................................................................................................................ 154
19.10 show mvr ........................................................................................................................... 155
19.11 show mvr interface .......................................................................................................... 156
19.12 show mvr members ......................................................................................................... 156
19.13 show mvr traffic ................................................................................................................ 157
Chapter 20 MSTP Commands
....................................................................................... 158
20.1 debug spanning-tree ....................................................................................................... 158
20.2 spanning-tree (global) ..................................................................................................... 159
20.3 spanning-tree (interface) ................................................................................................ 159
20.4 spanning-tree common-config ..................................................................................... 160
20.5 spanning-tree mode ........................................................................................................ 161
20.6 spanning-tree mst configuration .................................................................................. 162
20.7 instance ............................................................................................................................. 162
20.8 name ................................................................................................................................... 163
20.9 revision .............................................................................................................................. 164
20.10 spanning-tree mst instance ........................................................................................... 165
20.11 spanning-tree mst ........................................................................................................... 165
20.12 spanning-tree priority ..................................................................................................... 166
20.13 spanning-tree timer ......................................................................................................... 167
20.14 spanning-tree hold-count .............................................................................................. 168
20.15 spanning-tree max-hops ................................................................................................ 168
20.16 spanning-tree bpdufilter ................................................................................................. 169
20.17 spanning-tree bpduflood ................................................................................................ 170
20.18 spanning-tree bpduguard .............................................................................................. 170
20.19 spanning-tree guard loop ............................................................................................... 171
20.20 spanning-tree guard root ............................................................................................... 172
20.21 spanning-tree guard tc ................................................................................................... 172
20.22 spanning-tree mcheck .................................................................................................... 173
20.23 show spanning-tree active ............................................................................................. 173
20.24 show spanning-tree bridge ............................................................................................ 174
20.25 show spanning-tree interface ........................................................................................ 174
VIII
20.26 show spanning-tree interface-security ....................................................................... 175
20.27 show spanning-tree mst ................................................................................................. 176
Chapter 21 LLDP Commands
........................................................................................ 178
21.1 lldp ...................................................................................................................................... 178
21.2 lldp forward_message ..................................................................................................... 178
21.3 lldp hold-multiplier ........................................................................................................... 179
21.4 lldp timer ............................................................................................................................ 180
21.5 lldp receive ........................................................................................................................ 181
21.6 lldp transmit ...................................................................................................................... 181
21.7 lldp snmp-trap .................................................................................................................. 182
21.8 lldp tlv-select .................................................................................................................... 183
21.9 lldp management-address ............................................................................................. 183
21.10 lldp med-fast-count ......................................................................................................... 184
21.11 lldp med-status ................................................................................................................ 185
21.12 lldp med-tlv-select ........................................................................................................... 185
21.13 lldp med-location ............................................................................................................. 186
21.14 show lldp ............................................................................................................................ 187
21.15 show lldp interface ........................................................................................................... 187
21.16 show lldp local-information interface ........................................................................... 188
21.17 show lldp neighbor-information interface ................................................................... 189
21.18 show lldp traffic interface ............................................................................................... 189
Chapter 22 Static Routes Commands
........................................................................ 191
22.1 ip routing ............................................................................................................................ 191
22.2 interface vlan .................................................................................................................... 191
22.3 interface loopback ........................................................................................................... 192
22.4 switchport ......................................................................................................................... 192
22.5 interface range port-channel ......................................................................................... 193
22.6 description ........................................................................................................................ 194
22.7 shutdown ........................................................................................................................... 194
22.8 interface port-channel .................................................................................................... 195
22.9 ip route ............................................................................................................................... 196
22.10 ipv6 routing ....................................................................................................................... 196
22.11 ipv6 route .......................................................................................................................... 197
22.12 show interface vlan .......................................................................................................... 198
22.13 show ip interface .............................................................................................................. 198
22.14 show ip interface brief ..................................................................................................... 199
IX
22.15 show ip route .................................................................................................................... 199
22.16 show ip route specify ...................................................................................................... 200
22.17 show ip route summary ................................................................................................... 201
22.18 show ipv6 interface ......................................................................................................... 201
22.19 show ipv6 route ................................................................................................................ 202
22.20 show ipv6 route summary .............................................................................................. 202
Chapter 23 IPv6 Address Configuration Commands
............................................. 204
23.1 ipv6 enable ........................................................................................................................ 204
23.2 ipv6 address autoconfig ................................................................................................. 204
23.3 ipv6 address link-local .................................................................................................... 205
23.4 ipv6 address dhcp ........................................................................................................... 206
23.5 ipv6 address ra ................................................................................................................. 206
23.6 ipv6 address eui-64 ......................................................................................................... 207
23.7 ipv6 address ..................................................................................................................... 208
23.8 show ipv6 interface ......................................................................................................... 209
Chapter 24 ARP Commands
.......................................................................................... 210
24.1 arp ....................................................................................................................................... 210
24.2 clear arp-cache ................................................................................................................ 211
24.3 arp dynamicrenew ........................................................................................................... 211
24.4 arp timeout ........................................................................................................................ 212
24.5 gratuitous-arp intf-status-up enable ............................................................................ 212
24.6 gratuitous-arp dup-ip-detected enable ....................................................................... 213
24.7 gratuitous-arp learning enable ...................................................................................... 213
24.8 gratuitous-arp send-interval .......................................................................................... 214
24.9 ip proxy-arp ....................................................................................................................... 215
24.10 ip local-proxy-arp ............................................................................................................. 215
24.11 show arp ............................................................................................................................ 216
24.12 show ip arp (interface) ..................................................................................................... 217
24.13 show ip arp summary ...................................................................................................... 217
24.14 show gratuitous-arp ........................................................................................................ 218
24.15 show ip proxy-arp ............................................................................................................ 218
Chapter 25 DHCP Server Commands
......................................................................... 220
25.1 service dhcp server ......................................................................................................... 220
25.2 ip dhcp server extend-option capwap-ac-ip .............................................................. 220
25.3 ip dhcp server extend-option vendor-class-id ........................................................... 221
25.4 ip dhcp server exclude-address ................................................................................... 222
X
25.5 ip dhcp server pool .......................................................................................................... 222
25.6 ip dhcp server ping timeout ........................................................................................... 223
25.7 ip dhcp server ping packets ........................................................................................... 224
25.8 network .............................................................................................................................. 224
25.9 lease ................................................................................................................................... 225
25.10 address hardware-address ............................................................................................ 226
25.11 address client-identifier .................................................................................................. 226
25.12 default-gateway ............................................................................................................... 227
25.13 dns-server ......................................................................................................................... 228
25.14 netbios-name-server ...................................................................................................... 229
25.15 netbios-node-type ........................................................................................................... 229
25.16 next-server ........................................................................................................................ 230
25.17 domain-name .................................................................................................................... 231
25.18 bootfile ............................................................................................................................... 231
25.19 show ip dhcp server status ............................................................................................ 232
25.20 show ip dhcp server statistics ....................................................................................... 232
25.21 show ip dhcp server extend-option .............................................................................. 233
25.22 show ip dhcp server pool ............................................................................................... 233
25.23 show ip dhcp server excluded-address ....................................................................... 234
25.24 show ip dhcp server manual-binding ........................................................................... 234
25.25 show ip dhcp server binding .......................................................................................... 235
25.26 clear ip dhcp server statistics ........................................................................................ 235
25.27 clear ip dhcp server binding ........................................................................................... 236
Chapter 26 DHCP Relay Commands
........................................................................... 237
26.1 service dhcp relay ............................................................................................................ 237
26.2 ip dhcp relay hops ............................................................................................................ 237
26.3 ip dhcp relay time ............................................................................................................. 238
26.4 ip helper-address ............................................................................................................. 239
26.5 ip dhcp relay information ................................................................................................ 239
26.6 ip dhcp relay information strategy ................................................................................ 240
26.7 ip dhcp relay information format ................................................................................... 241
26.8 ip dhcp relay information circuit-id ............................................................................... 242
26.9 ip dhcp relay information remote-id ............................................................................. 242
26.10 ip dhcp relay default-interface ...................................................................................... 243
26.11 ip dhcp relay vlan ............................................................................................................. 244
26.12 show ip dhcp relay ........................................................................................................... 244
XI
Chapter 27 DHCP L2 Relay Commands
..................................................................... 246
27.1 ip dhcp l2relay .................................................................................................................. 246
27.2 ip dhcp l2relay vlan .......................................................................................................... 246
27.3 ip dhcp l2relay information ............................................................................................. 247
27.4 ip dhcp l2relay information strategy ............................................................................. 247
27.5 ip dhcp l2relay information format ................................................................................ 248
27.6 ip dhcp l2relay information circuit-id ............................................................................ 249
27.7 ip dhcp l2relay information remote-id .......................................................................... 250
27.8 show ip dhcp l2relay ........................................................................................................ 250
27.9 show ip dhcp l2relay interface ....................................................................................... 251
Chapter 28 QoS Commands
.......................................................................................... 252
28.1 qos trust mode ................................................................................................................. 252
28.2 qos port-priority ............................................................................................................... 253
28.3 qos cos-map ..................................................................................................................... 253
28.4 qos dot1p-remap ............................................................................................................. 254
28.5 qos dscp-map................................................................................................................... 255
28.6 qos dscp-remap ............................................................................................................... 256
28.7 qos queue mode .............................................................................................................. 256
28.8 show qos cos-map .......................................................................................................... 257
28.9 show qos dot1p-remap .................................................................................................. 258
28.10 show qos dscp-map ........................................................................................................ 258
28.11 show qos dscp-remap .................................................................................................... 259
28.12 show qos port-priority interface ................................................................................... 259
28.13 show qos trust interface ................................................................................................. 260
28.14 show qos queue interface .............................................................................................. 260
Chapter 29 Bandwidth Control Commands
.............................................................. 262
29.1 storm-control rate-mode ............................................................................................... 262
29.2 storm-control.................................................................................................................... 262
29.3 storm-control exceed ..................................................................................................... 263
29.4 storm-control recover .................................................................................................... 264
29.5 bandwidth .......................................................................................................................... 265
29.6 show storm-control ......................................................................................................... 266
29.7 show bandwidth ............................................................................................................... 266
Chapter 30 Voice VLAN Commands
........................................................................... 268
30.1 voice vlan ........................................................................................................................... 268
XII
30.2 voice vlan (interface) ....................................................................................................... 268
30.3 voice vlan priority ............................................................................................................. 269
30.4 voice vlan oui .................................................................................................................... 270
30.5 show voice vlan ................................................................................................................ 270
30.6 show voice vlan oui-table ............................................................................................... 271
30.7 show voice vlan interface ............................................................................................... 271
Chapter 31 Auto VoIP Commands
............................................................................... 273
31.1 auto-voip ........................................................................................................................... 273
31.2 auto-voip (interface) ........................................................................................................ 273
31.3 auto-voip dot1p ................................................................................................................ 274
31.4 auto-voip untagged ......................................................................................................... 275
31.5 auto-voip none ................................................................................................................. 275
31.6 no auto-voip (interface) ................................................................................................... 276
31.7 auto-voip dscp ................................................................................................................. 276
31.8 auto-voip data priority ..................................................................................................... 277
31.9 show auto-voip ................................................................................................................. 277
Chapter 32 Access Control Commands
.................................................................... 279
32.1 user access-control ip-based enable .......................................................................... 279
32.2 user access-control ip-based ....................................................................................... 279
32.3 user access-control mac-based enable ...................................................................... 280
32.4 user access-control mac-based ................................................................................... 281
32.5 user access-control port-based enable ...................................................................... 282
32.6 user access-control port-based ................................................................................... 282
Chapter 33 HTTP and HTTPS Commands
................................................................. 284
33.1 ip http server ..................................................................................................................... 284
33.2 ip http port ......................................................................................................................... 284
33.3 ip http max-users ............................................................................................................. 285
33.4 ip http session timeout ................................................................................................... 286
33.5 ip http secure-server ....................................................................................................... 287
33.6 ip http secure-port ........................................................................................................... 287
33.7 ip http secure-protocol ................................................................................................... 288
33.8 ip http secure-ciphersuite .............................................................................................. 289
33.9 ip http secure-max-users ............................................................................................... 289
33.10 ip http secure-session timeout ..................................................................................... 290
33.11 ip http secure-server download certificate ................................................................. 291
33.12 ip http secure-server download key ............................................................................. 292
XIII
33.13 show ip http configuration .............................................................................................. 293
33.14 show ip http secure-server ............................................................................................ 293
Chapter 34 SSH Commands
.......................................................................................... 295
34.1 ip ssh server ...................................................................................................................... 295
34.2 ip ssh port .......................................................................................................................... 295
34.3 ip ssh version .................................................................................................................... 296
34.4 ip ssh algorithm ................................................................................................................ 297
34.5 ip ssh timeout ................................................................................................................... 297
34.6 ip ssh max-client .............................................................................................................. 298
34.7 ip ssh download ................................................................................................................ 299
34.8 remove public-key ........................................................................................................... 299
34.9 show ip ssh ........................................................................................................................ 300
Chapter 35 Telnet Commands
...................................................................................... 301
35.1 telnet enable ..................................................................................................................... 301
35.2 telnet port .......................................................................................................................... 301
35.3 show telnet-status ........................................................................................................... 302
Chapter 36 AAA Commands
......................................................................................... 303
36.1 tacacas-server host ........................................................................................................ 303
36.2 show tacacs-server ......................................................................................................... 304
36.3 radius-server host ........................................................................................................... 305
36.4 show radius-server .......................................................................................................... 306
36.5 aaa group ........................................................................................................................... 307
36.6 server ................................................................................................................................. 308
36.7 show aaa group ................................................................................................................ 308
36.8 aaa authentication login .................................................................................................. 309
36.9 aaa authentication enable .............................................................................................. 310
36.10 aaa authentication dot1x default................................................................................... 311
36.11 aaa accounting dot1x default ........................................................................................ 312
36.12 show aaa authentication ................................................................................................. 312
36.13 show aaa accounting ....................................................................................................... 313
36.14 line telnet ........................................................................................................................... 313
36.15 login authentication (telnet) ............................................................................................ 314
36.16 line ssh ............................................................................................................................... 315
36.17 login authentication (ssh) ................................................................................................ 315
36.18 enable authentication (telnet) ........................................................................................ 316
36.19 enable authentication (ssh) ............................................................................................ 317
XIV
36.20 ip http login authentication............................................................................................. 317
36.21 ip http enable authentication ......................................................................................... 318
36.22 show aaa global ................................................................................................................ 319
36.23 enable-admin .................................................................................................................... 319
Chapter 37 IEEE 802.1x Commands
............................................................................ 321
37.1 dot1x system-auth-control ............................................................................................ 321
37.2 dot1x handshake.............................................................................................................. 322
37.3 dot1x auth-protocol ........................................................................................................ 322
37.4 dot1x vlan-assignment ................................................................................................... 323
37.5 dot1x accounting ............................................................................................................. 324
37.6 dot1x mab ......................................................................................................................... 325
37.7 dot1x guest-vlan .............................................................................................................. 325
37.8 dot1x timeout quiet-period ............................................................................................ 326
37.9 dot1x timeout supp-timeout .......................................................................................... 327
37.10 dot1x max- req ................................................................................................................. 328
37.11 dot1x .................................................................................................................................. 328
37.12 dot1x port-control ........................................................................................................... 329
37.13 dot1x port-method .......................................................................................................... 330
37.14 dot1x auth-init .................................................................................................................. 331
37.15 dot1x auth-reauth ............................................................................................................ 331
37.16 show dot1x global ............................................................................................................ 332
37.17 show dot1x interface ....................................................................................................... 333
37.18 show dot1x auth-state .................................................................................................... 333
Chapter 38 Port Security Commands
......................................................................... 335
38.1 mac address-table max-mac count .............................................................................. 335
38.2 show mac address-table max-mac-count .................................................................. 335
Chapter 39 Port Mirroring Commands
....................................................................... 337
39.1 monitor session destination interface ......................................................................... 337
39.2 monitor session source .................................................................................................. 338
39.3 show monitor session ..................................................................................................... 339
Chapter 40 ACL Commands
.......................................................................................... 341
40.1 access-list create ............................................................................................................ 341
40.2 access-list resequence .................................................................................................. 341
40.3 access-list mac ................................................................................................................ 342
40.4 access-list ip ..................................................................................................................... 343
XV
40.5 access-list ipv6 ................................................................................................................ 345
40.6 access-list action ............................................................................................................. 347
40.7 redirect interface ............................................................................................................. 348
40.8 s-condition ........................................................................................................................ 348
40.9 s-mirror .............................................................................................................................. 349
40.10 qos-remark ........................................................................................................................ 350
40.11 access bind ....................................................................................................................... 351
40.12 show access-list .............................................................................................................. 352
40.13 show access-list bind ...................................................................................................... 352
40.14 show access-list status .................................................................................................. 353
40.15 show access-list counter ............................................................................................... 353
40.16 clear access-list ............................................................................................................... 354
Chapter 41 IPv4 IMPB Commands
............................................................................... 355
41.1 ip source binding .............................................................................................................. 355
41.2 ip dhcp snooping ............................................................................................................. 356
41.3 ip dhcp snooping vlan ..................................................................................................... 357
41.4 ip dhcp snooping max-entries ....................................................................................... 357
41.5 show ip source binding ................................................................................................... 358
41.6 show ip dhcp snooping ................................................................................................... 359
41.7 show ip dhcp snooping interface .................................................................................. 359
Chapter 42 IPv6 IMPB Commands
............................................................................... 361
42.1 Ipv6 source binding ......................................................................................................... 361
42.2 ipv6 dhcp snooping ......................................................................................................... 362
42.3 ipv6 dhcp snooping vlan ................................................................................................. 363
42.4 ipv6 dhcp snooping max-entries .................................................................................. 363
42.5 ipv6 nd snooping .............................................................................................................. 364
42.6 ipv6 nd snooping vlan ..................................................................................................... 365
42.7 ipv6 nd snooping max-entries ....................................................................................... 365
42.8 show ipv6 source binding ............................................................................................... 366
42.9 show ipv6 dhcp snooping............................................................................................... 367
42.10 show ipv6 dhcp snooping interface ............................................................................. 367
42.11 show ipv6 nd snooping ................................................................................................... 368
Chapter 43 IP Verify Source Commands
................................................................... 369
43.1 ip verify source ................................................................................................................. 369
43.2 ip verify source logging ................................................................................................... 370
43.3 show ip verify source ...................................................................................................... 370
XVI
43.4 show ip verify source interface ..................................................................................... 371
Chapter 44 IPv6 Verify Source Commands
.............................................................. 372
44.1 ipv6 verify source ............................................................................................................. 372
44.2 show ipv6 verify source .................................................................................................. 373
44.3 show ipv6 verify source interface ................................................................................. 373
Chapter 45 DHCPv4 Filter Commands
....................................................................... 375
45.1 ip dhcp filter ...................................................................................................................... 375
45.2 ip dhcp filter (interface) ................................................................................................... 375
45.3 ip dhcp filter mac-verify .................................................................................................. 376
45.4 ip dhcp filter limit rate ...................................................................................................... 377
45.5 ip dhcp filter decline rate ................................................................................................ 378
45.6 ip dhcp filter server permit-entry .................................................................................. 378
45.7 show ip dhcp filter ............................................................................................................ 379
45.8 show ip dhcp filter interface ........................................................................................... 380
45.9 show ip dhcp filter server permit-entry ........................................................................ 380
Chapter 46 DHCPv6 Filter Commands
....................................................................... 382
46.1 ipv6 dhcp filter .................................................................................................................. 382
46.2 ipv6 dhcp filter (interface) ............................................................................................... 382
46.3 ipv6 dhcp filter limit rate ................................................................................................. 383
46.4 ipv6 dhcp filter decline rate ............................................................................................ 384
46.5 ipv6 dhcp filter server permit-entry .............................................................................. 385
46.6 show ipv6 dhcp filter ....................................................................................................... 386
46.7 show ipv6 dhcp filter interface ...................................................................................... 386
46.8 show ip dhcp filter server permit-entry ........................................................................ 387
Chapter 47 DoS Defend Commands
........................................................................... 388
47.1 ip dos-prevent .................................................................................................................. 388
47.2 ip dos-prevent type ......................................................................................................... 388
47.3 show ip dos-prevent ........................................................................................................ 390
Chapter 48 DLDP Commands
....................................................................................... 392
48.1 dldp (global) ....................................................................................................................... 392
48.2 dldp interval....................................................................................................................... 392
48.3 dldp shut-mode ................................................................................................................ 393
48.4 dldp(interface) .................................................................................................................. 394
48.5 show dldp .......................................................................................................................... 394
XVII
48.6 show dldp interface ......................................................................................................... 395
Chapter 49 SNMP Commands
...................................................................................... 396
49.1 snmp-server...................................................................................................................... 396
49.2 snmp-server view ............................................................................................................ 396
49.3 snmp-server group .......................................................................................................... 397
49.4 snmp-server user ............................................................................................................. 399
49.5 snmp-server community ................................................................................................ 400
49.6 snmp-server host............................................................................................................. 401
49.7 snmp-server engineID .................................................................................................... 403
49.8 snmp-server traps snmp ................................................................................................ 403
49.9 snmp-server traps ........................................................................................................... 404
49.10 snmp-server traps ddm .................................................................................................. 406
49.11 snmp-server traps vlan ................................................................................................... 407
49.12 snmp-server traps security ............................................................................................ 408
49.13 snmp-server traps acl ..................................................................................................... 409
49.14 snmp-server traps ip ....................................................................................................... 409
49.15 snmp-server traps power ............................................................................................... 410
49.16 snmp-server traps link-status ....................................................................................... 411
49.17 rmon history ...................................................................................................................... 412
49.18 rmon event ........................................................................................................................ 413
49.19 rmon alarm ........................................................................................................................ 414
49.20 rmon statistics .................................................................................................................. 415
49.21 show snmp-server ........................................................................................................... 416
49.22 show snmp-server view .................................................................................................. 416
49.23 show snmp-server group ............................................................................................... 417
49.24 show snmp-server user .................................................................................................. 417
49.25 show snmp-server community ...................................................................................... 418
49.26 show snmp-server host .................................................................................................. 418
49.27 show snmp-server engineID .......................................................................................... 419
49.28 show rmon history ........................................................................................................... 419
49.29 show rmon event .............................................................................................................. 420
49.30 show rmon alarm .............................................................................................................. 420
49.31 show rmon statistics ....................................................................................................... 421
Chapter 50 PoE Commands
.......................................................................................... 422
50.1 power inline consumption (global) ................................................................................ 422
50.2 power profile ..................................................................................................................... 422
XVIII
50.3 power inline consumption (interface) ........................................................................... 423
50.4 power inline priority ......................................................................................................... 424
50.5 power inline supply .......................................................................................................... 425
50.6 power inline profile........................................................................................................... 425
50.7 power inline time-range .................................................................................................. 426
50.8 show power inline ............................................................................................................ 427
50.9 show power inline configuration interface .................................................................. 427
50.10 show power inline information interface ...................................................................... 428
50.11 show power profile .......................................................................................................... 428
Chapter 51 ARP Inspection Commands
..................................................................... 429
51.1 ip arp inspection ............................................................................................................... 429
51.2 ip arp inspection validate ................................................................................................ 429
51.3 ip arp inspection vlan ...................................................................................................... 430
51.4 ip arp inspection vlan logging ........................................................................................ 431
51.5 ip arp inspection trust ..................................................................................................... 432
51.6 ip arp inspection limit-rate .............................................................................................. 432
51.7 ip arp inspection burst-interval ..................................................................................... 433
51.8 ip arp inspection recover ................................................................................................ 434
51.9 show ip arp inspection .................................................................................................... 434
51.10 show ip arp inspection interface ................................................................................... 435
51.11 show ip arp inspection vlan ............................................................................................ 436
51.12 show ip arp inspection statistics ................................................................................... 436
51.13 clear ip arp inspection statistics ................................................................................... 437
Chapter 52 ND Detection Commands
........................................................................ 438
52.1 ipv6 nd detection ............................................................................................................. 438
52.2 ipv6 nd detection vlan ..................................................................................................... 438
52.3 ipv6 nd detection vlan logging....................................................................................... 439
52.4 ipv6 nd detection trust .................................................................................................... 439
52.5 show ipv6 nd detection ................................................................................................... 440
52.6 show ipv6 nd detection interface .................................................................................. 440
52.7 show ipv6 nd detection vlan .......................................................................................... 441
Chapter 53 System Log Commands
........................................................................... 442
53.1 logging buffer ................................................................................................................... 442
53.2 logging buffer level .......................................................................................................... 442
53.3 logging file flash ............................................................................................................... 443
53.4 logging file flash frequency ............................................................................................ 444
XIX
53.5 logging file flash level ...................................................................................................... 445
53.6 logging host index ............................................................................................................ 445
53.7 logging console ................................................................................................................ 446
53.8 logging console level ....................................................................................................... 447
53.9 logging monitor ................................................................................................................ 448
53.10 logging monitor level ....................................................................................................... 448
53.11 clear logging ..................................................................................................................... 449
53.12 show logging local-config .............................................................................................. 450
53.13 show logging loghost ...................................................................................................... 450
53.14 show logging buffer ......................................................................................................... 451
53.15 show logging flash ........................................................................................................... 451
XX
Preface
This Guide is intended for network administrator to provide referenced information about CLI
(Command Line Interface). The device mentioned in this Guide stands for T1600G-28TS/
T1600G-52TS/ T1600G-28MPS/T1600G-18TS JetStream Gigabit L2 Managed Switch without
any explanation. The commands in this guide apply to these models if not specially noted, and
T1600G-28TS is taken as an example model in the example commands.
Some models featured in this guide may be unavailable in your country or region. For local
sales information, visit http://www.tp-link.com.
Overview of this Guide
Chapter 1: Using the CLI
Provide information about how to use the CLI, CLI Command Modes, Security Levels and some
Conventions.
Chapter 2: User Interface
Provide information about the commands used to switch between five CLI Command Modes.
Chapter 3: User Management Commands
Provide information about the commands used for user management.
Chapter 4: System Configuration Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring the System information and
System IP, reboot and reset the switch, upgrade the switch system and commands used for
cable test.
Chapter 5: EEE Configuration Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring EEE.
Chapter 6: SDM Template Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring the SDM templates.
Chapter 7: Time Range Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring the time range.
Chapter 8: Port Configuration Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring the Speed, Negotiation Mode,
and Flow Control for Ethernet ports.
Chapter 9: Port Isolation Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring Port Isolation function.
Chapter 10: Loopback Detection Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring the Loopback Detection
function.
1
Chapter 11: Etherchannel Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring LAG (Link Aggregation Group)
and LACP (Link Aggregation Control Protocol).
Chapter 12: MAC Address Commands
Provide information about the commands used for Address configuration.
Chapter 13: IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring IEEE 802.1Q VLAN.
Chapter 14: MAC-based VLAN Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring MAC-based VLAN.
Chapter 15: Protocol-based VLAN Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring Protocol VLAN.
Chapter 16: GVRP Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring GVRP (GARP VLAN registration
protocol).
Chapter 17: IGMP Snooping Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring the IGMP Snooping (Internet
Group Management Protocol Snooping).
Chapter 18: MLD Snooping Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring the MLD Snooping (Multicast
Listener Discovery Snooping).
Chapter 19: MVR Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring the MVR.
Chapter 20: MSTP Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring the MSTP (Multiple Spanning
Tree Protocol).
Chapter 21: LLDP Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring LLDP function.
Chapter 22: Static Routes Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring the Static Route function.
Chapter 23: IPv6 Address Configuration Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring the System IPv6 addresses.
Chapter 24: ARP Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring the ARP (Address Resolution
Protocol) functions.
2
Chapter 25: DHCP Server Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring the DHCP Server function.
Chapter 26: DHCP Relay Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring the DHCP Relay function.
Chapter 27: DHCP L2 Relay Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring the DHCP L2 Relay function.
Chapter 28: QoS Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring the QoS function.
Chapter 29: Bandwidth Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring the Bandwidth Control.
Chapter 30: Voice VLAN Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring Voice VLAN.
Chapter 31 Auto VoIP Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring Auto VoIP.
Chapter 32: Access Control Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring Access Control.
Chapter 33: HTTP and HTTPS Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring the HTTP and HTTPS logon.
Chapter 34: SSH Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring and managing SSH (Security
Shell).
Chapter 35: Telnet Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring and managing SSH (Security
Shell).
Chapter 36: AAA Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring AAA (authentication,
authorization and accounting).
Chapter 37: IEEE 802.1X Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring IEEE 802.1X function.
Chapter 38 Port Security Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring Port Security.
Chapter 39: Port Mirroring Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring the Port Mirror function.
3
Chapter 40: ACL Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring the ACL (Access Control List).
Chapter 41: IPv4 IMPB Commands
Provide information about the commands used for binding the IP address, MAC address, VLAN
and the connected Port number of the Host together.
Chapter 42: IPv6 IMPB Commands
Provide information about the commands used for binding the IPv6 address, MAC address,
VLAN and the connected Port number of the Host together.
Chapter 43: IP Verify Source Commands
Provide information about the commands used for guarding the IP Source by filtering the IP
packets based on the IP-MAC Binding entries.
Chapter 44: IPv6 Verify Source Commands
Provide information about the commands used for guarding the IPv6 Source by filtering the IP
packets based on the IP-MAC Binding entries.
Chapter 45: DHCPv4 Filter Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring the DHCPv4 Filter.
Chapter 46: DHCPv6 Filter Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring the DHCPv6 Filter.
Chapter 47: DoS Defend Command
Provide information about the commands used for DoS defend and detecting the DoS attack.
Chapter 48: DLDP Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring the DLDP (Device Link
Detection Protocol).
Chapter 49: SNMP Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring the SNMP (Simple Network
Management Protocol) functions.
Chapter 50: PoE Commands (For T1600G-28MPS only)
Provide information about the commands used for configuring PoE function.
Chapter 51: ARP Inspection Commands
Provide information about the commands used for protecting the switch from the ARP
cheating or ARP Attack.
Chapter 52: ND Detection Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring ND detection.
Chapter 53: System Log Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring system log.
4
Chapter 1 Using the CLI
1.1 Accessing the CLI
You can log on to the switch and access the CLI by logging on to the switch remotely by a
Telnet or SSH connection through an Ethernet port.
1.1.1 Logon by Telnet
To log on to the switch by a Telnet connection, please take the following steps:
1. Click Start and type in cmd in the Search programs and files window and press the Enter
button.
Figure 1-1 Run Window
2. Type in telnet 192.168.0.1 in the cmd window and press Enter.
Figure 1-2 Type in the telnet command
5
3. Type in the login username and password (both admin by default). Press Enter and you will
enter User EXEC Mode.
Figure 1-2 Log in the Switch
4. Type in enable command and you will enter Privileged EXEC Mode. By default no
password is needed. Later you can set a password for users who want to access the
Privileged EXEC Mode.
Figure 1-3 Enter into Priviledged EXEC Mode
1.1.2 Logon by SSH
To log on by SSH, a Putty client software is recommended. There are two authentication modes
to set up an SSH connection:
Password Authentication Mode: It requires username and password, which are both admin by
default.
Key Authentication Mode: It requires a public key for the switch and a private key for the SSH
client software. You can generate the public key and the private key through Putty Key
Generator.
Note:
Before SSH login, please follow the steps shown in Figure 1-4 to enable the SSH function
through Telnet connection.
6
Figure 1-4 Enable SSH function
Password Authentication Mode
1. Open the software to log on to the interface of PuTTY. Enter the IP address of the switch
into Host Name field; keep the default value 22 in the Port field; select SSH as the
Connection type.
Figure 1-5 SSH Connection Config
7
2. Click the Open button in the above figure to log on to the switch. Enter the login user name
and password to log on the switch, and then enter enable to enter Privileged EXEC Mode,
so you can continue to configure the switch.
Figure 1-6 Log on the Switch
Key Authentication Mode
1. Select the key type and key length, and generate SSH key.
Figure 1-7 Generate SSH Key
Note:
1. The key length is in the range of 512 to 3072 bits.
2. During the key generation, randomly moving the mouse quickly can accelerate the key
generation.
8
2. After the key is successfully generated, please save the public key and private key to a
TFTP server.
Figure 1-8 Save the Generated Key
3. Log on to the switch by Telnet and download the public key file from the TFTP server to the
switch, as the following figure shows:
Figure 1-9 Download the Public Key
9
Note:
1. The key type should accord with the type of the key file.
2. The SSH key downloading can not be interrupted.
4. After the public key is downloaded, please log on to the interface of PuTTY and enter the IP
address for login.
Figure 1-10 SSH Connection Config
10
5. Click Browse to download the private key file to SSH client software and click Open.
Figure 1-11 Download the Private Key
6. After successful authentication, please enter the login user name. If you log on to the
switch without entering password, it indicates that the key has been successfully
downloaded.
Figure 1-12 Log on the Switch
1.2 CLI Command Modes
The CLI is divided into different command modes: User EXEC Mode, Privileged EXEC Mode,
Global Configuration Mode, Interface Configuration Mode and VLAN Configuration Mode.
11
Interface Configuration Mode can also be divided into Interface Ethernet, Interface
link-aggregation and some other modes, which is shown as the following diagram.
The following table gives detailed information about the Accessing path, Prompt of each mode
and how to exit the current mode and access the next mode.
Mode Accessing Path Prompt Logout or Access the next
mode
User EXEC
Mode
Primary mode once
it is connected with
the switch.
T1600G-52TS>
Use the exit command to
disconnect the switch.
Use the enable command to
access Privileged EXEC mode.
Privileged
EXEC Mode
Use the enable
command to enter
this mode from User
EXEC mode.
T1600G-52TS#
Enter the disable or the exit
command to return to User
EXEC mode.
Enter configure command to
access Global Configuration
Global
Configuration
Mode
Use the configure
command to enter
this mode from
Privileged EXEC
mode.
T1600G-52TS(config)#
Use the exit or the end
command or press Ctrl+Z to
return to Privileged EXEC mode.
Use the interface
gigabitEthernet
port
or
interface range
gigabitEthernet
port-list
command to access interface
Configuration mode.
Use the vlan
vlan-list
to access
Interface
Configuration
Mode
Layer 2 Interface:
Use the interface
gigabitEthernet
port,
interface
port-channel
port-channel-id
or
interface range
gigabitEthernet
port-list
command to
enter this mode from
Global Configuration
mode.
T1600G-52TS (config-if)#
or
T1600G-52TS(config-if-range)#
Use the end command or press
Ctrl+Z to return to Privileged
EXEC mode.
Enter the exit or the # command
to return to Global Configuration
mode.
A port number must be specified
in the interface command.
12
Mode Accessing Path Prompt Logout or Access the next
mode
Interface
Configuration
Mode
Layer 3 Interface:
Use the no
switchport
command to enter
Routed Port mode
from Interface
Configuration mode.
Use the interface
vlan
vlan-id
command to enter
VLAN Interface
mode from Global
Configuration mode.
Use the interface
loopback
id
command to enter
Loopback Interface
mode from Global
Configuration mode.
T1600G-52TS (config-if)#
or
T1600G-52TS(config-if-range)#
Use the switchport command to
switch to the Layer 2 interface
mode.
Use the end command or press
Ctrl+Z to return to Privileged
EXEC mode.
Enter the exit or the # command
to return to Global Configuration
mode.
VLAN
Configuration
Mode
Use the vlan
vlan-
list
command to enter
this mode from
Global Configuration
mode.
T1600G-52TS (config-vlan)#
Use the end command or press
Ctrl+Z to return to Privileged
EXEC mode.
Enter the exit command or the #
command to return to Global
Note:
1. The user is automatically in User EXEC Mode after the connection between the PC and the
switch is established by a Telnet/SSH connection.
2. Each command mode has its own set of specific commands. To configure some
commands, you should access the corresponding command mode firstly.
Global Configuration Mode: In this mode, global commands are provided, such as the
Spanning Tree, Schedule Mode and so on.
Interface Configuration Mode: In this mode, users can configure one or several ports,
different ports corresponds to different commands
a). Interface gigabitEthernet: Configure parameters for an Ethernet port, such as
Duplex-mode, flow control status.
b). Interface range gigabitEthernet: Configure parameters for several Ethernet ports.
13
c). Interface link-aggregation: Configure parameters for a link-aggregation, such as
broadcast storm.
d). Interface range link-aggregation: Configure parameters for multi-trunks.
e). Interface vlan: Configure parameters for the vlan-port.
VLAN Configuration Mode: In this mode, users can create a VLAN and add a specified
port to the VLAN.
3. Some commands are global, that means they can be performed in all modes:
show: Display all information of switch, for example: statistic information, port
information, VLAN information.
history: Display the commands history..
1.3 Privilege Restrictions
This switch’s security is divided into four privilege levels: User level, Power User level, Operator
level and Admin level. You can define username and password pairs, and assign a specific
privilege level to each pair. Different privilege levels have access to specified commands,
which is illustrated in the Privilege Requirement in each command. For details about how to
configure usename and password pairs, please refer to user name (password) and user name
(secret).
Users can enter Privileged EXEC mode from User EXEC mode by using the enable command. In
default case, no password is needed. In Global Configuration Mode, you can configure
password for Admin level by enable password command. Once password is configured, you
are required to enter it to access Privileged EXEC mode.
1.4 Conventions
1.4.1 Format Conventions
The following conventions are used in this Guide:
Items in square brackets [ ] are optional
Items in braces { } are required
Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. For example:
speed {10 | 100 | 1000 }
Bold indicates an unalterable keyword. For example: show logging
14
Normal Font indicates a constant (several options are enumerated and only one can be
selected). For example: mode {dynamic | static | permanent}
Italic Font indicates a variable (an actual value must be assigned). For example: bridge
aging-time
aging-time
1.4.2 Special Characters
You should pay attentions to the description below if the variable is a character string:
These six characters ” < > , \ & cannot be input.
If a blank is contained in a character string, single or double quotation marks should be
used, for example ’hello world’, ”hello world”, and the words in the quotation marks will be
identified as a string. Otherwise, the words will be identified as several strings.
1.4.3 Parameter Format
Some parameters must be entered in special formats which are shown as follows:
MAC address must be enter in the format of xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx.
One or several values can be typed for a port-list or a vlan-list using comma to separate.
Use a hyphen to designate a range of values, for instance, 1/0/1, 1/0/3-5, 1/0/7 indicates
choosing port 1/0/1, 1/0/3, 1/0/4, 1/0/5, 1/0/7.
15
Chapter 2 User Interface
2.1 enable
Description
The enable command is used to access Privileged EXEC Mode from User
EXEC Mode.
Syntax
enable
Command Mode
User EXEC Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
If you have set the password to access Privileged EXEC Mode from User
EXEC Mode:
T1600G-28TS>enable
Enter password
：
T1600G-28TS#
2.2 service password-encryption
Description
The service password-encryption command is used to encrypt the
password when the password is defined or when the configuration is written,
using the symmetric encryption algorithm. Encryption prevents the password
from being readable in the configuration file. To disable the global encryption
function, please use no service password-encryption command.
Syntax
service password-encryption
no service password-encryption
16
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable the global encryption function:
T1600G-28TS(config)# service password-encryption
2.3 enable password
Description
The enable password command is used to set or change the password for
users to access Privileged EXEC Mode from User EXEC Mode. To remove the
password, please use no enable password command. This command uses
the symmetric encryption.
Syntax
enable password { [ 0 ]
password
| 7
encrypted-password
}
no enable password
Parameter
0 —— Specify the encryption type. 0 indicates that an unencrypted password
will follow. By default, the encryption type is 0.
password
—— Super password, a string from 1 to 31 alphanumeric
characters or symbols. The password is case sensitive, allows digits, English
letters (case sensitive), underlines and sixteen special characters
( !$%'()*,-./[]{|} ). By default, it is empty.
7 —— Indicates a symmetric encrypted password with fixed length will follow.
encrypted-password
—— A symmetric encrypted password with fixed length,
which you can copy from another switch’s configuration file. After the
encrypted password is configured, you should use the corresponding
unencrypted password if you re-enter this mode.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
17
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
User Guidelines
If the password you configured here is unencrypted and the global
encryption function is enabled in service password-encryption, the
password in the configuration file will be displayed in the symmetric
encrypted form.
Example
Set the super password as “admin” and unencrypted to access Privileged
EXEC Mode from User EXEC Mode:
T1600G-28TS(config)#enable password 0 admin
2.4 enable secret
Description
The enable secret command is used to set a secret password, which is using
an MD5 encryption algorithm, for users to access Privileged EXEC Mode from
User EXEC Mode. To return to the default configuration, please use no enable
secret command. This command uses the MD5 encryption.
Syntax
enable secret { [ 0 ]
password
| 5
encrypted-password
}
no enable secret
Parameter
0 —— Specify the encryption type. 0 indicates that an unencrypted password
will follow. By default, the encryption type is 0.
password
—— Super password, a string from 1 to 31 alphanumeric
characters or symbols. The password is case sensitive, allows digits, English
letters (case sensitive), underlines and sixteen special characters
( !$%'()*,-./[]{|} ). By default, it is empty. The password in the configuration file
will be displayed in the MD5 encrypted form.
5 —— Indicates an MD5 encrypted password with fixed length will follow.
encrypted-password
—— An MD5 encrypted password with fixed length,
which you can copy from another switch’s configuration file. After the
18
encrypted password is configured, you should use the corresponding
unencrypted password if you re-enter this mode.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
User Guidelines
If both the enable password and enable secret are defined, you must enter
the password set in enable secret.
Example
Set the secret password as “admin” and unencrypted to access Privileged
EXEC Mode from User EXEC Mode. The password will be displayed in the
encrypted form.
T1600G-28TS(config)#enable secret 0 admin
2.5 configure
Description
The configure command is used to access Global Configuration Mode from
Privileged EXEC Mode.
Syntax
configure
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Access Global Configuration Mode from Privileged EXEC Mode:
T1600G-28TS# configure
T1600G-28TS(config)#
19
2.6 exit
Description
The exit command is used to return to the previous Mode from the current
Mode.
Syntax
exit
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Return to Global Configuration Mode from Interface Configuration Mode, and
then return to Privileged EXEC Mode:
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# exit
T1600G-28TS(config)#exit
T1600G-28TS#
2.7 end
Description
The end command is used to return to Privileged EXEC Mode.
Syntax
end
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Return to Privileged EXEC Mode from Interface Configuration Mode:
T1600G-28TS(config-if)#end
T1600G-28TS#
20
2.8 clipaging
Description
The clipaging command is used to enable the pause function for the screen
display. If you want to display all the related information of the switch at once
when using the show command, please use no clipaging command.
Syntax
clipaging
no clipaging
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Disable the pause function for the screen display:
T1600G-28TS(config)#no clipaging
2.9 history
Description
The history command is used to show the latest 20 commands you entered
in the current mode since the switch is powered.
Syntax
history
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Show the commands you have entered in the current mode:
T1600G-28TS (config)# history
1 history
21
2.10 history clear
Description
The history clear command is used to clear the commands you have entered
in the current mode, therefore these commands will not be shown next time
you use the history command.
Syntax
history clear
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Clear the commands you have entered in the current mode:
T1600G-28TS(config)#history clear
22
Chapter 3 User Management Commands
User Management commands are used to manage the user’s logging information by Web,
Telnet or SSH, so as to protect the settings of the switch from being randomly changed.
3.1 user name (password)
Description
The user name command is used to add a new user or modify the existed
users’ information. To delete the existed users, please use no user name
command. This command uses the symmetric encryption.
Syntax
user name
name
[ privilege admin | operator | power_user | user ] password
{ [ 0 ]
password
| 7
encrypted-password
}
no user name
name
Parameter
name
——Type a name for users' login, which contains 16 characters at most,
composed of digits, English letters and under dashes only.
admin | operator | power_user | user —— Access level. “admin” means that
you can edit, modify and view all the settings of different functions. “operator”
means that you can edit, modify and view most of the settings of different
functions. “power-user” means that you can edit, modify and view some of
the settings of different functions. “user” means that you can only view some
of the settings of different functions without the right to edit or modify. It is
“admin” by default. For more details about privilege restrictions, please refer
to the Privilege Requirement part in each command.
0 —— Specify the encryption type. 0 indicates that an unencrypted password
will follow. By default, the encryption type is 0.
password
—— Users’ login password, a string from 1 to 31 alphanumeric
characters or symbols. The password is case sensitive, allows digits, English
letters (case sensitive), underlines and sixteen special characters
( !$%'()*,-./[]{|} ).
7 —— Indicates a symmetric encrypted password with fixed length will follow.
encrypted-password
—— A symmetric encrypted password with fixed length,
which you can copy from another switch’s configuration file. After the
23
encrypted password is configured, you should use the corresponding
unencrypted password if you re-enter this mode.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
User Guidelines
If the password you configured here is unencrypted and the global
encryption function is enabled in service password-encryption, the
password in the configuration file will be displayed in the symmetric
encrypted form.
Example
Add and enable a new admin user named “tplink”, of which the password is
“admin” and unencrypted:
T1600G-28TS(config)#user name tplink privilege admin password 0 admin
3.2 user name (secret)
Description
The user name command is used to add a new user or modify the existed
users’ information. To delete the existed users, please use no user name
command. This command uses the MD5 encryption.
Syntax
user name
name
[ privilege admin | operator | power_user | user ] secret { [ 0 ]
password
| 5
encrypted-password
}
no user name
name
Parameter
name
——Type a name for users' login, which contains 16 characters at most,
composed of digits, English letters and under dashes only.
admin | operator | power_user | user —— Access level. “admin” means that
you can edit, modify and view all the settings of different functions. “operator”
means that you can edit, modify and view most of the the settings of different
functions. “power-user” means that you can edit, modify and view some of
24
the the settings of different functions. “user” means that you can only view
some of the the settings of different functions without the right to edit or
modify. It is “admin” by default.
0 —— Specify the encryption type. 0 indicates that an unencrypted password
will follow. By default, the encryption type is 0.
password
——Users’ login password, a string from 1 to 31 alphanumeric
characters or symbols. The password is case sensitive, allows digits, English
letters (case sensitive), underlines and sixteen special characters
( !$%'()*,-./[]{|} ). The password will be saved to the configuration file using the
MD5 encrypted algorithm.
5 —— Indicates an MD5 encrypted password with fixed length will follow.
encrypted-password
—— An MD5 encrypted password with fixed length,
which you can copy from another switch’s configuration file.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
User Guidelines
If both the user name (password) and user name (secret) are defined, only
the latest configured password will take effect.
Example
Add and enable a new admin user named “tplink”, of which the password is
“admin”. The password will be displayed in the encrypted form.
T1600G-28TS(config)#user name tplink privilege admin secret 0 admin
3.3 show user account-list
Description
The show user account-list command is used to display the information of
the current users.
Syntax
show user account-list
Command Mode
25
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Display the information of the current users:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show user account-list
3.4 show user configuration
Description
The show user configuration command is used to display the security
configuration information of the users, including access-control, max-number
and the idle-timeout, etc.
Syntax
show user configuration
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the security configuration information of the users:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show user configuration
26
Chapter 4 System Configuration Commands
System Commands can be used to configure the System information and System IP, reboot
and reset the switch, upgrade the switch system and other operations.
4.1 system-time manual
Description
The system-time manual command is used to configure the system time
manually.
Syntax
system-time manual
time
Parameter
time
—— Set the date and time manually, MM/DD/YYYY-HH:MM:SS. The valid
value of the year ranges from 2000 to 2037.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the system mode as manual, and the time is 12/20/2010 17:30:35
T1600G-28TS(config)# system-time manual 12/20/2010-17:30:35
4.2 system-time ntp
Description
The system-time ntp command is used to configure the time zone and the IP
address for the NTP Server. The switch will get UTC automatically if it has
connected to an NTP Server.
Syntax
system-time ntp {
timezone
} {
ntp-server
} {
backup-ntp-server
}
{
fetching-rate
}
Parameter
timezone
—— Your local time-zone, and it ranges from UTC-12:00 to
UTC+13:00.
27
The detailed information that each time-zone means are displayed as follow:
UTC-12:00 —— TimeZone for International Date Line West.
UTC-11:00 —— TimeZone for Coordinated Universal Time-11.
UTC-10:00 —— TimeZone for Hawaii.
UTC-09:00 —— TimeZone for Alaska.
UTC-08:00 —— TimeZone for Pacific Time(US Canada).
UTC-07:00 —— TimeZone for Mountain Time(US Canada).
UTC-06:00 —— TimeZone for Central Time(US Canada).
UTC-05:00 —— TimeZone for Eastern Time(US Canada).
UTC-04:30 —— TimeZone for Caracas.
UTC-04:00 —— TimeZone for Atlantic Time(Canada).
UTC-03:30 —— TimeZone for Newfoundland.
UTC-03:00 —— TimeZone for Buenos Aires, Salvador, Brasilia.
UTC-02:00 —— TimeZone for Mid-Atlantic.
UTC-01:00 —— TimeZone for Azores, Cape Verde Is.
UTC —— TimeZone for Dublin, Edinburgh, Lisbon, London.
UTC+01:00 —— TimeZone for Amsterdam, Berlin, Bern, Rome, Stockholm,
Vienna.
UTC+02:00 —— TimeZone for Cairo, Athens, Bucharest, Amman, Beirut,
Jerusalem.
UTC+03:00 —— TimeZone for Kuwait, Riyadh, Baghdad.
UTC+03:30 —— TimeZone for Tehran.
UTC+04:00 —— TimeZone for Moscow, St.Petersburg, Volgograd, Tbilisi,
Port Louis.
UTC+04:30 —— TimeZone for Kabul.
UTC+05:00 —— TimeZone for Islamabad, Karachi, Tashkent.
UTC+05:30 —— TimeZone for Chennai, Kolkata, Mumbai, New Delhi.
UTC+05:45 —— TimeZone for Kathmandu.
UTC+06:00 —— TimeZone for Dhaka,Astana, Ekaterinburg.
UTC+06:30 —— TimeZone for Yangon (Rangoon).
UTC+07:00 —— TimeZone for Novosibrisk, Bangkok, Hanoi, Jakarta.
UTC+08:00—— TimeZone for Beijing, Chongqing, Hong Kong, Urumqi,
Singapore.
UTC+09:00 —— TimeZone for Seoul, Irkutsk, Osaka, Sapporo, Tokyo.
UTC+09:30 —— TimeZone for Darwin, Adelaide.
UTC+10:00 —— TimeZone for Canberra, Melbourne, Sydney, Brisbane.
UTC+11:00 —— TimeZone for Solomon Is., New Caledonia, Vladivostok.
UTC+12:00 —— TimeZone for Fiji, Magadan, Auckland, Welington.
UTC+13:00 —— TimeZone for Nuku'alofa, Samoa.
ntp-server
—— The IP address for the Primary NTP Server.
28
backup-ntp-server
—— The IP address for the Secondary NTP Server.
fetching-rate
—— Specify the rate fetching time from NTP server.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the system time mode as NTP, the time zone is UTC-12:00, the
primary NTP server is 133.100.9.2 and the secondary NTP server is
139.78.100.163, the fetching-rate is 11 hours:
T1600G-28TS(config)# system-time ntp UTC-12:00 133.100.9.2
139.79.100.163 11
4.3 system-time dst predefined
Description
The system-time dst predefined command is used to select a daylight
saving time configuration from the predefined mode. The configuration can
be used recurrently. To disable DST function, please use no system-time dst
command.
Syntax
system-time dst predefined [ USA
|
Australia | Europe | New-Zealand ]
no system-time dst
Parameter
USA
|
Australia | Europe | New-Zealand —— The mode of daylight saving time.
There are 4 options which are USA, Australia, Europe and New-Zealand
respectively. The default value is Europe.
Following are the time ranges of each option:
USA —— Second Sunday in March, 02:00 ~ First Sunday in November, 02:00.
Australia —— First Sunday in October, 02:00 ~ First Sunday in April, 03:00.
Europe —— Last Sunday in March, 01:00 ~ Last Sunday in October, 01:00.
New Zealand —— Last Sunday in September, 02:00 ~ First Sunday in April,
03:00.
29
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the daylight saving time as USA standard:
T1600G-28TS(config)#system-time dst predefined USA
4.4 system-time dst date
Description
The system-time dst date command is used to configure the one-off
daylight saving time. The start date is in the current year by default. The time
range of the daylight saving time must shorter than one year, but you can
configure it spanning years. To disable DST function, please use no
system-time dst command.
Syntax
system-time dst date {
smonth
} {
sday
} {
stime
} {
syear
} {
emonth
} {
eday
}
{
etime
} {
eyear
}[
offset
]
no system-time dst
Parameter
smonth
——The start month of the daylight saving time. There are 12 values
showing as follows: Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr, May, Jun, Jul, Aug, Sep, Oct, Nov, Dec.
sday
—— The start day of the daylight saving time, ranging from 1 to 31. Here
you should show special attention to February and the differences between a
solar month and a lunar month.
stime
—— The start moment of the daylight saving time, HH:MM.
syear
—— The start year of the daylight saving time.
emonth
—— The end month of the daylight saving time. There are 12 values
showing as follows: Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr, May, Jun, Jul, Aug, Sep, Oct, Nov, Dec.
eday
—— The end day of the daylight saving time, ranging from q to 31. Here
you should show special attention to February and the differences between a
solar month and a lunar month.
etime
—— The end moment of the daylight saving time, HH:MM.
eyear
—— The end year of the daylight saving time.
30
offset
—— The number of minutes to add during the daylight saving time. It is
60 minutes by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the daylight saving time from zero clock, Apr 1st to zero clock Oct
1st and the offset is 30 minutes in 2015:
T1600G-28TS(config)# system-time dst date Apr 1 00:00 2015 Oct 1 00:00
2015 30
4.5 system-time dst recurring
Description
The system-time dst recurring command is used to configure the recurring
daylight saving time. It can be configured spanning years. To disable DST
function, please use no system-time dst command.
Syntax
system-time dst recurring {
sweek
} {
sday
} {
smonth
} {
stime
} {
eweek
} {
eday
}
{
emonth
} {
etime
} [
offset
]
no system-time dst
Parameter
sweek
——The start week of the daylight saving time. There are 5 values
showing as follows: first, second, third, fourth, last.
sday
—— The start day of the daylight saving time. There are 7 values
showing as follows: Sun, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat.
smonth
—— The start month of the daylight saving time. There are 12 values
showing as follows: Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr, May, Jun, Jul, Aug, Sep, Oct, Nov, Dec.
stime
—— The start moment of the daylight saving time, HH:MM.
eweek
——The end week of the daylight saving time. There are 5 values
showing as follows: first, second, third, fourth, last.
eday
—— The end day of the daylight saving time. There are 5 values
showing as follows: Sun, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat.
31
emonth
—— The end month of the daylight saving time. There are 12 values
showing as following: Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr, May, Jun, Jul, Aug, Sep, Oct, Nov,
Dec.
etime
—— The end moment of the daylight saving time, HH:MM.
offset
—— The number of minutes to add during the daylight saving time. It is
60 minutes by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the daylight saving time from 2:00am, the first Sunday of May to
2:00am, the last Sunday of Oct and the offset is 45 minutes:
T1600G-28TS(config)# system-time dst recurring first Sun May 02:00 last
Sun Oct 02:00 45
4.6 hostname
Description
The hostname command is used to configure the system name. To clear the
system name information, please use no hostname command.
Syntax
hostname [
hostname
]
no hostname
Parameter
hostname
—— System Name. The length of the name ranges from 1 to 32
characters. By default, it is the device name, for example “T1600G-28TS”.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the system name as TPLINK:
32
T1600G-28TS(config)# hostname TPLINK
4.7 location
Description
The location command is used to configure the system location. To clear the
system location information, please use no location command.
Syntax
location [
location
]
no location
Parameter
location
—— Device Location. It consists of 32 characters at
most. It is “SHENZHEN” by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the system location as SHENZHEN:
T1600G-28TS(config)# location SHENZHEN
4.8 contact-info
Description
The contact-info command is used to configure the system contact
information. To clear the system contact information, please use no
contact-info command.
Syntax
contact-info [
contact_info
]
no contact-info
Parameter
contact_info
—— Contact Information. It consists of 32 characters at most. It
is “www.tp-link.com” by default.
33
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the system contact information as www.tp-link.com:
T1600G-28TS(config)# contact
-
info www.tp-link.com
4.9 ip address
Description
This ip address command is used to configure the IP address and IP subnet
mask for the specified interface manually. The interface type includes: routed
port, port-channel interface, loopback interface and VLAN interface.
Syntax
ip address {
ip-addr
} {
mask
} [ secondary ]
no ip address [
ip-addr
] [
mask
]
Parameter
ip-addr
—— The IP address of the Layer 3 interface.
mask
—— The subnet mask of the Layer 3 interface.
secondary —— Specify the interface’s secondary IP address. If this
parameter is omitted here, the configured IP address is the interface’s
primary address.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Create the VLAN interface 2 with the primary IP address as 192.168.1.1/24
and secondary IP address as 192.168.2.1/24:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface vlan 2
34
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# ip address 192.168.1.1 255.255.255.0
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# ip address 192.168.2.1 255.255.255.0 secondary
4.10 ip address-alloc
Description
The IP address-alloc command is used to enable the DHCP Client function or
the BOOTP Protocol. When this function is enabled, the specified interface
will obtain IP from DHCP Server or BOOTP server. To disable the IP obtaining
function on the specified interface, please use the no ip address command.
This command applies to the routed port, the port-channel interface and the
VLAN interface.
Syntax
ip address-alloc { dhcp | bootp }
no ip address
Parameter
dhcp
—— Specify the Layer 3 interface to obtain IP address from the DHCP
Server.
bootp
—— Specify the Layer 3 interface to obtain IP address from the
BOOTP Server.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the DHCP Client function on the Lay 3 routed port 1/0/1:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# no switchport
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# ip address-alloc dhcp
Disable the IP address obtaining function on the VLAN interface 2:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface vlan 2
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# no ip address
35
4.11 reset
Description
The reset command is used to reset the switch’s software. After resetting, all
configuration of the switch will restore to the factory defaults and your
current settings will be lost.
Syntax
reset
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Reset the software of the switch:
T1600G-28TS# reset
4.12 reboot
Description
The reboot command is used to reboot the Switch. To avoid damage, please
don’t turn off the device while rebooting.
Syntax
reboot
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Reboot the switch:
T1600G-28TS# reboot
36
4.13 reboot-schedule
Description
This reboot-schedule command is used to configure the switch to reboot at
a certain time point. To delete the reboot schedule settings, please use the
reboot-schedule cancel command.
Syntax
reboot-schedule at
time
[
date
] [ save_before_reboot ]
reboot-schedule in
interval
[ save_before_reboot ]
reboot-schedule cancel
Parameter
time
—— Specify the time point for the switch to reboot, in the format of
hh:mm.
date
—— Specify the date for the switch to reboot, in the format of
DD:MM:YYYY. The date should be within 30 days.
save_before_reboot
—— Save the configuration file before the switch
reboots.
interval
—— Specify a time period after which the switch reboots. It ranges
from 1 to 43200 minutes.
cancel —— Delete the reboot schedule settings.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
User Guidelines
In the command reboot-schedule at
time
[
date
] [ save_before_reboot ], if
no date is specified and the time you set here is later than the time that this
command is executed, the switch will reboot later that day; otherwise the
switch will reboot at the time point the next day.
Example
Specify the switch to save the configuration files and reboot in 200 minutes,:
T1600G-28TS(config)# reboot-schedule in 200 save_before_reboot
37
4.14 copy running-config startup-config
Description
The copy running-config startup-config command is used to save the
current settings.
Syntax
copy running-config startup-config
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Save current settings:
T1600G-28TS# copy running-config startup-config
4.15 copy startup-config tftp
Description
The copy startup-config tftp command is used to backup the configuration
file to TFTP server.
Syntax
copy startup-config tftp ip-address
ip-addr
filename
name
Parameter
ip-addr
—— IP Address of the TFTP server. Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are
supported, for example 192.168.0.1 or fe80::1234.
name
—— Specify the name for the configuration file which would be backup.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Backup the configuration files to TFTP server with the IP 192.168.0.148 and
name this file config.cfg:
38
T1600G-28TS# copy startup-config tftp ip-address 192.168.0.148 filename
config
Backup the configuration files to TFTP server with the IP fe80::1234 and name
this file config.cfg:
T1600G-28TS# copy startup-config tftp ip-address fe80::1234 filename
config
4.16 copy tftp startup-config
Description
The copy tftp startup-config command is used to download the
configuration file to the switch from TFTP server.
Syntax
copy tftp startup-config ip-address
ip-addr
filename
name
Parameter
ip-addr
—— IP Address of the TFTP server. Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are
supported, for example 192.168.0.1 or fe80::1234.
name
—— Specify the name for the configuration file which would be
downloaded.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Download the configuration file named as config.cfg to the switch from TFTP
server with the IP 192.168.0.148:
T1600G-28TS# copy tftp startup-config ip-address 192.168.0.148
filename
config
Download the configuration file named as config.cfg to the switch from TFTP
server with the IP fe80::1234
T1600G-28TS# copy tftp startup-config ip-address fe80::1234
filename
config
39
4.17 copy backup-config tftp
Description
The copy backup-config tftp command is used to export the backup
configuration file of the switch to TFTP server.
Syntax
copy backup-config tftp ip-address
ip-addr
filename
name
Parameter
ip-addr
—— IP Address of the TFTP server. Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are
supported, for example 192.168.0.1 or fe80::1234.
name
—— Specify the name for the configuration file which would be exported.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Export the backup configuration file of the switch to the TFTP server with the
IP 192.168.0.148 and name the file config.cfg:
T1600G-28TS# copy backup-config tftp ip-address 192.168.0.148
filename
config
4.18 copy backup-config startup-config
Description
The copy backup-config startup-config command is used to replace the
startup configuration file using the backup configuration file.
Syntax
copy backup-config startup-config
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
40
Example
Replace the startup configuration file using the backup configuration file.:
T1600G-28TS# copy backup-config startup-config
4.19 copy running-config backup-config
Description
The copy running-config backup-config tftp command is used to save the
current running configuration as the backup configuration file.
Syntax
copy running-config backup-config
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Save the current running configuration as the backup configuration file.
T1600G-28TS# copy running-config backup-config
4.20 copy tftp backup-config
Description
The copy tftp backup-config command is used to download the backup
configuration file from a TFTP server.
Syntax
Copy tftp backup-config ip-address
ip-addr
filename
name
Parameter
ip-addr
—— IP Address of the TFTP server. Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are
supported, for example 192.168.0.1 or fe80::1234.
name
—— Specify the name for the configuration file which would be
downloaded.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode
Privilege Requirement
41
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Download the configuration file named config.cfg from the TFTP server with
the IP 192.168.0.148:
T1600G-28TS# copy tftp backup-config ip-address 192.168.0.148
filename
config
4.21 boot application
Description
The boot application command is used to configure the image file as startup
image or backup image.
Syntax
boot application filename { image1 | image 2 } { startup | backup }
no boot application
Parameter
image1 | image2 —— Specify the image file to be configured. By default, the
image1.bin is the startup image and the image2.bin is the backup image.
startup | backup —— Specify the property of the image, either startup image
or backup image.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the image2.bin as the startup image:
T1600G-28TS(config)# boot application filename image2 startup
42
4.22 boot config
Description
The boot config command is used to configure the configuration file as
startup configuration or backup configuration.
Syntax
boot config filename { config1 | config 2 } { startup | backup }
no boot application
Parameter
config1 | config2 —— Specify the configuration file to be configured. By
default, the config1.cfg is the startup image and the config2.cfg is the backup
image.
startup | backup—— Specify the property of the configuration.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the config2.cfg as the startup image:
T1600G-28TS(config)# boot config filename config2 startup
4.23 remove backup-image
Description
The remove backup-image command is used to delete the backup-image.
Syntax
remove backup-image
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
43
Example
Delete the backup image file:
T1600G-28TS# remove backup-image
4.24 firmware upgrade
Description
The firmware upgrade command is used to upgrade the switch’s backup
iamge file via the TFTP server. The uploaded firmware file will take place of
the Backup Image, and user can chose whether to reboot the switch will the
Backup Image.
Syntax
firmware upgrade ip-address
ip-addr
filename
name
Parameter
ip-addr
—— IP Address of the TFTP server. Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are
supported, for example 192.168.0.1 or fe80::1234.
name
—— Specify the name for the firmware file.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Upgrade the switch’s backup iamge file with the file firmware.bin in the TFTP
server with the IP address 192.168.0.148, and reboot the switch with this
firmware:
T1600G-28TS# firmware upgrade ip-address 192.168.0.148 filename
firmware.bin
It will only upgrade the backup image. Continue? (Y/N):y
Operation OK!
Reboot with the backup image? (Y/N): y
Upgrade the switch’s backup iamge file with the file firmware.bin in the TFTP
server with the IP address fe80::1234, but do not reboot the switch:
44
T1600G-28TS# firmware upgrade ip-address fe80::1234 filename
firmware.bin
It will only upgrade the backup image. Continue? (Y/N):y
Operation OK!
Reboot with the backup image? (Y/N): n
4.25 ping
Description
The ping command is used to test the connectivity between the switch and
one node of the network.
Syntax
ping [ ip | ipv6 ] {
ip_addr
} [ -n
count
] [ -l
size
] [ -i
interval
]
Parameter
ip
—— The type of the IP address for ping test should be IPv4.
ipv6
—— The type of the IP address for ping test should be IPv6.
ip_addr
—— The IP address of the destination node for ping test. If the
parameter ip/ipv6 is not selected, both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are
supported, for example 192.168.0.100 or fe80::1234.
-n
count
—— The amount of times to send test data during Ping testing. It
ranges from 1 to 10. By default, this value is 4.
-l
size
—— The size of the sending data during ping testing. It ranges from 1 to
1500 bytes. By default, this value is 64.
-i
interval
—— The interval to send ICMP request packets. It ranges from 100
to 1000 milliseconds. By default, this value is 1000.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
To test the connectivity between the switch and the network device with the
IP 192.168.0.131, please specify the
count
(-l) as 512 bytes and
count
(-i) as
1000 milliseconds. If there is not any response after 8 times’ Ping test, the
connection between the switch and the network device is failed to establish:
45
T1600G-28TS# ping 192.168.0.131 –n 8 –l 512
To test the connectivity between the switch and the network device with the
IP fe80::1234, please specify the
count
(-l) as 512 bytes and
count
(-i) as 1000
milliseconds. If there is not any response after 8 times’ Ping test, the
connection between the switch and the network device is failed to establish:
T1600G-28TS# ping fe80::1234 –n 8 –l 512
4.26 tracert
Description
The tracert command is used to test the connectivity of the gateways during
its journey from the source to destination of the test data.
Syntax
tracert [ ip | ipv6 ]
ip_addr
[
maxHops
]
Parameter
ip —— The type of the IP address for tracert test should be IPv4.
ipv6 —— The type of the IP address for tracert test should be IPv6.
ip_addr
—— The IP address of the destination device. If the parameter ip/ipv6
is not selected, both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are supported, for example
192.168.0.100 or fe80::1234.
maxHops
—— The maximum number of the route hops the test data can pass
though. It ranges from 1 to 30. By default, this value is 4.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Test the connectivity between the switch and the network device with the IP
192.168.0.131. If the destination device has not been found after 20
maxHops
,
the connection between the switch and the destination device is
failed to establish:
T1600G-28TS# tracert 192.168.0.131 20
46
Test the connectivity between the switch and the network device with the IP
fe80::1234. If the destination device has not been found after 20
maxHops
,
the connection between the switch and the destination device is failed to
establish:
T1600G-28TS# tracert fe80::1234 20
4.27 show system-info
Description
The show system-info command is used to display System Description,
Device Name, Device Location, System Contact, Hardware Version, Firmware
Version, System Time, Run Time and so on.
Syntax
show system-info
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the system information:
T1600G-28TS# show system-info
4.28 show image-info
Description
The show image-info command is used to display the information of image
files in the system.
Syntax
show image-info
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
47
Example
Display the system image files’ information:
T1600G-28TS# show image-info
4.29 show boot
Description
The show boot command is used to display the boot configuration of the
system.
Syntax
show boot
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Display the system boot configuration information:
T1600G-28TS# show boot
4.30 show running-config
Description
The show running-config command is used to display the current operating
configuration of the system or of a specified port.
Syntax
show running-config
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
48
Example
Display the system current operating configuration:
T1600G-28TS# show running-config
4.31 show startup-config
Description
The show startup-config command is used to display the current
configuration saved in the switch. These configuration settings will not be lost
the next time you reboot the switch.
Syntax
show startup-config
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Display the saved configuration:
T1600G-28TS# show startup-config
4.32 show system-time
Description
The show system-time command is used to display the time information of
the switch.
Syntax
show system-time
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the time information of the switch
T1600G-28TS# show system-time
49
4.33 show system-time dst
Description
The show system-time dst command is used to display the DST information
of the switch.
Syntax
show system-time dst
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the DST information of the switch
T1600G-28TS# show system-time dst
4.34 show system-time ntp
Description
The show system-time ntp command is used to display the NTP mode
configuration information.
Syntax
show system-time ntp
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the NTP mode configuration information of the switch:
T1600G-28TS# show system-time ntp
50
4.35 show cable-diagnostics interface
Description
The show cable-diagnostics interface command is used to display the cable
diagnostics of the connected Ethernet Port., which facilitates you to check
the connection status of the cable connected to the switch, locate and
diagnose the trouble spot of the network.
Syntax
show cable-diagnostics interface { fastEthernet
port
| gigabitEthernet
port
| ten-gigabitEthernet
port
}
Parameter
port
—— The number of the port which is selected for Cable test.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Show the cable-diagnostics of port 3:
T1600G-28TS# show cable-diagnostics interface gigabitEthernet
1/0/3
4.36 show cpu-utilization
Description
The show cpu-utilization command is used to display the system’s CPU
utilization in the last 5 seconds/1minute/5minutes.
Syntax
show cpu-utilization
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
51
Example
Display the CPU utilization information of the switch:
T1600G-28TS# show cpu-utilization
4.37 show memory-utilization
Description
The show memory-utilization command is used to display the current
system’s memory utilization in the last 5 seconds/1minute/5minutes.
Syntax
show memory-utilization
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the memory utilization information of the switch:
T1600G-28TS# show memory-utilization
52
Chapter 5 EEE Configuration Commands
EEE (Energy Efficient Ethernet) is used to save power consumption of the switch during periods
of low data activity. You can simply enable this feature on ports to allow power reduction.
5.1 eee
Description
The eee command is used to enable EEE on the port. To disable EEE on the
port, please use no eee command.
Syntax
eee
no eee
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable EEE on port 1/0/1:
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
T1600G-28TS(config-if)#eee
5.2 show interface eee
Description
The show interface eee command is used to display the EEE configuration
on each port.
Syntax
show interface eee [ fastEthernet
port
| gigabitEthernet
port
|
ten-gigabitEthernet
port
]
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
53
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the EEE configuration of each port
T1600G-28TS# show interface eee
54
Chapter 6 SDM Template Commands
This chapter describes how to configure the Switch Database Management (SDM) templates to
allocate hardware resources on the switch for different uses.
6.1 sdm prefer
Description
The sdm prefer command is used to configure the SDM template. The SDM
template is used to allocate system resources to best support the features
being used in your application. To return to use the default template, please
use the sdm prefer default command. The template change will takes effect
after a reboot.
Syntax
sdm prefer { default | enterpriseV4 | enterpriseV6 }
Parameter
default
—— Specify the SDM template used in the switch as “default”.
enterpriseV4
—— Specify the SDM template used in the switch as
“enterpriseV4”.
enterpriseV6
—— Specify the SDM template used in the switch as
“enterpriseV6”.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Specify the SDM template as enterpriseV4:
T1600G-28TS(config)# sdm prefer enterpriseV4
55
6.2 show sdm prefer
Description
The show sdm prefer command is used to display resource allocation of the
current SDM template in use, or the SDM templates that can be used.
Syntax
show sdm prefer { used | default | enterpriseV4 | enterpriseV6 }
Parameter
used
—— Display the resource allocation of the template currently in use, and
the template that will become active after a reboot.
default
—— Display the resource allocation of the default template.
enterpriseV4
—— Display the resource allocation of the enterpriseV4
template. enterpriseV6
—— Display the resource allocation of the
enterpriseV6 template.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Display the resource allocation of the template currently in use, and the
template that will become active after a reboot:
T1600G-28TS(config)#show sdm prefer used
56
Chapter 7 Time Range Commands
With this feature, you can configure a time range and bind it to a PoE port or an ACL rule.
7.1 time-range
Description
The time-range command is used to create time-range entry w for the switch
and enter Time-range Create Configuration Mode. After a time-range entry is
created, you need to specify the date and time. A time-range can implement
multiple time-ranges simultaneously as long as they do not conflict with each
other. To delete the corresponding time-range configuration, please use no
time-range command.
Syntax
time-range
name
no time-range
name
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Parameter
name
—— The time-range name, ranging from 1 to 16 characters.
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Create a time-range named “tRange1” for the switch:
T1600G-28TS(config)# time-range tRange1
7.2 absolute
Description
The absolute command is used to create an absolute time-range for the
time-range of the switch. To delete the corresponding absolute time-range
configuration, please use no absolute command.
57
Syntax
absolute from
start-date
to
end-date
no absolute [
index
]
Parameter
start-date
—— The start date in Absoluteness Mode, in the format of
MM/DD/YYYY.
end-date
—— The end date in Absoluteness Mode, in the format of
MM/DD/YYYY.
Command Mode
Power Time-range Create Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Create an absolute time-range for the switch and specify the date extending
from May 5th, 2017 through Oct. 5th, 2017:
T1600G-28TS(config)#time-range tRange1
T1600G-28TS(config-time-range)#absolute from 05/05/2017 to
10/05/2017
7.3 periodic
Description
The periodic command is used to create a periodic mode time-range for the
time-range of the switch. To delete the corresponding periodic mode
time-range configuration, please use no periodic command.
Syntax
periodic { [start
start-time
] [ end
end-time
] [day-of-the-week
week-day
]
no periodic [
index
]
Parameter
start-time
——Specify the start time in the format of HH:MM
end-time
——Specify the end time in the format of HH:MM
week-day
——Specify the days of a week in the format of 1-3, 7. The
numbers 1-7 respectively represent Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday,
Thursday, Friday, Saturday and Sunday.
58
Command Mode
Power Time-range Create Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the time-range named “tRange2” as a periodic time-range and
specify the date and time as 8:30 to 12:00 on weekends:
T1600G-28TS(config)#time-range tRange2
T1600G-28TS(config -time-range)#periodic start 08:30 end 12:00
day-of-the-week 6-7
7.4 holiday (time-range mode)
Description
The holiday command is used to create holiday mode time-range for the
time-range of the switch. When the holiday which is excluded from
time-range occurs, the switch will not supply power.
Syntax
holiday { exclude | include }
Parameter
exclude
——The time range will not take effect on holiday.
include
—— The time range will take effect on holiday.
Command Mode
Power Time-range Create Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Create a time-range entry named “tRange3” and configure time-range to
exclude the holiday:
T1600G-28TS(config)#time-range tRange3
T1600G-28TS(config-time-range)#holiday exclude
59
7.5 holiday
Description
The holiday command is used to create holiday for the switch. To delete the
corresponding holiday configuration, please use no holiday command.
Syntax
holiday
name
start-date
start-date
end-date
end-date
no holiday
name
Parameter
name
—— The holiday name, ranging from 1 to 16 characters.
start-date
—— The start date of the holiday, in the format of MM/DD, for
instance, 05/01.
end-date
——The end date of the holiday, in the format of MM/DD, for
instance, 05/01.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Create a holiday named “holiday1” and configure the start date as October
1st and the end date as October 3rd:
T1600G-28TS(config)# holiday holiday1 start-date 10/01 end-date 10/03
7.6 show holiday
Description
The show holiday command is used to display the defined holiday.
Syntax
show holiday
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
60
Example
Display the defined holiday:
T1600G-28TS# show holiday
7.7 show time-range
Description
The show holiday command is used to display the defined holiday.
Syntax
show time-range
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the defined holiday:
T1600G-28TS# show holiday
61
Chapter 8 Port Configuration Commands
Ethernet Configuration Commands can be used to configure the Bandwidth Control,
Negotiation Mode and Storm Control for Ethernet ports.
8.1 interface gigabitEthernet
Description
The interface gigabitEthernet command is used to enter the Interface
gigabitEthernet Configuration Mode and configure the corresponding Gigabit
Ethernet port.
Syntax
interface gigabitEthernet
port
Parameter
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
To enter the Interface gigabitEthernet Configuration Mode and configure port
2:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
8.2 interface range gigabitEthernet
Description
The interface range gigabitEthernet command is used to enter the interface
range gigabitEthernet Configuration Mode and configure multiple Gigabit
Ethernet ports at the same time.
62
Syntax
interface range gigabitEthernet
port-list
Parameter
port-list
—— The list of Ethernet ports.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
User Guidelines
Command in the Interface Range gigabitEthernet Mode is executed
independently on all ports in the range. It does not affect the execution on the
other ports at all if the command results in an error on one port.
Example
To enter the Interface range gigabitEthernet Configuration Mode, and
configure ports 1, 2, 3, 6, 7 and 9 at the same time by adding them to one
port-list:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface range gigabitEthernet
1/0/1-3,1/0/6-7,1/0/9
8.3 description
Description
The description command is used to add a description to the Ethernet port.
To clear the description of the corresponding port, please use no
description command.
Syntax
description
string
no description
Parameter
string
—— Content of a port description, ranging from 1 to 16 characters.
63
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Add a description Port_5 to port 1/0/5:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# description Port_5
8.4 shutdown
Description
The shutdown command is used to disable an Ethernet port. To enable this
port again, please use no shutdown command.
Syntax
shutdown
no shutdown
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Disable port 1/0/3:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# shutdown
64
8.5 flow-control
Description
The flow-control command is used to enable the flow-control function for a
port. To disable the flow-control function for this corresponding port, please
use no flow-control command. With the flow-control function enabled, the
Ingress Rate and Egress Rate can be synchronized to avoid packet loss in the
network.
Syntax
flow-control
no flow-control
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable the flow-control function for port 1/0/3:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# flow-control
8.6 duplex
Description
The duplex command is used to configure the Duplex Mode for an Ethernet
port. To return to the default configuration, please use no duplex command.
Syntax
duplex { auto | full | half }
no duplex
Parameter
auto | full | half —— The duplex mode of the Ethernet port. There are three
options: auto-negotiation mode, full-duplex mode and half-duplex mode. By
default the Gigabit Ethernet port is auto-negotiation mode.
65
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the Duplex Mode as full-duplex for port 1/0/3:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# duplex full
8.7 jumbo-size
Description
The jumbo-size command is used to specify the size of jumbo frames.
Syntax
jumbo-size
size
Parameter
size
—— The value of jumbo frames. It ranges from 1518 to 9216 bytes, and
the default is 1518 bytes.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Globally configure the size of jumbo frames as 9216:
T1600G-28TS(config)# jumbo-size 9216
8.8 speed
Description
The speed command is used to configure the Speed Mode for an Ethernet
port. To return to the default configuration, please use no speed command.
66
Syntax
speed { 10 | 100 | 1000 | auto }
no speed
Parameter
10 | 100 | 1000 | auto —— The speed mode of the Ethernet port. There are
four options: 10Mbps, 100Mbps, 1000Mbps and Auto negotiation mode
(default).
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the Speed Mode as 100Mbps for port 1/0/3:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# speed 100
8.9 clear counters
Description
The clear counters command is used to clear the statistics information of all
the Ethernet ports and port channels.
Syntax
clear counters
clear counters interface [ gigabitEthernet
port
] [ port-channel
port-channel-id
]
Parameter
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
port-channel-id
—— The ID of the port channel.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
67
Example
Clear the statistic information of all ports and port channels:
T1600G-28TS(config)# clear counters
8.10 show interface status
Description
The show interface status command is used to display the connection
status of the Ethernet port/port channel.
Syntax
show interface status [ gigabitEthernet
port
] [ port-channel
port-channel-id
]
Parameter
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
port-channel-id
—— The ID of the port channel..
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the connection status of all ports and port channels:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show interface status
Display the connection status of port 1/0/1:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show interface status gigabitEthernet
1/0/1
8.11 show interface counters
Description
The show interface counters command is used to display the statistics
information of all ports/port channels.
Syntax
show interface counters [ gigabitEthernet
port
] [ port-channel
port-channel-id
]
Parameter
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
68
port-channel-id
—— The ID of the port channel.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the statistics information of all Ethernet ports and port channels:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show interface counters
Display the statistics information of port 1/0/2:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show interface counters gigabitEthernet
1/0/2
8.12 show interface configuration
Description
The show interface configuration command is used to display the
configurations of all ports and port channels, including Port-status, Flow
Control, Negotiation Mode and Port-description.
Syntax
show interface configuration [ gigabitEthernet
port
] [ port-channel
port-channel-id
]
Parameter
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
port-channel-id
—— The ID of the port channel.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the configurations of all Ethernet ports and port channels:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show interface configuration
Display the configurations of port 1/0/2:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show interface configuration gigabitEthernet
1/0/2
69
Chapter 9 Port Isolation Commands
Port Isolation provides a method of restricting traffic flow to improve the network security by
forbidding the port to forward packets to the ports that are not on its forwarding port list.
9.1 port isolation
Description
The port isolation command is used to configure the forward port/port
channel list of a port/port channel, so that this port/port channel can only
communicate with the ports/port channels on its list. To delete the
corresponding configuration, please use no port isolation command.
Syntax
port isolation { [ fa-forward-list
fa-forward-list
] [ gi-forward-list
gi-forward-list
] [ po-forward-list
po-forward-list
] [ te-forward-list
te-forward-list
] }
no port isolation
Parameter
fa-forward-list
/
gi-forward-list
/
te-forward-list
—— The list of Ethernet ports.
po
-forward-list
—— The list of port channels.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Set port 1, 2, 4 and port channel 2 to the forward list of port 1/0/5:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# port isolation gi-forward-list 1/0/1-2,1/0/4
po-forward-list 2
Set all Ethernet ports and port channels to forward list of port 1/0/2, namely
restore to the default setting:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
70
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# no port isolation
9.2 show port isolation interface
Description
The show port isolation interface command is used to display the forward
port list of a port/port channel.
Syntax
show port isolation interface [fastEthernet
port
| gigabitEthernet
port
|
ten-gigabitEthernet
port
| port-channel
port-channel-id
]
Parameter
port ——
The number of Ethernet port you want to show its forward port list,
in the format of 1/0/2.
port-channel-id ——
The ID of port channel you want to show its forward port
list, ranging from 1 to 6.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the forward-list of port 1/0/2:
T1600G-28TS# show port isolation interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
Display the forward-list of all Ethernet ports and port channels:
T1600G-28TS# show port isolation interface
71
Chapter 10 Loopback Detection Commands
With loopback detection feature enabled, the switch can detect loops using loopback
detection packets. When a loop is detected, the switch will display an alert or further block the
corresponding port according to the configuration.
10.1 loopback-detection (global)
Description
The loopback-detection command is used to enable the loopback detection
function globally. To disable it, please use no loopback detection command.
Syntax
loopback-detection
no loopback-detection
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the loopback detection function globally:
T1600G-28TS(config)# loopback-detection
10.2 loopback-detection interval
Description
The loopback-detection interval command is used to define the interval of
sending loopback detection packets from switch ports to network, aiming at
detecting network loops periodically.
Syntax
loopback-detection interval
interval-time
Parameter
interval-time
—— The interval of sending loopback detection packets. It
ranges from 1 to 1000 seconds. By default, this value is 30.
72
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify the interval-time as 50 seconds:
T1600G-28TS(config)# loopback-detection interval 50
10.3 loopback-detection recovery-time
Description
The loopback-detection recovery-time command is used to configure the
time after which the blocked port would automatically recover to normal
status.
Syntax
loopback-detection recovery-time
recovery-time
Parameter
recovery-time
—— The time after which the blocked port would automatically
recover to normal status, and the loopback detection would restart. It ranges
from 2 to 1000000 seconds. By default, this value is 90.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the recovery-time
as 70 seconds:
T1600G-28TS(config)# loopback-detection recovery-time 70
73
10.4 loopback-detection (interface)
Description
The loopback-detection command is used to enable the loopback
detection function of the specified port. To disable it, please use no
loopback-detection command.
Syntax
loopback-detection
no loopback-detection
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet | interface range
gigabitEthernet | interface port-channel | interface range port-channel )
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the loopback detection function of ports 1-3:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/1-3
T1600G-28TS(Config-if-range)# loopback-detection
10.5 loopback-detection config process-mode
Description
The loopback-detection config process-mode command is used to
configure the process-mode for the ports by which the switch copes with the
detected loops. You also need to configure the recovery mode to remove the
block status of the port or VLAN when the process-mode is Port Based or
VLAN Based.
Syntax
loopback-detection config process-mode { alert | port-based | vlan-based }
recovery-mode { auto | manual }
Parameter
alert —— When a loop is detected, the switch will send a trap message and
generate an entry on the log file. It is the default setting.
port-based —— When a loop is detected, the switch will send a trap message
and generate an entry on the log file. In addition, the switch will block the port
74
on which the loop is detected and no packets can pass through the port.
vlan-based —— When a loop is detected, the switch will send a trap message
and generate an entry on the log file. In addition, the switch will block the
VLAN in which the loop is detected and only the packets of the blocked VLAN
cannot pass through the port.
auto —— Block status can be automatically removed after recovery time.
manual —— Block status can only be removed manually.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet | interface range
gigabitEthernet | interface port-channel | interface range port-channel )
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the loopback detection process-mode as port-based, and
configure the recovery mode as manual for port 2:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# loopback-detection config process-mode
port-based recovery-mode manual
10.6 loopback-detection recover
Description
The loopback-detection recover command is used to remove the block
status of selected ports, recovering the blocked ports to normal status,
Syntax
loopback-detection recover
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet | interface range
gigabitEthernet | interface port-channel | interface range port-channel )
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Recover the blocked port 1/0/2 to normal status:
75
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# loopback-detection recover
10.7 show loopback-detection global
Description
The show loopback-detection global command is used to display the global
configuration of loopback detection function such as loopback detection
global status, loopback detection interval and loopback detection recovery
time.
Syntax
show loopback-detection global
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the global configuration of loopback detection function:
T1600G-28TS# show loopback-detection global
10.8 show loopback-detection interface
Description
The show loopback-detection interface command is used to display the
configuration of loopback detection function and the status of the specified
Ethernet port.
Syntax
show loopback-detection interface [ gigabitEthernet
port
|
port-channel
lagid
] [ detail ]
Parameter
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
lagid
—— The number of LAG, ranging from 1 to 14.
detail
—— Displays the loop status and block status of the VLAN which the
specified port belongs to.
76
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the configuration of loopback detection function and the status of all
ports:
T1600G-28TS# show loopback-detection interface
Display the configuration of loopback detection function and the status of
port 5:
T1600G-28TS# show loopback-detection interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5
77
Chapter 11 Etherchannel Commands
Etherchannel Commands are used to configure LAG and LACP function.
LAG (Link Aggregation Group) is to combine a number of ports together to make a single
high-bandwidth data path, which can highly extend the bandwidth. The bandwidth of the LAG is
the sum of bandwidth of its member port.
LACP (Link Aggregation Control Protocol) is defined in IEEE802.3ad and enables the dynamic
link aggregation and disaggregation by exchanging LACP packets with its partner. The switch
can dynamically group similarly configured ports into a single logical link, which will highly
extend the bandwidth and flexibly balance the load.
11.1 channel-group
Description
The channel-group command is used to add a port to the EtherChannel
Group and configure its mode. To delete the port from the EtherChannel
Group, please use no channel-group command.
Syntax
channel-group
num
mode { on | active | passive }
no channel-group
Parameter
num
—— The number of the EtherChannel Group, ranging from 1 to 14.
on —— Enable the static LAG.
active —— Enable the active LACP mode.
passive —— Enable the passive LACP mode.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
78
Example
Add ports 2-4 to EtherChannel Group 1 and enable the static LAG:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/2-4
T1600G-28TS(config-if-range)# channel-group 1 mode on
11.2 port-channel load-balance
Description
The port-channel load-balance command is used to configure the
Aggregate Arithmetic for LAG. To return to the default configurations, please
use no port-channel load-balance command.
Syntax
port-channel load-balance { src-mac | dst-mac | src-dst-mac | src-ip | dst-ip |
src-dst-ip }
no port-channel load-balance
Parameter
src-mac —— The source MAC address. When this option is selected, the
Aggregate Arithmetic will be based on the source MAC address of the
packets.
dst-mac —— The destination MAC address. When this option is selected, the
Aggregate Arithmetic will be based on the destination MAC address of the
packets.
src-dst-mac —— The source and destination MAC address. When this option
is selected, the Aggregate Arithmetic will be based on the source and
destination MAC addresses of the packets. The Aggregate Arithmetic for
LAG is “src-dst-mac” by default.
src-ip —— The source IP address. When this option is selected, the
Aggregate Arithmetic will be based on the source IP address of the packets.
dst-ip —— The destination IP address. When this option is selected, the
Aggregate Arithmetic will be based on the destination IP address of the
packets.
src-dst-ip —— The source and destination IP address. When this option is
selected, the Aggregate Arithmetic will be based on the source and
destination IP addresses of the packets.
79
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the Aggregate Arithmetic for LAG as “src-dst-ip”:
T1600G-28TS(config)# port-channel load-balance src-dst-ip
11.3 lacp system-priority
Description
The lacp system-priority command is used to configure the LACP system
priority globally. To return to the default configurations, please use no lacp
system-priority command.
Syntax
lacp system-priority
pri
no lacp system-priority
Parameter
pri
—— The system priority, ranging from 0 to 65535. It is 32768 by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the LACP system priority as 1024 globally:
T1600G-28TS(config)# lacp system-priority 1024
80
11.4 lacp port-priority
Description
The lacp port-priority command is used to configure the LACP port priority
for specified ports. To return to the default configurations, please use no lacp
port-priority command.
Syntax
lacp port-priority
pri
no lacp port-priority
Parameter
pri
—— The port priority, ranging from 0 to 65535. It is 32768 by default.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the LACP port priority as 1024 for ports 1-3:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/1-3
T1600G-28TS(config-if-range)# lacp port-priority 1024
Configure the LACP port priority as 2048 for port 4:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/4
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# lacp port-priority 2048
11.5 show etherchannel
Description
The show etherchannel command is used to display the EtherChannel
information.
Syntax
show etherchannel [
channel-group-num
] { detail | summary }
81
Parameter
channel-group-num
—— The EtherChannel Group number, ranging from 1 to
14. By default, it is empty, and will display the information of all EtherChannel
Groups.
detail —— The detailed information of EtherChannel.
summary —— The EtherChannel information in summary.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the detailed information of EtherChannel Group 1:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show etherchannel 1 detail
11.6 show etherchannel load-balance
Description
The show etherchannel load-balance command is used to display the
Aggregate Arithmetic of LAG.
Syntax
show etherchannel load-balance
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the Aggregate Arithmetic of LAG:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show etherchannel load-balance
82
11.7 show lacp
Description
The show lacp command is used to display the LACP information for a
specified EtherChannel Group.
Syntax
show lacp [
channel-group-num
] { internal
|
neighbor }
Parameter
channel-group-num
—— The EtherChannel Group number, ranging from 1 to
14. By default, it is empty, and will display the information of all LACP groups.
internal —— The internal LACP information.
neighbor —— The neighbor LACP information.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the internal LACP information of EtherChannel Group 1:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show lacp 1 internal
11.8 show lacp sys-id
Description
The show lacp sys-id command is used to display the LACP system priority
globally.
Syntax
show lacp sys-id
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
83
Example
Display the LACP system priority:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show lacp sys-id
84
Chapter 12 MAC Address Commands
MAC Address configuration can improve the network security by configuring the Port Security
and maintaining the address information by managing the Address Table.
12.1 mac address-table static
Description
The mac address-table static command is used to add the static MAC
address entry. To remove the corresponding entry, please use no mac
address-table static command. The static address can be added or removed
manually, independent of the aging time. In the stable networks, the static
MAC address entries can facilitate the switch to reduce broadcast packets
and enhance the efficiency of packets forwarding remarkably.
Syntax
mac address-table static
mac-addr
vid
vid
interface { fastEthernet
port
|
gigabitEthernet
port
| ten-gigabitEthernet
port
}
no mac address-table static
mac-addr
vid
vid
interface { fastEthernet
port
|
gigabitEthernet
port
| ten-gigabitEthernet
port
}
Parameter
mac-addr
——The MAC address of the entry you desire to add.
vid
—— The VLAN ID number of your desired entry. It ranges from 1 to 4094.
port
—— The Ethernet port number of your desired entry.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Add a static Mac address entry to bind the MAC address 00:02:58:4f:6c:23,
VLAN1 and port 1 together:
T1600G-28TS(config)# mac address-table static 00:02:58:4f:6c:23 vid 1
interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
85
12.2 mac address-table aging-time
Description
The mac address-table aging-time command is used to configure aging
time for the dynamic address. To return to the default configuration, please
use no mac address-table aging-time command.
Syntax
mac address-table aging-time
aging-time
no mac address-table aging-time
Parameter
aging-time
—— The aging time for the dynamic address. The value of it can
be 0 or ranges from 10 to 630 seconds. When 0 is entered, the Auto Aging
function is disabled. It is 300 by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the aging time as 500 seconds:
T1600G-28TS(config)# mac address-table aging-time 500
12.3 mac address-table filtering
Description
The mac address-table filtering command is used to add the filtering
address entry. To delete the corresponding entry, please use no mac
address-table filtering command. The filtering address function is to forbid
the undesired package to be forwarded. The filtering address can be added
or removed manually, independent of the aging time.
Syntax
mac address-table filtering
mac-addr
vid
vid
no mac address-table filtering {[
mac-addr
] [ vid
vid
]}
Parameter
mac-addr
—— The MAC address to be filtered.
86
vid
—— The corresponding VLAN ID of the MAC address. It ranges from 1 to
4094.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Add a filtering address entry of which VLAN ID is 1 and MAC address is
00:1e:4b:04:01:5d:
T1600G-28TS(config)# mac address-table filtering 00:1e:4b:04:01:5d vid 1
12.4 mac address-table max-mac-count
Description
The mac address-table max-mac-count command is used to configure the
Port Security. To return to the default configurations, please use no mac
address-table max-mac-count command. Port Security is to protect the
switch from the malicious MAC address attack by limiting the maximum
number of the MAC addresses that can be learned on the port. The port with
Port Security feature enabled will learned the MAC address dynamically.
When the learned MAC address number reaches the maximum, the port will
stop learning. Therefore, the other devices with the MAC address unlearned
cannot access to the network via this port.
Syntax
mac address-table max-mac-count { [ max-number
num
] [ mode { dynamic |
static | permanent } ] [ status { forward | drop | disable } ]
[ exceed-max-learned enable | disable ] }
no mac address-table max-mac-count [ max-number | mode | status ]
Parameter
num
—— The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on
the port. It ranges from 0 to 64. By default this value is 64.
dynamic | static | permanent —— Learn mode for MAC addresses. There are
three modes, including Dynamic mode, Static mode and Permanent mode.
When Dynamic mode is selected, the learned MAC address will be deleted
automatically after the aging time. When Static mode is selected, the learned
87
MAC address will be out of the influence of the aging time and can only be
deleted manually. The learned entries will be cleared after the switch is
rebooted. When permanent mode is selected, the learned MAC address will
be out of the influence of the aging time and can only be deleted manually too.
However, the learned entries will be saved even the switch is rebooted.
status —— Select the action to be taken when the number of the MAC
addresses reaches the maximum learning number on the port. By default this
function is disabled.
• forward: The packets will be forward but not be learned when learned
MAC number exceeds the maximum MAC address number on this port.
• drop: The packets will be dropped when learned MAC number exceeds
the maximum MAC address number on this port.
• disable: The MAC address threshold on this port is disabled.
new-mac-learned enable | disable —— Enable/Disable the new-mac-learned
notification on this port. With this feature enabled, a SNMP notification is
generated and sent to the network management system (NMS) when the port
learns a new MAC address.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable Port Security function for port 1/0/1, select Static mode as the learn
mode, and specify the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be
learned on this port as 30. When the number of MAC address entries reaches
30 on this port, new entry will be dropped:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# mac address-table max-mac-count max-number
30 mode static status drop
88
12.5 show mac address-table
Description
The show mac address-table command is used to display the information of
all address entries.
Syntax
show mac address-table { dynamic | static | filtering }
Parameter
dynamic | static | filtering —— The type of your desired entry. By default all
the entries are displayed.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the information of all address entries:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show mac address-table
12.6 clear mac address-table
Description
The show mac address-table command is used to clear the specified
address entries.
Syntax
clear mac address-table { dynamic | static | filtering }
Parameter
dynamic | static | filtering —— The type of your desired entry.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Clear the information of all static address entries:
89
T1600G-28TS(config)# clear mac address-table static
12.7 show mac address-table aging-time
Description
The show mac address-table aging-time command is used to display the
Aging Time of the MAC address.
Syntax
show mac address-table aging-time
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the Aging Time of the MAC address:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show mac address-table aging-time
12.8 show mac address-table max-mac-count
Description
The show mac address-table max-mac-count interface gigabitEthernet
command is used to display the security configuration of all ports or the
specified port.
Syntax
show mac address-table max-mac-count { all | interface gigabitEthernet
port
}
Parameter
all
—— Displays the security information of all the Ethernet ports.
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
90
Example
Display the security configuration of all ports:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show mac address-table max-mac-count all
Display the security configuration of port 1/0/1:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show mac address-table max-mac-count interface
gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
12.9 show mac address-table interface
Description
The show mac address-table interface command is used to display the
address configuration of the specified port/port channel.
Syntax
show mac address-table interface { gigabitEthernet
port
| port-channel
port-channel-id
}
Parameter
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
port-channel-id
—— The ID of the port channel.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the address configuration of port 1/0/1:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show mac address-table interface gigabitEthernet
1/0/1
12.10 show mac address-table count
Description
The show mac address-table count command is used to display the total
amount of MAC address table.
Syntax
show mac address-table count [ vlan
vlan-id
]
91
Parameter
vlan-
id
—— Specify the VLAN which the MAC entries belong to.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the total MAC entry information in different VLANs:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show mac address-table count
12.11 show mac address-table address
Description
The show mac address-table address command is used to display the
information of the specified MAC address.
Syntax
show mac address-table address
mac-addr
[ interface { gigabitEthernet
port
| port-channel
port-channel-id
} | vid
vlan-id
]
Parameter
mac-addr
——The specified MAC address.
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
port-channel-id
—— The ID of the port channel.
vlan-id
—— Specify the VLAN which the entry belongs to.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the information of the MAC address 00:00:00:00:23:00 in VLAN 1:
T1600G-28TS(config)#show mac address-table address 00:00:00:00:23:00
vid 1
92
12.12 show mac address-table vlan
Description
The show mac address-table vlan command is used to display the MAC
address configuration of the specified vlan.
Syntax
show mac address-table vlan
vid
Parameter
vid
——The specified VLAN id.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the MAC address configuration of vlan 1:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show mac address-table vlan 1
93
Chapter 13 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Commands
VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) technology is developed for the switch to divide the LAN
into multiple logical LANs flexibly. Hosts in the same VLAN can communicate with each other,
regardless of their physical locations. VLAN can enhance performance by conserving
bandwidth, and improve security by limiting traffic to specific domains.
13.1 vlan
Description
The vlan command is used to create IEEE 802.1Q VLAN and enter VLAN
Configuration Mode. To delete the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN, please use no vlan
command.
Syntax
vlan
vlan-list
no vlan
vlan-list
Parameter
vlan-list
—— Specify IEEE 802.1Q VLAN ID list, ranging from 2 to 4094, in the
format of 2-3, 5. It is multi-optional.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Create VLAN 2-10 and VLAN 100:
T1600G-28TS(config)# vlan 2-10,100
Delete VLAN 2:
T1600G-28TS(config)# no vlan 2
94
13.2 name
Description
The name command is used to assign a description to a VLAN. To clear the
description, please use no name command.
Syntax
name
descript
no name
Parameter
descript
——String to describe the VLAN, which contains 16 characters at
most.
Command Mode
VLAN Configuration Mode(VLAN)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify the name of VLAN 2 as “group1”:
T1600G-28TS(config)# vlan 2
T1600G-28TS(config-vlan)# name group1
13.3 switchport general allowed vlan
Description
The switchport general allowed vlan command is used to add the desired
port to IEEE 802.1Q VLAN, or to remove a port from the corresponding VLAN.
Syntax
switchport general allowed vlan
vlan-list
{ tagged | untagged }
no switchport general allowed vlan
vlan-list
Parameter
vlan-list
—— VLAN ID list, ranging from 2 to 4094, in the format of 2-3, 5. It is
multi-optional.
95
tagged | untagged —— egress-rule.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/4 whose link type is “general” to VLAN 2
and its egress-rule as “tagged”:
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/4
T1600G-28TS(config-if)#switchport mode general
T1600G-28TS(config-if)#switchport general allowed vlan 2 tagged
13.4 switchport pvid
Description
The switchport pvid command is used to configure the PVID for the switch
ports.
Syntax
switchport pvid
vlan-id
Parameter
vlan-id
—— VLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4094.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify the PVID of port 1/0/2 as 2:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
96
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# switchport pvid 2
13.5 switchport check ingress
Description
The switchport check ingress command is used to enable the Ingress
Checking function for the switch ports. With this function enabled, the port
will accept the packet of which the VLAN ID is in the port's VLAN list and
discard others. With this function disabled, the port will forward the packet
directly. To disable this function, please use no switchport check ingress
command.
Syntax
switchport check ingress
no switchport check ingress
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable Ingress Checking on the port 1/0/2:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# switchport check ingress
13.6 switchport acceptable frame
Description
The switchport acceptable frame command is used to specify the
acceptable frame type for the switch ports and the ports will perform this
operation before Ingress Checking. To restore to the default setting, please
use no switchport acceptable frame command.
Syntax
switchport acceptable frame
{ all | tagged }
97
no switchport acceptable frame
Parameter
all | tagged —— the acceptable frame type.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify the acceptable frame type of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/4 as “tagged”:
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/4
T1600G-28TS(config-if)#switchport acceptable frame general
13.7 show vlan summary
Description
The show vlan summary command is used to display the summarized
information of IEEE 802.1Q VLAN.
Syntax
show vlan summary
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the summarized information of IEEE 802.1Q VLAN:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show vlan summary
98
13.8 show vlan brief
Description
The show vlan brief command is used to display the brief information of IEEE
802.1Q VLAN.
Syntax
show vlan brief
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the brief information of IEEE 802.1Q VLAN:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show vlan brief
13.9 show vlan
Description
The show vlan command is used to display the information of IEEE 802.1Q
VLAN.
Syntax
show vlan [ id
vlan-id
]
Parameter
vlan-id
—— Specify IEEE 802.1Q VLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4094. It is
multi-optional. Using the show vlan command without parameter displays the
detailed information of all VLANs.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
99
Example
Display the information of vlan 5:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show vlan id 5
13.10 show interface switchport
Description
The show interface switchport command is used to display the IEEE 802.1Q
VLAN configuration information of the specified port/port channel.
Syntax
show interface switchport [fastEthernet
port
| gigabitEthernet
port
|
ten-gigabitEthernet
port
| port-channel
port-channel-id
]
Parameter
port
—— The port number.
port-channel-id
—— The ID of the port channel.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the VLAN configuration information of all ports and port channels:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show interface switchport
100
Chapter 14 MAC-based VLAN Commands
MAC VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) is the way to classify the VLANs based on MAC
Address. A MAC address is relative to a single VLAN ID. The untagged packets and the
priority-tagged packets coming from the MAC address will be tagged with this VLAN ID.
14.1 mac-vlan mac-address
Description
The mac-vlan mac-address command is used to create a MAC-based VLAN
entry. To delete a MAC-based VLAN entry, please use the no mac-vlan
mac-address command.
Syntax
mac-vlan mac-address
mac-addr
vlan
vlan-id
[description
descript
]
no mac-vlan mac-address
mac-addr
Parameter
mac-addr
—— MAC address, in the format of XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX.
vlan-id
—— Specify IEEE 802.1Q VLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4094.
descript
—— Give a description to the MAC address for identification, which
contains 8 characters at most.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Create VLAN 2 with the MAC address 00:11:11:01:01:12 and the name “TP”:
T1600G-28TS(config)#mac-vlan mac-address 00:11:11:01:01:12 vlan 2
description TP
101
14.2 mac-vlan
Description
The mac-vlan command is used to enable a port for the MAC-based VLAN
feature. Only the port is enabled can the configured MAC-based VLAN take
effect. To disable the MAC-based VLAN function, please use no mac-vlan
command. All the ports are disabled by default.
Syntax
mac-vlan
no mac-vlan
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/3 for the MAC-based VLAN feature:
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
T1600G-28TS(config-if)#mac-vlan
14.3 show mac-vlan
Description
The show mac-vlan command is used to display the information of the
MAC-based VLAN entry. MAC address and VLAN ID can be used to filter the
displayed information.
Syntax
show mac-vlan { all | mac-address
mac-addr
| vlan
vlan-id
}
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
102
Privilege Requirement
None.
Parameter
mac-addr
—— MAC address, in the format of XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX.
vlan-id
—— Specify IEEE 802.1Q VLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4094.
Example
Display the information of all the MAC-based VLAN entry:
T1600G-28TS(config)#show mac-vlan all
14.4 show mac-vlan interface
Description
The show mac-vlan interface command is used to display the port state of
MAC-based VLAN.
Syntax
show mac-vlan interface
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the enable state of all the ports:
T1600G-28TS(config)#show mac-vlan interface
103
Chapter 15 Protocol-based VLAN Commands
Protocol VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) is the way to classify VLANs based on Protocols. A
Protocol is relative to a single VLAN ID. The untagged packets and the priority-tagged packets
matching the protocol template will be tagged with this VLAN ID.
15.1 protocol-vlan template
Description
The protocol-vlan template command is used to create Protocol-based
VLAN template. To delete Protocol-based VLAN template, please use no
protocol-vlan template command.
Syntax
protocol-vlan template name
protocol-name
frame { ether_2 ether-type
type
| snap ether-type
type
| llc dsap
dsap_type
ssap
ssap
_
type
}
no protocol-vlan template
template-idx
Parameter
protocol-name
—— Give a name for the Protocol-based VLAN Template ,
which contains 8 characters at most.
ether_2 ether-type
type
—— Specify the Ethernet type.
snap ether-type
type
—— Specify the Ethernet type.
llc dsap
dsap
_
type
ssap
ssap
_
type
—— Specify the DSAP type and the
SSAP type.
template-idx
—— The number of the Protocol-based VLAN Template. You
can get the template corresponding to the number by the show
protocol-vlan template command.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
104
Example
Create a Protocol-based VLAN template named “TP” whose Ethernet
protocol type is 0x2024:
T1600G-28TS(config)#protocol-vlan template name TP frame ether_2
ether-type 2024
15.2 protocol-vlan vlan
Description
The protocol-vlan vlan command is used to create a Protocol-based VLAN
entry. To delete a Protocol-based VLAN entry, please use no protocol-vlan
vlan command.
Syntax
protocol-vlan vlan
vlan-id
priority
priority
template
template-idx
no protocol-vlan vlan
group-idx
Parameter
vlan-id
—— Specify IEEE 802.1Q VLAN ID, ranging from 1-4094.
priority
—— Specify the 802.1p priority for the packets that belong to the
protocol VLAN, ranging from 0-7. The switch will determine the forwarding
sequence according this value. The packets with larger value of 802.1p
priority have the higher priority.
template-idx
——The number of the Protocol-based VLAN Template. You can
get the template corresponding to the number by the show protocol-vlan
template command.
group-idx
——The number of the Protocol-based VLAN entry. You can get
the Protocol-based VLAN entry corresponding to the number by the show
protocol-vlan vlan command.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
105
Example
Create Protocol-based VLAN 2 and bind it with Protocol-based VLAN Template
3:
T1600G-28TS(config)#protocol-vlan vlan 2 template 3
15.3 protocol-vlan group
Description
The protocol-vlan command is used to add the port to a specified protocol
group. To remove the port from this protocol group, please use no
protocol-vlan group command.
Syntax
protocol-vlan group
index
no protocol-vlan group
index
Parameter
index
—— Specify the protocol group ID.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Add Gigabit Ethernet port 20 to protocol group 1:
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/20
T1600G-28TS(config-if)#protocol-vlan group 1
15.4 show protocol-vlan template
Description
The show protocol-vlan template command is used to display the
information of the Protocol-based VLAN templates.
106
Syntax
show protocol-vlan template
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the information of the Protocol-based VLAN templates:
T1600G-28TS(config)#show protocol-vlan template
15.5 show protocol-vlan vlan
Description
The show protocol-vlan vlan command is used to display the information
about Protocol-based VLAN entry.
Syntax
show protocol-vlan vlan
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display information of the Protocol-based VLAN entry:
T1600G-28TS(config)#show protocol-vlan vlan
107
Chapter 16 GVRP Commands
GVRP (GARP VLAN registration protocol) is an implementation of GARP (generic attribute
registration protocol). GVRP allows the switch to automatically add or remove the VLANs via
the dynamic VLAN registration information and propagate the local VLAN registration
information to other switches, without having to individually configure each VLAN.
16.1 gvrp
Description
The gvrp command is used to enable the GVRP function globally. To disable
the GVRP function, please use no gvrp command.
Syntax
gvrp
no gvrp
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the GVRP function globally:
T1600G-28TS(config)#gvrp
16.2 gvrp (interface)
Description
The gvrp command is used to enable the GVRP function for the desired port.
To disable it, please use no gvrp command. The GVRP feature can only be
enabled for the trunk-type ports.
Syntax
gvrp
108
no gvrp
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the GVRP function for Gigabit Ethernet ports 1/0/2-6:
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/2-6
T1600G-28TS(config-if-range)#gvrp
16.3 gvrp registration
Description
The gvrp registration command is used to configure the GVRP registration
type for the desired port. To restore to the default value, please use no gvrp
registration command.
Syntax
gvrp registration { normal | fixed | forbidden }
no gvrp registration
Parameter
normal | fixed | forbidden —— Registration mode. By default, the registration
mode is “normal”.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
109
Example
Configure the GVRP registration mode as “fixed” for Gigabit Ethernet ports
1/0/2-6:
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/2-6
T1600G-28TS(config-if-range)#gvrp registration fixed
16.4 gvrp timer
Description
The gvrp timer command is used to set a GVRP timer for the desired port. To
restore to the default setting of a GARP timer, please use no gvrp timer
command.
Syntax
gvrp timer { leaveall | join | leave }
value
no gvrp timer [leaveall | join | leave]
Parameter
leaveall | join | leave —— They are the three timers: leave All, join and leave.
Once the LeaveAll Timer is set, the port with GVRP enabled can send a
LeaveAll message after the timer times out, so that other GARP ports can
re-register all the attribute information. After that, the LeaveAll timer will start
to begin a new cycle. To guarantee the transmission of the Join messages, a
GARP port sends each Join message two times. The Join Timer is used to
define the interval between the two sending operations of each Join
message. Once the Leave Timer is set, the GARP port receiving a Leave
message will start its Leave timer, and deregister the attribute information if it
does not receive a Join message again before the timer times out.
value
——The value of the timer. The LeaveAll Timer ranges from 1000 to
30000 centiseconds and the default value is 1000 centiseconds. The Join
Timer ranges from 20 to 1000 centiseconds and the default value is 20
centiseconds. The Leave Timer ranges from 60 to 3000 centiseconds and
the default value is 60 centiseconds.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
110
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Set the GARP leaveall timer of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/6 as 2000
centiseconds and restore the join timer of it to the default value:
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/6
T1600G-28TS(config-if)#gvrp timer leaveall 2000
T1600G-28TS(config-if)#no gvrp timer join
16.5 show gvrp interface
Description
The show gvrp interface command is used to display the GVRP
configuration information of a specified Ethernet port or of all Ethernet ports.
Syntax
show gvrp interface [fastEthernet
port
| gigabitEthernet
port
|
ten-gigabitEthernet
port
| port-channel
port-channel-id
]
Parameter
port
—— The port number.
port-channel-id
—— The ID of the port channel.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the GVRP configuration information of Gigabit Ethernet port 1:
T1600G-28TS(config)#show gvrp interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
Display the GVRP configuration information of all Ethernet ports:
T1600G-28TS(config)#show gvrp interface
111
16.6 show gvrp global
Description
The show gvrp global command is used to display the global GVRP status.
Syntax
show gvrp global
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the global GVRP status:
T1600G-28TS(config)#show gvrp global
112
Chapter 17 IGMP Snooping Commands
IGMP Snooping (Internet Group Management Protocol Snooping) is a multicast control
mechanism running on Layer 2 switch. It can effectively prevent multicast groups being
broadcasted in the network.
17.1 ip igmp snooping (global)
Description
The ip igmp snooping command is used to configure IGMP Snooping
globally. To disable the IGMP Snooping function, please use no ip igmp
snooping command.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping
no ip igmp snooping
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable IGMP Snooping function:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip igmp snooping
17.2 ip igmp snooping version
Description
The ip igmp snooping version command is used to configure IGMP version
globally. To return to the default configuration, please use no ip igmp
snooping version command.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping version {v1 | v2 | v3 }
no ip igmp snooping version
113
Parameter
v1 | v2 | v3—— Specify the IGMP version. By default, it is IGMP v3.
v1: The switch works as an IGMPv1 Snooping switch. It can only process
IGMPv1 messages from the host. Report messages of other versions are
ignored.
v2: The switch works as an IGMPv2 Snooping switch. It can process both
IGMPv1 and IGMPv2 messages from the host. IGMPv3 messages are ignored.
v3: The switch works as an IGMPv3 Snooping switch. It can process IGMPv1,
IGMPv2 and IGMPv3 messages from the host.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify the IGMP version as v2:
T1600G-28TS (config)# ip igmp snooping version v2
17.3 ip igmp snooping drop-unknown
Description
The ip igmp snooping drop-unknown command is used to configure the way
how the switch processes multicast streams that are sent to unknown
multicast groups as Discard. By default, it is Forward. To return to the default
configuration, please use no ip igmp snooping drop-unknown command.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping drop-unknown
no ip igmp snooping drop-unknown
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify the operation to process unknown multicast as discard:
114
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip igmp snooping drop-unknown
17.4 ip igmp snooping header-validation
Description
The ip igmp snooping header-validation command is used to enable IGMP
Header Validation globally. To disable the IGMP Header Validation function,
please use no ip igmp snooping header-validation command.
Generally, for IGMP packets, the TTL value should be 1, ToS field should be
0xC0, and Router Alert option should be 0x94040000. The fields to be
validated depend on the IGMP version being used. IGMPv1 only checks the
TTL field. IGMPv2 checks the TTL field and the Router Alert option. IGMPv3
checks TTL field, ToS field and Router Alert option. Packets that fail the
validation process will be dropped.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping header-validation
no ip igmp snooping header-validation
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable IGMP Header Validation:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip igmp snooping header-validation
17.5 ip igmp snooping vlan-config
Description
The ip igmp snooping vlan-config command is used to enable VLAN IGMP
Snooping function or to modify IGMP Snooping parameters. To disable the
VLAN IGMP Snooping function, please use no ip igmp snooping vlan-config
command. To restore the default values, please use no ip igmp snooping
vlan-config with specified parameters.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
[ rtime
router-time
| mtime
member-time
| ltime
leave-time
]
115
no ip igmp snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
[ rtime | mtime
| ltime
]
Parameter
vlan-id-list
—— The ID list of the VLAN desired to modify configuration,
ranging from 1 to 4094, in the format of 1-3, 5.
router-time
—— The Router Port Aging Time. Within this time, if the switch
does not receive IGMP query message from the router port, it will consider
this port is not a router port any more. Valid values are from 60 to 600 in
seconds, and the default value is 300 seconds.
member-time
—— The Member Port Aging Time. Within this time, if the
switch does not receive IGMP report message from the member port, it will
consider this port is not a member port any more. Valid values are from 60 to
600 in seconds, and the default value is 260 seconds.
leave-time
—— The Leave Time. Valid values are from 1 to 30 in seconds, and
the default value is 1 second. When the switch receives a leave message
from a port to leave a multicast group, it will wait for a Leave Time before
removing the port from the multicast group. During the period, if the switch
receives any report messages from the port, the port will not be removed
from the multicast group. Exceptions are as follows:
If the member port ages out before the Leave Time ends and no report
messages are received, the port will be removed from the multicast
group once its Member Port Aging Time ends.
The Leave Time mechanism will not take effect when Fast Leave takes
effect.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the IGMP Snooping function and modify Router Port Aging Time as
300 seconds, Member Port Aging Time as 200 seconds for VLAN 1-3:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip igmp snooping vlan-config 1-3 rtime 300
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip igmp snooping vlan-config 1-3 mtime 200
116
17.6 ip igmp snooping vlan-config
(immediate-leave)
Description
This command is used to enable the Fast Leave feature for specific VLANs.
To disable Fast Leave on the VLANs, please use no ip igmp snooping
vlan-config
vlan-id-list
immediate-leave command. This function is disabled
by default.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
immediate-leave
no ip igmp snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
immediate-leave
Parameter
vlan-id-list
—— The ID list of the VLAN desired to modify configuration,
ranging from 1 to 4094, in the format of 1-3, 5.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the Fast Leave for VLAN 1-3:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip igmp snooping vlan-config 1-3 immediate-leave
17.7 ip igmp snooping vlan-config
(report-suppression)
Description
This command is used to enable the IGMP Report Suppression function for
specific VLANs. When enabled, the switch will only forward the first IGMP
report message for each multicast group to the IGMP querier and suppress
subsequent IGMP report messages for the same multicast group during one
query interval. This feature prevents duplicate report messages from being
sent to the IGMP querier. To disable the IGMP report suppression function
and forward all the IGMP reports to the Layer 3 device in specific VLANs,
117
please use no ip igmp snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
report-suppression
command. This function is disabled by default.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
report-suppression
no ip igmp snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
report-suppression
Parameter
vlan-id-list
—— The ID list of the VLAN desired to modify configuration,
ranging from 1 to 4094, in the format of 1-3, 5.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the IGMP Report Suppression for VLAN 1-3:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip igmp snooping vlan-config 1-3
report-suppression
17.8 ip igmp snooping vlan-config
(router-ports-forbidden)
Description
This command is used to forbid the specified ports as being router ports in
the specified VLAN(s). To delete the forbidden router ports, please use no ip
igmp snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
router-ports-forbidd command.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
router-ports-forbidd interface
{ gigabitEthernet
port-list
| port-channel
port-channel-list
}
no ip igmp snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
router-ports-forbidd interface
[ gigabitEthernet
port-list
| port-channel
port-channel-list
]
Parameter
vlan-id-list
—— The ID list of the VLAN desired to modify configuration,
ranging from 1 to 4094, in the format of 1-3, 5.
118
port-list
—— Forbid the specified ports as being router ports. Packets sent
from multicast routers to these ports will be discarded.
port-channel-list
—— Forbid the specified port-channels as being router
ports. Packets sent from multicast routers to these port-channels will be
discarded.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Forbid the Ethernet ports 1/0/1-3 as being router ports in VLAN 1 :
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip igmp snooping vlan-config 1
router-ports-forbidd interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1-3
17.9 ip igmp snooping vlan-config (rport interface)
Description
This command is used to specify the static router ports for specific VLANs.
To delete the static router ports, please use no ip igmp snooping
vlan-config
vlan-id-list
rport interface command.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
rport interface { gigabitEthernet
port-list
| port-channel
port-channel-list
}
no ip igmp snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
rport interface
{ gigabitEthernet
port-list
| port-channel
port-channel-list
}
Parameter
vlan-id-list
—— The ID list of the VLAN desired to modify configuration,
ranging from 1 to 4094, in the format of 1-3, 5.
port-list
—— The list of Ethernet ports.
port-channel-list
—— The ID of the port channels.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
119
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Set the router port as 1/0/1 for VLAN 1-2:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip igmp snooping vlan-config 1-2 rport interface
gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
17.10 ip igmp snooping vlan-config (static)
Description
This command is used to configure interfaces to statically join a multicast
group. To remove interfaces from a static multicast group, please use no ip
igmp snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
staticcommand.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
static
ip
interface
{ gigabitEthernet
port-list
| port-channel
port-channel-list
}
no ip igmp snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
static
ip
interface
{ gigabitEthernet
port-list
| port-channel
port-channel-list
}
Parameter
vlan-id-list
—— The ID list of the VLAN desired to modify configuration,
ranging from 1 to 4094, in the format of 1-3, 5.
ip
——Specify the IP address of the multicast group that the hosts want to
join.
port-list
—— The list of Ethernet ports.
port-channel-list
—— The ID of the port channels.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure port ports 1/0/1-3 in VLAN 2 to statically join multicast group
225.0.0.1:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip igmp snooping vlan-config 2 static 225.0.0.1
interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1-3
120
17.11 ip igmp snooping vlan-config (querier)
Description
This command is used to enable the IGMP Snooping Querier feature for
specific VLANs. To disable the IGMP Snooping Querier feature on the VLANs,
please use no ip igmp snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
querier command
without any parameters. To restore the default values, please use no ip igmp
snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
querier command with specified
parameters.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
querier [ max-response-time
response-time
| query-interval
interval
| general-query source-ip
ip-addr
|
last-member-query-count
count
| last-member-query-interval
interval
]
no ip igmp snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
querier [ max-response-time |
query-interval | general-query source-ip | last-member-query-count ]
Parameter
vlan-id-list
—— The ID list of the VLAN desired to modify configuration,
ranging from 1 to 4094, in the format of 1-3, 5.
response-time
—— The host’s maximum response time to general query
messages. Valid values are from 1 to 25 seconds, and the default value is 10
seconds.
query-interval
interval
—— The interval between general query messages
sent by the switch. Valid values are from 10 to 300 seconds, and the default
value is 60 seconds.
ip-addr
—— The source IP address of the general query messages sent by
the switch. It should be a unicast address. By default, it is 0.0.0.0.
count
—— The number of group-specific queries to be sent. With IGMP
Snooping Querier enabled, when the switch receives an IGMP leave message,
it obtains the address of the multicast group that the host wants to leave from
the message. Then the switch sends out group-specific queries to this
multicast group through the port receiving the leave message. If specified
count of group-specific queries are sent and no report message is received,
the switch will delete the multicast address from the multicast forwarding
table. Valid values are from 1 to 5, and the default value is 2.
last-member-query-interval
interval
—— The interval between group-
specific queries.. Valid values are from 1 to 5 seconds, and the default value
is 1 second.
121
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the IGMP Snooping Querier for VLAN 3, and configure the query
interval as 100 seconds:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip igmp snooping vlan-config 3 querier
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip igmp snooping vlan-config 3 querier query
interval 100
17.12 ip igmp snooping (interface)
Description
The ip igmp snooping command is used to enable the IGMP Snooping
function for the desired port. To disable the IGMP Snooping function, please
use no ip igmp snooping command.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping
no ip igmp snooping
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable IGMP Snooping function of port 1/0/3:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# ip igmp snooping
122
17.13 ip igmp snooping max-groups
Description
The ip igmp snooping max-groups command is used to configure the
maximum number of groups that a port can join in. The ip igmp snooping
max-groups action is used to configure the action that the port takes when it
receives an IGMP report message and the maximum number of entries is in
the forwarding table. To remove the maximum group limitation and return to
the default of no limitation on the specified port, please use the no ip igmp
snooping max-groups command. To return to the default action of dropping
the report, please use the no ip igmp snooping max-groups action
command. These commands only apply to the dynamic multicast groups.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping max-groups
maxgroup
ip igmp snooping max-groups action { drop | replace }
no ip igmp snooping max-groups
no ip igmp snooping max-groups action
Parameter
maxgroup
—— Specify the maximum numbers of groups that the port can
join. It ranges from 0 to 1000 and the default value is 1000.
drop
—— When the number of the dynamic multicast groups that a port joins
has exceeded the max-group, the port will not join any new multicast group.
replace
—— When the number of the dynamic multicast groups that a port
joins has exceeded the max-group, the newly joined multicast group will
replace an existing multicast group with the lowest multicast group address.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify the maximum numbers of groups that ports 1/0/2-5 can join as 10,
and configure the throttling action as replace:
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/2-5
123
T1600G-28TS(config-if-range)#ip igmp snooping max-groups 10
T1600G-28TS(config-if-range)#ip igmp snooping max-groups action
replace
17.14 ip igmp snooping immediate-leave
Description
The ip igmp snooping immediate-leave command is used to configure the
Fast Leave function for port. To disable the Fast Leave function, please use
no ip igmp snooping immediate-leave command.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping immediate-leave
no ip igmp snooping immediate-leave
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the Fast Leave function for port 1/0/3:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# ip igmp snooping immediate-leave
17.15 ip igmp profile
Description
The ip igmp profile command is used to create the configuration profile. To
delete the corresponding profile, please use no ip igmp profile command.
Syntax
ip igmp profile
id
no ip igmp profile
id
124
Parameter
id
—— Specify the id of the configuration profile, ranging from 1 to 999.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Create the profile 1:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip igmp profile 1
17.16 deny
Description
The deny command is used to configure the filtering mode of profile as deny.
Syntax
deny
Command Mode
Profile Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the filtering mode of profile 1 as deny:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip igmp profile 1
T1600G-28TS(config-igmp-profile)#deny
17.17 permit
Description
The permit command is used to configure the filtering mode of profile as
permit.
125
Syntax
permit
Command Mode
Profile Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the filtering mode of profile 1 as permit:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip igmp profile 1
T1600G-28TS(config-igmp-profile)#permit
17.18 range
Description
The range command is used to configure the range of the profile’s filtering
multicast address. To delete the corresponding filtering multicast address,
please use no range command. A profile contains 16 filtering IP-range entries
at most.
Syntax
range
start-ip
end-ip
no range
start-ip
end-ip
Parameter
start-ip
—— The start filtering multicast IP address.
end-ip
—— The end filtering multicast IP address.
Command Mode
Profile Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
126
Example
Configure one of the filter multicast address entry as range 225.1.1.1 to
226.3.2.1 in profile 1:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip igmp profile 1
T1600G-28TS(config-igmp-profile)#range 225.1.1.1 226.3.2.1
17.19 ip igmp filter
Description
The ip igmp filter command is used to bind the specified profile to the
interface. To delete the binding, please use no ip igmp filter command.
Syntax
ip igmp filter
profile-id
no ip igmp filter
Parameter
profile-id
—— Specify the profile ID, ranging from 1 to 999.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Bind profile 1 to interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# ip igmp filter 1
17.20 clear ip igmp snooping statistics
Description
The clear ip igmp snooping statistics command is used to clear the
statistics of the IGMP packets.
Syntax
clear ip igmp snooping statistics
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
127
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Clear the statistics of the IGMP packets:
T1600G-28TS(config)# clear ip igmp snooping statistics
17.21 show ip igmp snooping
Description
The show ip igmp snooping command is used to display the global
configuration of IGMP snooping.
Syntax
show ip igmp snooping
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the global configuration of IGMP:
T1600G-28TS# show ip igmp snooping
17.22 show ip igmp snooping interface
Description
The show ip igmp snooping interface command is used to display the port
configuration of IGMP snooping. If no interface is specified, it displays all
interfaces’ IGMP snooping configurations.
Syntax
show ip igmp snooping interface [ gigabitEthernet [
port-list
] |
port-channel [
port-channel-list
] ] { basic-config | max-groups | packet-stat }
Parameter
port-list
—— The list of Ethernet ports.
Port-channel-list
—— The list of port channels.
128
basic-config | max-groups | packet-stat —— The related configuration
information selected to display.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the IGMP baisic configuration configuration of all ports and port
channels:
T1600G-28TS# show ip igmp snooping interface basic-config
Display the IGMP basic configuration of port 1/0/2:
T1600G-28TS# show ip igmp snooping interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
basic-config
Display the IGMP packet statistics of ports 1/0/1-4:
T1600G-28TS# show ip igmp snooping interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1-4
packet-stat
17.23 show ip igmp snooping vlan
Description
The show ip igmp snooping vlan command is used to display the VLAN
configuration of IGMP snooping.
Syntax
show ip igmp snooping vlan [
vlan-id
]
Parameter
vlan-id
——The VLAN ID selected to display.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the IGMP snooping configuration information of VLAN 2:
T1600G-28TS# show ip igmp snooping vlan 2
129
17.24 show ip igmp snooping groups
Description
The show ip igmp snooping groups command is used to display the
information of all IGMP snooping groups. It can be extended to some other
commands to display the dynamic and static multicast information of a
selected VLAN.
Syntax
show ip igmp snooping groups [ vlan {
vlan-id
} ]
[
multicast_addr
| count |
dynamic | dynamic count | static | static count ]
Parameter
vlan-id
——The VLAN ID selected to display the information of all multicast
items.
multicast_addr
—— IP address of the multicast group.
count—— The numbers of all multicast groups.
dynamic—— Display dynamic multicast groups.
dynamic count—— The numbers of all dynamic multicast groups.
static—— Display static multicast groups.
static count—— The numbers of all static multicast groups.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the information of all IGMP snooping groups:
T1600G-28TS#show ip igmp snooping groups
Display all the multicast entries in VLAN 5:
T1600G-28TS(config)#show ip igmp snooping groups vlan 5
Display the count of multicast entries in VLAN 5:
T1600G-28TS(config)#show ip igmp snooping groups vlan 5 count
Display the dynamic multicast groups of VLAN 5
T1600G-28TS(config)#show ip igmp snooping groups vlan 5 dynamic
Display the static multicast groups of VLAN 5
130
T1600G-28TS(config)#show ip igmp snooping groups vlan 5 static
Display the count of dynamic multicast entries of VLAN 5
T1600G-28TS(config)#show ip igmp snooping groups vlan 5 dynamic
count
Display the count of static multicast entries of VLAN 5
T1600G-28TS(config)#show ip igmp snooping groups vlan 5 static count
17.25 show ip igmp profile
Description
The show ip igmp profile command is used to display the configuration
information of all the profiles or a specific profile.
Syntax
show ip igmp profile [
id
]
Parameter
id
—— Specify the ID of the profile, ranging from 1 to 999.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the configuration information of all profiles:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show ip igmp profile
131
Chapter 18 MLD Snooping Commands
MLD Snooping (Multicast Listener Discovery Snooping) is a multicast control mechanism
running on Layer 2 switch. It can effectively prevent multicast groups being broadcasted in the
IPv6 network.
18.1 ipv6 mld snooping (global)
Description
The ipv6 mld snooping command is used to enable MLD Snooping function
globally. If this function is disabled, all related MLD Snooping function would
not work. To disable this function, please use no ipv6 mld snooping
command.
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping
no ipv6 mld snooping
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable MLD Snooping:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping
18.2 ipv6 mld snooping drop-unknown
Description
The ipv6 mld snooping drop-unknown command is used to enable the
unknown multicast packets filter function. To disable this function, please use
no ipv6 mld snooping drop-unknown command. By default, it is disabled.
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping drop-unknown
no ipv6 mld snooping drop-unknown
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
132
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable unknown multicast filter function:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping drop-unknown
18.3 ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config
Description
The ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config command is used to enable VLAN MLD
Snooping function or to modify MLD Snooping parameters. To disable the
VLAN MLD Snooping function, please use no ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config
command.
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
[ rtime
router-time
| mtime
member-time
| ltime
leave-time
]
no ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
[ rtime | mtime | ltime ]
Parameter
vlan-id-list
—— The ID list of the VLAN desired to modify configuration,
ranging from 1 to 4094, in the format of 1-3, 5.
router-time
—— The Router Port Aging Time. Within this time, if the switch
does not receive any MLD query messages from the router port, it will
consider this port is not a router port any more. Valid values are from 60 to
600 in seconds, and the default value is 300 seconds.
member-time
—— The Member Port Aging Time. Within this time, if the
switch does not receive any MLD report messages from the member port, it
will consider this port is not a member port any more. Valid values are from 60
to 600 in seconds, and the default value is 260 seconds.
leave-time
—— The Leave Time. Valid values are from 1 to 30 in seconds, and
the default value is 1 second. When the switch receives a done message from
a port to leave a multicast group, it will wait for a Leave Time before removing
the port from the multicast group. During the period, if the switch receives
any report messages from the port, the port will not be removed from the
multicast group. Exceptions are as follows:
If the member port ages out before the Leave Time ends and no report
messages are received, the port will be removed from the multicast
group once its Member Port Aging Time ends.
133
The Leave Time mechanism will not take effect when Fast Leave takes
effect.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable the MLD Snooping function and modify Router Port Time as 300
seconds, Member Port Time as 200 seconds for VLAN 1-3:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config 1-3 rtime 300
T1600G-28TS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config 1-3 mtime 200
18.4 ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config
(immediate-leave)
Description
This command is used to enable the Fast Leave feature for specific VLANs.
To disable Fast Leave on the VLANs, please use no ipv6 mld snooping
vlan-config
vlan-id-list
immediate-leave command. This function is disabled
by default.
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
immediate-leave
no ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
immediate-leave
Parameter
vlan-id-list
—— The ID list of the VLAN desired to modify configuration,
ranging from 1 to 4094, in the format of 1-3, 5.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the Fast Leave for VLAN 1-3:
134
T1600G-28TS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config 1-3
immediate-leave
18.5 ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config
(report-suppression)
Description
This command is used to enable the MLD Report Suppression function for
specific VLANs. When enabled, the switch will only forward the first MLD
report message for each multicast group to the MLD querier and suppress
subsequent MLD report messages for the same multicast group during one
query interval. This feature prevents duplicate report messages from being
sent to the MLD querier. To disable the MLD report suppression function and
forward all the MLD reports to the Layer 3 device in specific VLANs, please
use no ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
report-suppression
command. This function is disabled by default.
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
report-suppression
no ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
report-suppression
Parameter
vlan-id-list
—— The ID list of the VLAN desired to modify configuration,
ranging from 1 to 4094, in the format of 1-3, 5.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the MLD Report Suppression for VLAN 1-3:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config 1-3
report-suppression
135
18.6 ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config
(router-ports-forbidden)
Description
This command is used to forbid the specified ports as being router ports in
the specified VLAN(s). To delete the forbidden router ports, please use no
ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
router-ports-forbidd command.
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
router-ports-forbidd interface
{ gigabitEthernet
port-list
| port-channel
port-channel-list
}
no ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
router-ports-forbidd
interface [ gigabitEthernet
port-list
| port-channel
port-channel-list
]
Parameter
vlan-id-list
—— The ID list of the VLAN desired to modify configuration,
ranging from 1 to 4094, in the format of 1-3, 5.
port-list
—— Forbid the specified ports as being router ports. Packets sent
from multicast routers to these ports will be discarded.
port-channel-list
—— Forbid the specified port-channels as being router
ports. Packets sent from multicast routers to these port-channels will be
discarded.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Forbid the Ethernet ports 1/0/1-3 as being router ports in VLAN 1:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config 1
router-ports-forbidd interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1-3
136
18.7 ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config (rport
interface)
Description
This command is used to specify the static router ports for specific VLANs.
To delete the static router ports, please use no ipv6 mld snooping
vlan-config
vlan-id-list
rport interface command.
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
rport interface { gigabitEthernet
port-list
| port-channel
port-channel-list
}
no ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
rport interface
{ gigabitEthernet
port-list
| port-channel
port-channel-list
}
Parameter
vlan-id-list
—— The ID list of the VLAN desired to modify configuration,
ranging from 1 to 4094, in the format of 1-3, 5.
port-list
—— The list of Ethernet ports.
port-channel-list
—— The ID of the port channels.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Set the router port as 1/0/1 for VLAN 1-2:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config 1-2 rport interface
gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
18.8 ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config (static)
Description
This command is used to configure interfaces to statically join a multicast
group. To remove interfaces from a static multicast group, please use no
ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
staticcommand.
137
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
static
ip
interface
{ gigabitEthernet
port-list
| port-channel
port-channel-list
}
no ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
static
ip
interface
{ gigabitEthernet
port-list
| port-channel
port-channel-list
}
Parameter
vlan-id-list
—— The ID list of the VLAN desired to modify configuration,
ranging from 1 to 4094, in the format of 1-3, 5.
ip
——Specify the IP address of the multicast group that the hosts want to
join.
port-list
—— The list of Ethernet ports.
port-channel-list
—— The ID of the port channels.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure port ports 1/0/1-3 in VLAN 2 to statically join multicast group
225.0.0.1:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config 2 static 225.0.0.1
interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1-3
18.9 ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config (querier)
Description
This command is used to enable the MLD Snooping Querier feature for
specific VLANs. To disable the MLD Snooping Querier feature on the VLANs,
please use no ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
querier command
without any parameters. To restore the default values, please use no ipv6
mld snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
querier command with specified
parameters.
138
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
querier [ max-response-time
response-time
| query-interval
interval
| general-query source-ip
ip-addr
|
last-listener-query-count
count
| last-listener-query-interval
interval
]
no ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
querier [ max-response-time |
query-interval | general-query source-ip | last-listener-query-count |
last-listener-query-interval ]
Parameter
vlan-id-list
—— The ID list of the VLAN desired to modify configuration,
ranging from 1 to 4094, in the format of 1-3, 5.
response-time
—— The host’s maximum response time to general query
messages. Valid values are from 1 to 25 seconds, and the default value is 10
seconds.
query-interval
interval
—— The interval between general query messages
sent by the switch. Valid values are from 10 to 300 seconds, and the default
value is 60 seconds.
ip-addr
—— The source IP address of the general query messages sent by
the switch. It should be a unicast address. By default, it is fe80::2ff:ffff:fe00:1.
count
—— The number of group-specific queries to be sent. With MLD
Snooping Querier enabled, when the switch receives an MLD done message,
it obtains the address of the multicast group that the host wants to leave from
the message. Then the switch sends out group-specific queries to this
multicast group through the port receiving the done message. If specified
count of group-specific queries are sent and no report message is received,
the switch will delete the multicast address from the multicast forwarding
table. Valid values are from 1 to 5, and the default value is 2.
last-member-query-interval
interval
—— The interval between group-
specific queries. Valid values are from 1 to 5 seconds, and the default value is
1 second.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
139
Example
Enable the MLD Snooping Querier for VLAN 3, and configure the query
interval as 100 seconds:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config 3 querier
T1600G-28TS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config 3 querier query
interval 100
18.10 ipv6 mld snooping (interface)
Description
The ipv6 mld snooping command is used to enable MLD Snooping function
on the desired port. To disable this function, please use no ipv6 mld
snooping command.
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping
no ipv6 mld snooping
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable MLD Snooping on port 1/0/3:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# ipv6 mld snooping
18.11 ipv6 mld snooping max-groups
Description
The ipv6 mld snooping max-groups command is used to configure the
maximum number of groups that a port can join in. The ipv6 mld snooping
max-groups action is used to configure the action that the port takes when it
receives an MLD report message and the maximum number of entries is in
the forwarding table. To remove the maximum group limitation and return to
the default of no limitation on the specified port, please use the no ipv6 mld
140
snooping max-groups command. To return to the default action of dropping
the report, please use the no ipv6 mld snooping max-groups action
command. These commands only apply to the dynamic multicast groups.
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping max-groups
maxgroup
ipv6 mld snooping max-groups action { drop | replace }
no ipv6 mld snooping max-groups
no ipv6 mld snooping max-groups action
Parameter
maxgroup
—— Specify the maximum numbers of groups that the port can
join. It ranges from 0 to 1000 and the default value is 1000.
drop
—— When the number of the dynamic multicast groups that a port joins
has exceeded the max-group, the port will not join any new multicast group.
replace
—— When the number of the dynamic multicast groups that a port
joins has exceeded the max-group, the newly joined multicast group will
replace an existing multicast group with the lowest multicast group address.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Specify the maximum numbers of groups that ports 1/0/2-5 can join as 10,
and configure the throttling action as replace:
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/2-5
T1600G-28TS(config-if-range)#ipv6 mld snooping max-groups 10
T1600G-28TS(config-if-range)#ipv6 mld snooping max-groups action
replace
18.12 ipv6 mld snooping immediate-leave
Description
The ipv6 mld snooping immediate-leave command is used to configure the
Fast Leave function for port. To disable the Fast Leave function, please use
no ipv6 mld snooping immediate-leave command.
141
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping immediate-leave
no ipv6 mld snooping immediate-leave
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable the Fast Leave function for port 1/0/3:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# ipv6 mld snooping immediate-leave
18.13 ipv6 mld profile
Description
The ipv6 mld profile command is used to create the configuration profile. To
delete the corresponding profile, please use no ipv6 mld profile command.
Syntax
ipv6 mld profile
id
no ipv6 mld profile
id
Parameter
id
—— Specify the id of the configuration profile, ranging from 1 to 999.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Create the profile 1:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ipv6 mld profile 1
142
18.14 deny
Description
The deny command is used to configure the filtering mode of profile as deny.
Syntax
deny
Command Mode
Profile Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the filtering mode of profile 1 as deny:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ipv6 mld profile 1
T1600G-28TS(config-MLD-profile)#deny
18.15 permit
Description
The permit command is used to configure the filtering mode of profile as
permit.
Syntax
permit
Command Mode
Profile Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the filtering mode of profile 1 as permit:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ipv6 mld profile 1
T1600G-28TS(config-igmp-profile)#permit
143
18.16 range
Description
The range command is used to configure the range of the profile’s filtering
multicast address. To delete the corresponding filtering multicast address,
please use no range command. A profile contains 16 filtering IP-range entries
at most.
Syntax
range
start-ip
end-ip
no range
start-ip end-ip
Parameter
start-ip
—— Start IPv6 multicast address of the filter entry..
end-ip
—— End IPv6 multicast address of the filter entry.
Command Mode
Profile Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure one of the filter multicast address entry as range ff80::1234 to
ff80::1235 in profile 1:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ipv6 mld profile 1
T1600G-28TS(config-igmp-profile)#range ff80::1234 ff80::1235
18.17 ipv6 mld filter
Description
The ipv6 mld filter command is used to bind the specified profile to the
interface. To delete the binding, please use no ipv6 mld filter command.
Syntax
ipv6 mld filter
profile-id
no ipv6 mld filter
Parameter
profile-id
—— Specify the profile ID, ranging from 1 to 999.
144
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Bind profile 1 to interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# ipv6 mld filter 1
18.18 clear ipv6 mld snooping statistics
Description
The clear ipv6 mld snooping statistics command is used to clear the
statistics of the MLD packets.
Syntax
clear ipv6 mld snooping statistics
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Clear the statistics of the MLD packets:
T1600G-28TS(config)# clear ipv6 mld snooping statistics
18.19 show ipv6 mld snooping
Description
The show ipv6 mld snooping command is used to display the global
configuration of MLD Snooping.
Syntax
show ipv6 mld snooping
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
145
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the global configuration of MLD Snooping:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show ipv6 mld snooping
18.20 show ipv6 mld snooping interface
Description
The show ipv6 mld snooping interface command is used to display the port
configuration of MLD snooping.
Syntax
show ipv6 mld snooping interface [ gigabitEthernet [
port
|
port-list
] ]
{ basic-config | max-groups | packet-stat }
show ipv6 mld snooping interface [ port-channel [
port-channel-list
] ]
{ basic-config | max-groups }
Parameter
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
port-list
—— The list of Ethernet ports.
basic-config | max-groups | packet-stat —— The related configuration
information selected to display.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the MLD baisic configuration configuration of all ports and port
channels:
T1600G-28TS# show ipv6 mld snooping interface basic-config
Display the MLD basic configuration of port 1/0/2:
T1600G-28TS# show ipv6 mld snooping interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
basic-config
146
Display the MLD packet statistics of ports 1/0/1-4:
T1600G-28TS# show ipv6 mld snooping interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1-4
packet-stat
18.21 show ipv6 mld snooping vlan
Description
The show ipv6 mld snooping vlan command is used to display VLAN
information of MLD Snooping.
Syntax
show ipv6 mld snooping vlan [
vlan-id
]
Parameter
vlan-id
—— The VLAN ID selected to display, ranging from 1 to 4094.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display all of the VLAN information:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show ipv6 mld snooping vlan
18.22 show ipv6 mld snooping groups
Description
The show ipv6 mld snooping groups command is used to display multicast
groups.
Syntax
show ipv6 mld snooping groups [ vlan {
vlan-id
}
]
[
ipv6_multicast_addr
|
count | dynamic | dynamic count | static | static count ]
Parameter
vlan-id
——The VLAN ID selected to display the information of all multicast
items.
ipv6_multicast_addr
—— IPv6 address of the multicast group.
count—— The numbers of all multicast groups.
dynamic—— Display dynamic multicast groups.
147
dynamic count—— The numbers of all dynamic multicast groups.
static—— Display static multicast groups.
static count—— The numbers of all static multicast groups.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display all of the multicast groups:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show ipv6 mld snooping groups
18.23 show ipv6 mld profile
Description
The show ipv6 mld profile command is used to display the configuration
information of all the profiles or a specific profile.
Syntax
show ipv6 mld profile [
id
]
Parameter
id
—— Specify the ID of the profile, ranging from 1 to 999.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the configuration information of all profiles:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show ipv6 mld profile
148
Chapter 19 MVR Commands
MVR (Multicast VLAN Registration) allows a single multicast VLAN to be shared for multicast
member ports in different VLANs in IPv4 network. In IGMP Snooping, if member ports are in
different VLANs, a copy of the multicast streams is sent to each VLAN that has member ports.
While MVR provides a dedicated multicast VLAN to forward multicast traffic over the Layer 2
network, to avoid duplication of multicast streams for clients in different VLANs. Clients can
dynamically join or leave the multicast VLAN without interfering with their relationships in other
VLANs.
19.1 mvr (global)
Description
The mvr command is used to enable MVR globally. To disable MVR, please
use no mvr command.
Syntax
mvr
no mvr
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable MVR globally:
T1600G-28TS(config)# mvr
19.2 mvr group
Description
The mvr group command is used to add multicast groups to MVR. To delete
multicast groups from MVR, please use no mvr group command.
Syntax
mvr group
ip-addr
[
count
]
149
no mvr group
ip-addr
[
count
]
Parameter
ip-addr
—— The start IP address of the contiguous series of multicast
groups.
count
—— The number of the multicast groups to be added to the MVR. Valid
values are from 1 to 256, and the default value is 1.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Add multicast groups 225.1.2.3 -239.1.2.5 to MVR:
T1600G-28TS (config)# mvr group 225.1.2.3 3
19.3 mvr mode
Description
The mvr mode command is used to configure the MVR mode as compatible
or dynamic. By default, it is compatible. To return to the default configuration,
please use no mvr mode command.
Syntax
mvr mode { compatible | dynamic }
no mvr mode
Parameter
compatible —— In this mode, the switch does not forward report or leave
messages from the hosts to the IGMP querier. So the IGMP querier cannot
learn the multicast groups membership information from the switch. You have
to statically configure the IGMP querier to transmit all the required multicast
streams to the switch via the multicast VLAN.
dynamic —— In this mode, after receiving report or leave messages from the
hosts, the switch will forward them to the IGMP querier via the multicast VLAN
(with appropriate translation of the VLAN ID). So the IGMP querier can learn
the multicast groups membership information through the report and leave
messages, and transmit the multicast streams to the switch via the multicast
VLAN according to the multicast forwarding table.
150
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the MVR mode as dynamic:
T1600G-28TS(config)# mvr mode dynamic
19.4 mvr querytime
Description
The mvr querytime command is used to configure the maximum time to wait
for IGMP report on a receiver port before removing the port from multicast
group membership. To return to the default configuration, please use no mvr
querytime command.
Syntax
mvr querytime
time
no mvr querytime
Parameter
time
—— The query response time. Valid values are from 1 to100 tenths of a
second, and the default value is 5 tenths of a second.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the query response time of MVR as 1 second, that is 10 tenths of a
second:
T1600G-28TS(config)# mvr querytime 10
151
19.5 mvr vlan
Description
The mvr vlan command is used to specify the multicast VLAN. By default, it is
VLAN 1. To return to the default configuration, please use no mvr vlan
command.
Syntax
mvr vlan
vlan-id
no mvr vlan
Parameter
vlan-id
—— The ID of the multicast VLAN. Valid values are from 1 to 4094.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the multicast VLAN as VLAN 10:
T1600G-28TS(config)# mvr vlan 10
19.6 mvr (interface)
Description
This command is used to enable MVR for specific interfaces. To disable MVR
for the interfaces, please use no mvr command. By default, it is disabled.
Syntax
mvr
no mvr
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
152
Example
Enable MVR for port 1/0/1:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
T1600G-28TS(config-if)#mvr
19.7 mvr type
Description
The mvr type command is used to configure the MVR port type as receiver or
source. By default, the port is a non-MVR port. If you attempt to configure a
non-MVR port with MVR characteristics, the operation fails. To return to the
default configuration, please use no mvr type command.
Syntax
mvr type { source | receiver }
no mvr type
Parameter
source —— Configure the uplink ports that receive and send multicast data
on the multicast VLAN as source ports. Source ports should belong to the
multicast VLAN.
receiver —— Configure the ports that are connecting to the hosts as receiver
ports. A receiver port can only belong to one VLAN, and cannot belong to the
multicast VLAN.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the port 1/0/3 as a receiver port:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
T1600G-28TS(config-if)#mvr type receiver
153
19.8 mvr immediate
Description
The mvr immediate command is used to enable the Fast Leave feature of
MVR for specified port. To disable the Fast Leave feature of MVR for specific
ports, please use no mvr immediate command.
Syntax
mvr immediate
no mvr immediate
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
User Guidelines
Only receiver ports support Fast Leave. Before enabling Fast Leave for a port,
make sure there is only a single receiver device connecting to the port.
Example
Enable the Fast Leave feature of MVR for port 1/0/3:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
T1600G-28TS(config-if)#mvr immediate
19.9 mvr vlan (group)
Description
This command is used to statically add ports to an MVR group. Then the ports
can receive multicast traffic sent to the IP multicast address via the multicast
VLAN.
Syntax
mvr vlan
vlan-id
group
ip-addr
Parameter
vlan-id
—— The ID of the multicast VLAN. Valid values are from 1 to 4094.
ip-addr
—— The IP address of the multicast group.
154
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
User Guidelines
This command applies to only receiver ports. The switch adds or removes the
receiver ports to the corresponding multicast groups by snooping the report
and leave messages from the hosts. You can also statically add a receiver port
to an MVR group.
Example
Add port 1/0/3 to MVR group 225.1.2.3 statically. The multicast VLAN is VLAN
10:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
T1600G-28TS(config-if)#mvr vlan 10 group 225.1.2.3
19.10 show mvr
Description
The show mvr command is used to display the global configuration of MVR.
Syntax
show mvr
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the global configuration of mvr:
T1600G-28TS# show mvr
155
19.11 show mvr interface
Description
The show mvr interface command is used to display the MVR configurations
of specific interfaces.
Syntax
show mvr interface gigabitEthernet [
port
|
port-list
]
Parameter
port
——The Ethernet port number.
port-list
—— The list of Ethernet ports.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the MVR configuration of port 1/0/3:
T1600G-28TS# show mvr interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
19.12 show mvr members
Description
The show mvr members command is used to display the membership
information of all MVR groups or the specified MVR group.
Syntax
show mvr members [
ip-addr
]
Parameter
ip-addr
——The multicast IP address of the MVR group.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the membership information of all MVR groups:
156
T1600G-28TS# show mvr members
19.13 show mvr traffic
Description
The show mvr traffic command is used to display the statistics information
of all MVR groups.
Syntax
show mvr traffic
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the statistics information of all MVR groups:
T1600G-28TS# show mvr traffic
157
Chapter 20 MSTP Commands
MSTP (Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol), compatible with both STP and RSTP and subject to
IEEE 802.1s, can disbranch a ring network. STP is to block redundant links and backup links as
well as optimize paths.
20.1 debug spanning-tree
Description
The debug spanning-tree command is used to enable debuggning of
spanning-tree activities. To disable the debugging function, please use no
debug spanning-tree command.
Syntax
debug spanning-tree { all | bpdu receive | bpdu transmit | cmpmsg | errors |
flush | init | migration | proposals | roles | state | tc }
no debug spanning-tree { all | bpdu receive | bpdu transmit | cmpmsg | errors
| flush | init | migration | proposals | roles | state | tc }
Parameters
all —— Display all the spanning-tree debug messages.
bpdu receive —— Display the debug messages of the received
spanning-tree bridge protocol data unit (BPDU).
bpdu transmit —— Display the debug messages of the sent spanning-tree
BPDU.
cmpmsg —— Display the message priority debug messages.
errors —— Display the MSTP error debug messages.
flush —— Display the address table flushing debug messages.
init —— Display the data structure initialization debug messages.
migration —— Display the version migration debug messages.
proposals —— Display the MSTP handshake debug messages.
roles —— Display the MSTP interface role switchling debug messages.
state —— Display the MSTP interface state change debug messages.
tc —— Display the MSTP topology event debug messages.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode
158
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Display all the spanning-tree debug messages:
T1600G-28TS# debug spanning-tree all
20.2 spanning-tree (global)
Description
The spanning-tree command is used to enable STP function globally. To
disable the STP function, please use no spanning-tree command.
Syntax
spanning-tree
no spanning-tree
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the STP function:
T1600G-28TS(config)# spanning-tree
20.3 spanning-tree (interface)
Description
The spanning-tree command is used to enable STP function for a port. To
disable the STP function, please use no spanning-tree command.
Syntax
spanning-tree
no spanning-tree
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
159
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the STP function for port 1/0/2:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# spanning-tree
20.4 spanning-tree common-config
Description
The spanning-tree common-config command is used to configure the
parameters of the ports for comparison in the CIST and the common
parameters of all instances. To return to the default configuration, please use
no spanning-tree common-config command. CIST (Common and Internal
Spanning Tree) is the spanning tree in a switched network, connecting all
devices in the network.
Syntax
spanning-tree common-config [ port-priority
pri
] [ ext-cost
ext-cost
]
[ int-cost
int-cost
] [ portfast { enable | disable }] [ point-to-point { auto | open
| close }]
no spanning-tree common-config
Parameter
pri
—— Port Priority, which must be multiple of 16 ranging from 0 to 240. By
default, the port priority is 128. Port Priority is an important criterion on
determining if the port connected to this port will be chosen as the root port.
In the same condition, the port with the highest priority will be chosen as the
root port. The lower value has the higher priority.
ext-cost
—— External Path Cost, which is used to choose the path and
calculate the path costs of ports in different MST regions. It is an important
criterion on determining the root port. The lower value has the higher priority.
It ranges from o to 2000000. By default, it is 0 which is mean auto.
int-cost
—— Internal Path Cost, which is used to choose the path and
calculate the path costs of ports in an MST region. It is an important criterion
on determining the root port. The lower value has the higher priority. By
160
default, it is automatic. It ranges from o to 2000000. By default, it is 0 which is
mean auto.
portfast —— Enable/ Disable Edge Port. By default, it is disabled. The edge
port can transit its state from blocking to forwarding rapidly without waiting
for forward delay.
point-to-point —— The P2P link status, with auto, open and close options. By
default, the option is auto. If the two ports in the P2P link are root port or
designated port, they can transit their states to forwarding rapidly to reduce
the unnecessary forward delay.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the STP function of port 1, and configure the Port Priority as 64,
ExtPath Cost as 100, IntPath Cost as 100, and then enable Edge Port:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# spanning-tree common-config port-priority 64
ext-cost 100 int-cost 100 portfast enable point-to-point open
20.5 spanning-tree mode
Description
The spanning-tree mode command is used to configure the STP mode of the
switch. To return to the default configurations, please use no spanning-tree
mode command.
Syntax
spanning-tree mode { stp | rstp | mstp }
no spanning-tree mode
Parameter
stp ——Spanning Tree Protocol, the default value.
rstp ——Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
mstp ——Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
161
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the spanning-tree mode as mstp:
T1600G-28TS(config)# spanning-tree mode mstp
20.6 spanning-tree mst configuration
Description
The spanning-tree mst configuration command is used to access MST
Configuration Mode from Global Configuration Mode, as to configure the
VLAN-Instance mapping, region name and revision level. To return to the
default configuration of the corresponding Instance, please use no
spanning-tree mst configuration command.
Syntax
spanning-tree mst configuration
no spanning-tree mst configuration
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enter into the MST configuration mode:
T1600G-28TS(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration
T1600G-28TS(Config-mst)#
20.7 instance
Description
The instance command is used to configure the VLAN-Instance mapping. To
remove the VLAN-instance mapping or disable the corresponding instance,
162
please use no instance command. When an instance is disabled, the related
mapping VLANs will be removed.
Syntax
instance
instance-id
vlan
vlan-id
no instance
instance-id
[ vlan
vlan-id
]
Parameters
instance-id
—— Instance ID, ranging from 1 to 8.
vlan-id
—— The VLAN ID selected to mapping with the corresponding
instance.
Command Mode
MST Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Map the VLANs 1-100 to Instance 1:
T1600G-28TS(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration
T1600G-28TS(config-mst)# instance 1 vlan 1-100
Disable Instance 1, namely remove all the mapping VLANs 1-100:
T1600G-28TS(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration
T1600G-28TS(config-mst)# no instance 1
Remove VLANs 1-50 in mapping VLANs 1-100 for Instance 1:
T1600G-28TS(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration
T1600G-28TS(config-mst)# no instance 1 vlan 1-50
20.8 name
Description
The name command is used to configure the region name of MST instance.
Syntax
name
name
163
Parameters
name
—— The region name, used to identify MST region. It ranges from 1 to
32 characters.
Command Mode
MST Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the region name of MST as “region1”:
T1600G-28TS(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration
T1600G-28TS(config-mst)# name region1
20.9 revision
Description
The revision command is used to configure the revision level of MST
instance.
Syntax
revision
revision
Parameters
revision
—— The revision level for MST region identification, ranging from 0
to 65535.
Command Mode
MST Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the revision level of MST as 100:
T1600G-28TS(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration
T1600G-28TS(config-mst)# revision 100
164
20.10 spanning-tree mst instance
Description
The spanning-tree mst instance command is used to configure the priority
of MST instance. To return to the default value of MST instance priority,
please use no spanning-tree mst instance command.
Syntax
spanning-tree mst instance
instance-id
priority
pri
no spanning-tree mst instance
instance-id
priority
Parameter
instance-id
—— Instance ID, ranging from 1 to 8.
pri
—— MSTI Priority, which must be multiple of 4096 ranging from 0 to
61440. By default, it is 32768. MSTI priority is an important criterion on
determining if the switch will be chosen as the root bridge in the specific
instance.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the MST Instance 1 and configure its priority as 4096:
T1600G-28TS(config)# spanning-tree mst instance 1 priority 4096
20.11 spanning-tree mst
Description
The spanning-tree mst command is used to configure MST Instance Port. To
return to the default configuration of the corresponding Instance Port, please
use no spanning-tree mst command. A port can play different roles in
different spanning tree instance. You can use this command to configure the
parameters of the ports in different instance IDs as well as view status of the
ports in the specified instance.
Syntax
spanning-tree mst instance
instance-id
{[ port-priority
pri
] | [ cost
cost
]}
165
no spanning-tree mst instance
instance-id
Parameter
instance-id
—— Instance ID, ranging from 1 to 8.
pri
—— Port Priority, which must be multiple of 16 ranging from 0 to 240. By
default, it is 128. Port Priority is an important criterion on determining if the
port will be chosen as the root port by the device connected to this port.
cost
—— Path Cost, ranging from 0 to 200000. The lower value has the
higher priority. Its default value is 0 meaning “auto”.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the priority of port 1 in MST Instance 1 as 64, and path cost as
2000:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# spanning-tree mst instance 1 port-priority 64
cost 2000
20.12 spanning-tree priority
Description
The spanning-tree priority command is used to configure the bridge priority.
To return to the default value of bridge priority, please use no spanning-tree
priority command.
Syntax
spanning-tree priority
pri
no spanning-tree priority
Parameter
pri
—— Bridge priority, ranging from 0 to 61440. It is 32768 by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
166
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the bridge priority as 4096:
T1600G-28TS(config)# spanning-tree priority 4096
20.13 spanning-tree timer
Description
The spanning-tree timer command is used to configure forward-time,
hello-time and max-age of Spanning Tree. To return to the default
configurations, please use no spanning-tree timer command.
Syntax
spanning-tree timer {[ forward-time
forward-time
] [ hello-time
hello-time
]
[ max-age
max-age
]}
no spanning-tree timer
Parameter
forward-time
—— Forward Delay, which is the time for the port to transit its
state after the network topology is changed. Forward Delay ranges from 4 to
30 in seconds and it is 15 by default. Otherwise, 2 * (Forward Delay - 1) >=
Max Age.
hello-time
——Hello Time, which is the interval to send BPDU packets, and
used to test the links. Hello Time ranges from 1 to 10 in seconds and it is 2 by
default. Otherwise, 2 * (Hello Time + 1) <= Max Age.
max-age
—— The maximum time the switch can wait without receiving a
BPDU before attempting to reconfigure, ranging from 6 to 40 in seconds. By
default, it is 20.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure forward-time, hello-time and max-age for Spanning Tree as 16
seconds, 3 seconds and 22 seconds respectively:
167
T1600G-28TS(config)# spanning-tree timer forward-time 16 hello-time 3
max-age 22
20.14 spanning-tree hold-count
Description
The spanning-tree hold-count command is used to configure the maximum
number of BPDU packets transmitted per Hello Time interval. To return to the
default configurations, please use no spanning-tree hold-count command.
Syntax
spanning-tree hold-count
value
no spanning-tree hold-count
Parameter
value
—— The maximum number of BPDU packets transmitted per Hello Time
interval, ranging from 1 to 20 in pps. By default, it is 5.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the hold-count of STP as 8pps:
T1600G-28TS(config)# spanning-tree hold-count 8
20.15 spanning-tree max-hops
Description
The spanning-tree max-hops command is used to configure the maximum
number of hops that occur in a specific region before the BPDU is discarded.
To return to the default configurations, please use no spanning-tree
max-hops command.
Syntax
spanning-tree max-hops
value
no spanning-tree max-hops
168
Parameter
value
—— The maximum number of hops that occur in a specific region
before the BPDU is discarded, ranging from 1 to 40 in hop. By default, it is 20.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the max-hops of STP as 30:
T1600G-28TS(config)# spanning-tree max-hops 30
20.16 spanning-tree bpdufilter
Description
The spanning-tree bpdufilter command is used to enable the BPDU filter
function for a port. With the function enabled, the port can be prevented from
receiving and sending any BPDU packets. To disable the BPDU filter function,
please use no spanning-tree bpdufilter command.
Syntax
spanning-tree bpdufilter
no spanning-tree bpdufilter
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the BPDU filter function for port 1/0/2:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# spanning-tree bpdufilter
169
20.17 spanning-tree bpduflood
Description
The spanning-tree bpduflood command is used to enable the BPDU forward
function for a port. With the function enabled, the port still can forward
spanning tree BPDUs when the spanning tree function is disabled on this port.
To disable the BPDU filter function, please use no spanning-tree bpduflood
command.
Syntax
spanning-tree bpduflood
no spanning-tree bpduflood
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the BPDU forward function for port 1/0/2:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# spanning-tree bpduflood
20.18 spanning-tree bpduguard
Description
The spanning-tree bpduguard command is used to enable the BPDU protect
function for a port. With the BPDU protect function enabled, the port will set
itself automatically as ERROR-PORT when it receives BPDU packets, and the
port will disable the forwarding function for a while. To disable the BPDU
protect function, please use no spanning-tree bpduguard command.
Syntax
spanning-tree bpduguard
no spanning-tree bpduguard
170
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the BPDU protect function for port 1/0/2:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# spanning-tree bpduguard
20.19 spanning-tree guard loop
Description
The spanning-tree guard loop command is used to enable the Loop Protect
function for a port. Loop Protect is to prevent the loops in the network
brought by recalculating STP because of link failures and network
congestions. To disable the Loop Protect function, please use no
spanning-tree guard loop command.
Syntax
spanning-tree guard loop
no spanning-tree guard loop
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the Loop Protect function for port 2:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# spanning-tree guard loop
171
20.20 spanning-tree guard root
Description
The spanning-tree guard root command is used to enable the Root Protect
function for a port. With the Root Protect function enabled, the root bridge
will set itself automatically as ERROR-PORT when receiving BPDU packets
with higher priority, in order to maintain the role of root ridge. To disable the
Root Protect function, please use no spanning-tree guard root command.
Syntax
spanning-tree guard root
no spanning-tree guard root
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the Root Protect function for port 2:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# spanning-tree guard root
20.21 spanning-tree guard tc
Description
The spanning-tree guard tc command is used to enable the TC Protect of
Spanning Tree function for a port. To disable the TC Protect of Spanning Tree
function, please use no spanning-tree guard tc command. A switch removes
MAC address entries upon receiving TC-BPDUs. If a malicious user
continuously sends TC-BPDUs to a switch, the switch will be busy with
removing MAC address entries, which may decrease the performance and
stability of the network. With the Protect of Spanning Tree function enabled,
you can configure the number of TC-BPDUs in a required time, so as to avoid
the process of removing MAC addresses frequently.
Syntax
spanning-tree guard tc
172
no spanning-tree guard tc
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the TC Protect of Spanning Tree for port 2:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# spanning-tree guard tc
20.22 spanning-tree mcheck
Description
The spanning-tree mcheck command is used to enable mcheck.
Syntax
spanning-tree mcheck
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable mcheck for port 2:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# spanning-tree mcheck
20.23 show spanning-tree active
Description
The show spanning-tree active command is used to display the active
information of spanning-tree.
173
Syntax
show spanning-tree active
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the active information of spanning-tree:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show spanning-tree active
20.24 show spanning-tree bridge
Description
The show spanning-tree bridge command is used to display the bridge
parameters.
Syntax
show spanning-tree bridge [ forward-time | hello-time | hold-count | max-age
| max-hops | mode | priority | state ]
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the bridge parameters:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show spanning-tree bridge
20.25 show spanning-tree interface
Description
The show spanning-tree interface command is used to display the
spanning-tree information of all ports or a specified port.
174
Syntax
show spanning-tree interface [ gigabitEthernet
port
| port-channel
port-channel-id
] [ edge | ext-cost | int-cost | mode | p2p | priority | role | state |
status ]
Parameter
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
port-channel-id
—— The ID of the port channel.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the spanning-tree information of all ports:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show spanning-tree interface
Display the spanning-tree information of port 1/0/2:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show spanning-tree interface gigabitEthernet
1/0/2
Display the spanning-tree mode information of port 1/0/2:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show spanning-tree interface gigabitEthernet
1/0/2 mode
20.26 show spanning-tree interface-security
Description
The show spanning-tree interface-security command is used to display the
protect information of all ports or a specified port.
Syntax
show spanning-tree interface-security [ gigabitEthernet
port
|
port-channel
port-channel-id
] [ bpdufilter | bpduflood | bpduguard | loop |
root | tc ]
Parameter
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
port-channel-id
—— The ID of the port channel.
175
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the protect information of all ports:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show spanning-tree interface-security
Display the protect information of port 1:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show spanning-tree interface-security
gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
Display the interface security bpdufilter information:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show spanning-tree interface-security bpdufilter
20.27 show spanning-tree mst
Description
The show spanning-tree mst command is used to display the related
information of MST Instance.
Syntax
show spanning-tree mst { configuration [ digest ] | instance
instance-id
[ interface [ gigabitEthernet
port
| port-channel
port-channel-id
] ] }
Parameter
instance-id
—— Instance ID desired to show, ranging from 1 to 8.
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
port-channel-id
—— The ID of the port channel.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the region information and mapping information of VLAN and MST
Instance:
T1600G-28TS(config)#show spanning-tree mst configuration
176
Display the related information of MST Instance 1:
T1600G-28TS(config)#show spanning-tree mst instance 1
Display all the ports information of MST Instance 1:
T1600G-28TS(config)#show spanning-tree mst instance 1 interface
177
Chapter 21 LLDP Commands
LLDP function enables network devices to advertise their own device information periodically
to neighbors on the same LAN. The information of the LLDP devices in the LAN can be stored
by its neighbor in a standard MIB, so it is possible for the information to be accessed by a
Network Management System (NMS) using SNMP.
21.1 lldp
Description
The lldp command is used to enable LLDP function. To disable the LLDP
function, please use no lldp command.
Syntax
lldp
no lldp
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable LLDP function globally:
T1600G-28TS(config)#lldp
21.2 lldp forward_message
Description
The lldp forward_message command is used to enable the switch to forward
LLDP messages when LLDP function is disabled. To disable the LLDP
messages forwarding function, please use no lldp forward_message
command.
Syntax
lldp forward_message
no lldp forward_message
178
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the switch to forward LLDP messages when LLDP function is disabled
globally:
T1600G-28TS(config)#lldp forward_message
21.3 lldp hold-multiplier
Description
The lldp hold-multiplier command is used to configure the Hold Multiplier
parameter. The aging time of the local information in the neighbor device is
determined by the actual TTL value used in the sending LLDPDU. TTL = Hold
Multiplier * Transmit Interval. To return to the default configuration, please
use no lldp hold-multiplier command.
Syntax
lldp hold-multiplier
multiplier
no lldp hold-multiplier
Parameter
multiplier
—— Configure the Hold Multiplier parameter. It ranges from 2 to 10.
By default, it is 4.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify Hold Multiplier as 5:
T1600G-28TS(config)#lldp hold-multiplier 5
179
21.4 lldp timer
Description
The lldp timer command is used to configure the parameters about
transmission. To return to the default configuration, please use no lldp timer
command.
Syntax
lldp timer { tx-interval
tx-interval |
tx-delay
tx-delay |
reinit-delay
reinit-delay
|
notify-interval
notify-interval |
fast-count
fast-count
}
no lldp timer { tx-interval | tx-delay | reinit-delay | notify-interval | fast-count }
Parameter
tx-interval
—— Configure the interval for the local device to transmit LLDPDU
to its neighbors. The value ranges from 5 to 32768 and the default value is 30
seconds.
tx-delay
—— Configure a value from 1 to 8192 in seconds to specify the time
for the local device to transmit LLDPDU to its neighbors after changes occur
so as to prevent LLDPDU being sent frequently. By default, it is 2 seconds.
reinit-delay
—— This parameter indicates the amount of delay from when
LLDP status becomes "disable" until re-initialization will be attempted. The
value ranges from 1 to 10 and the default value is 2.
notify-interval
—— Specify the interval of Trap message which will be sent
from local device to network management system. The value ranges from 5
to 3600 and the default value is 5 seconds.
fast-count
—— When the port's LLDP state transforms from Disable (or
Rx_Only) to Tx&Rx (or Tx_Only), the fast start mechanism will be enabled, that
is, the transmit interval will be shorten to a second, and several LLDPDUs will
be sent out (the number of LLDPDUs equals this parameter). The value ranges
from 1 to 10 and the default value is 3.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify the Transmit Interval of LLDPDU as 45 seconds and Trap message to
NMS as 120 seconds:
180
T1600G-28TS(config)#lldp timer tx-interval 45
T1600G-28TS(config)#lldp timer notify-interval 120
21.5 lldp receive
Description
The lldp receive command is used to enable the designated port to receive
LLDPDU. To disable the function, please use no lldp receive command.
Syntax
lldp receive
no lldp receive
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable port 1/0/1 to receive LLDPDU:
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
T1600G-28TS(config-if)#lldp receive
21.6 lldp transmit
Description
The lldp transmit command is used to enable the designated port to transmit
LLDPDU. To disable the function, please use no lldp transmit command.
Syntax
lldp transmit
no lldp transmit
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
181
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1 to transmit LLDPDU:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
T1600G-28TS(config-if)#lldp transmit
21.7 lldp snmp-trap
Description
The lldp snmp-trap command is used to enable the port’s SNMP notification.
If enabled, the port will notify the trap event to network management system.
To disable the ports' SNMP notification, please use no lldp snmp-trap
command.
Syntax
lldp snmp-trap
no lldp snmp-trap
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the SNMP notification for Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1:
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
T1600G-28TS(config-if)#lldp snmp-trap
182
21.8 lldp tlv-select
Description
The lldp tlv-select command is used to configure TLVs to be included in
outgoing LLDPDU. To exclude TLVs, please use no lldp tlv-select command.
By default, All TLVs are included in outgoing LLDPDU.
Syntax
lldp tlv-select { [ port-description ] [ system-capability ] [ system-description ]
[ system-name ] [ management-address ] [ port-vlan ] [ protocol-vlan ]
[ vlan-name ] [ link-aggregation ] [ mac-phy-cfg ] [ max-frame-size ] [ power ]
[ all ] }
no lldp tlv-select { [ port-description ] [ system-capability ]
[ system-description ] [ system-name ] [ management-address ] [ port-vlan ]
[ protocol-vlan ] [ vlan-name ] [ link-aggregation ] [ mac-phy-cfg ]
[ max-frame-size ] [ power ] [ all ] }
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Exclude “management-address” and “port-vlan-id” TLVs in LLDPDU outgoing
from Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# no lldp tlv-select management-address port-vlan
21.9 lldp management-address
Description
The lldp management-address command is used to configure the port‘s
management address to be included in management address TLV. The NMS
uses management addresses to identify the devices. To delete the port‘s
management address, please use no lldp management address command.
183
Syntax
lldp management-address {
ip-address
}
no lldp management-address
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the port‘s management address as 192.168.1.100 for port 1/0/1:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# lldp management-address 192.168.0.100
21.10 lldp med-fast-count
Description
The lldp med-fast-count command is used to configure the number of the
LLDP-MED frames that will be sent out. When LLDP-MED fast start
mechanism is activated, multiple LLDP-MED frames will be transmitted based
on this parameter. The default value is 4. To return to the default
configuration, please use no lldp med-fast-count command.
Syntax
lldp med-fast-count
count
no lldp med-fast-count
Parameter
count
—— Configure the Fast Start Count parameter. It ranges from 1 to 10.
By default, it is 4.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Specify Fast Start Count as 5:
184
T1600G-28TS(config)# lldp med-fast-count 5
21.11 lldp med-status
Description
The lldp med-status command is used to enable the LLDP-MED feature for
the corresponding port. After the LLDP-MED feature is enabled, the port's
Admin Status will be changed to Tx&Rx. To disable the LLDP-MED feature for
the corresponding port, please use no lldp med-status command.
Syntax
lldp med-status
no lldp med-status
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the LLDP-MED feature for port 1/0/2:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# lldp med-status
21.12 lldp med-tlv-select
Description
The lldp med-tlv-select command is used to configure LLDP-MED TLVs to
be included in outgoing LLDPDU for the corresponding port. To exclude
LLDP-MED TLVs, please use no lldp med-tlv-select command. By default, All
TLVs are included in outgoing LLDPDU.
Syntax
lldp med-tlv-select { [inventory-management]
[location]
[network-policy]
[power-management] [all]
}
no lldp med-tlv-select { [inventory-management]
[location]
[network-policy]
[power-management] [all]
}
185
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Exclude “network policy” and “inventory” TLVs in LLDPDU outgoing from port
1/0/2:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# no lldp med-tlv-select network-policy inventory-
management
21.13 lldp med-location
Description
The lldp med-location command is used to configure the Location
Identification TLV's content in outgoing LLDPDU of the port.
Syntax
lldp med-location { emergency-number
identifier
| civic-address
[ [ language
language
] [ province-state
province-state
] [ lci-county-name
county-name
] [ lci-city
city
] [ street
street
] [ house-number
house-number
]
[name
name
] [ postal-zipcode
postal-zipcode
] [ room-number
room-number
]
[ post-office-box
post-office-box
] [ additional
additional
] [ country-code
country-code
] [ what { dhcp-server | endpoint | switch } ] ] }
Parameter
emergency-number —— Emergency Call Service ELIN identifier, which is
used during emergency call setup to a traditional CAMA or ISDN trunk-based
PSAP. The length of this field ranges from 10 to 25 characters.
civic-address —— The civic address is defined to reuse the relevant
sub-fields of the DHCP option for civic Address based Location Configuration
Information as specified by IETF.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
186
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the civic address in the Location Identification TLV's content in
outgoing LLDPDU of port 1/0/2. Configure the language as English and city as
London:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# lldp med-location civic-address language English
lci-city London
21.14 show lldp
Description
The show lldp command is used to display the global configuration of LLDP.
Syntax
show lldp
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the global configuration of LLDP:
T1600G-28TS#show lldp
21.15 show lldp interface
Description
The show lldp interface command is used to display LLDP configuration of
the corresponding port. By default, the LLDP configuration of all the ports will
be displayed.
Syntax
show lldp interface [ gigabitEthernet
port
]
187
Parameters
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the LLDP configuration of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1:
T1600G-28TS#show lldp interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
21.16 show lldp local-information interface
Description
The show lldp local-information interface command is used to display the
LLDP information of the corresponding port. By default, the LLDP information
of all the ports will be displayed.
Syntax
show lldp local-information interface [ gigabitEthernet
port
]
Parameters
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the LLDP information of 1/0/1:
T1600G-28TS#show lldp local-information interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
188
21.17 show lldp neighbor-information interface
Description
The show lldp neighbor-information interface command is used to display
the neighbor information of the corresponding port. By default, the neighbor
information of all the ports will be displayed.
Syntax
show lldp neighbor-information interface [ gigabitEthernet
port
]
Parameters
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the neighbor information of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1:
T1600G-28TS#show lldp neighbor-information interface gigabitEthernet
1/0/1
21.18 show lldp traffic interface
Description
The show lldp traffic interface command is used to display the LLDP
statistic information between the local device and neighbor device of the
corresponding port. By default, the LLDP statistic information of all the ports
will be displayed.
Syntax
show lldp traffic interface [ gigabitEthernet
port
]
Parameters
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
189
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the LLDP statistic information of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1:
T1600G-28TS#show lldp traffic interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
190
Chapter 22 Static Routes Commands
22.1 ip routing
Description
This ip routing command is used to enable IPv4 routing globally. To disable
IPv4 routing, please use the no ip routing command.
Syntax
ip routing
no ip routing
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable IPv4 routing feature for the switch:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip routing
22.2 interface vlan
Description
This interface vlan command is used to create the VLAN interface. To delete
the specified VLAN interface, please use the no interface vlan command.
Syntax
interface vlan {
vid
}
no interface vlan {
vid
}
Parameter
vid
—— The ID of the VLAN.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
191
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Create the VLAN interface 2:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface vlan 2
22.3 interface loopback
Description
This interface loopback command is used to create the loopback interface.
To delete the specified loopback interface, please use the no interface
loopback command.
Syntax
interface loopback {
id
}
no interface loopback {
id
}
Parameter
id
—— The ID of the loopback interface, ranging from 1 to 64.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Create the loopback interface 1:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface loopback 1
22.4 switchport
Description
This switchport command is used to switch the Layer 3 interface into the
Layer 2 port. To switch the Layer 2 port into the Layer 3 routed port, please
use the no switchport command.
192
Syntax
switchport
no switchport
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Switch port 1/0/9 into the routed port:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/9
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# no switchport
22.5 interface range port-channel
Description
This interface range port-channel command is used to create multiple
port-channel interfaces.
Syntax
interface range port-channel
port-channel-list
Parameter
port-channel-list
—— The list of the port-channel interface, ranging from 1 to
14, in the format of 1-3, 5.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Create the port-channel interfaces 1, 3, 4 and 5:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface port-channel 1,3-5
193
22.6 description
Description
This description command is used to add a description to the Layer 3
interface, including routed port, port-channel interface, loopback interface
and VLAN interface. To clear the description of the corresponding interface,
please use the no description command.
Syntax
description
string
no description
Parameter
string
—— Content of an interface description, ranging from 1 to 32
characters.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Add a description system-if to the routed port 1/0/9 :
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/9
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# no switchport
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# description system-if
22.7 shutdown
Description
This shutdown command is used to shut down the specified interface. The
interface type include: routed port, port-channel interface, loopback interface
and VLAN interface. To enable the specified interface, please use the no
shutdown command.
Syntax
shutdown
194
no shutdown
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Shut down the routed port 1/0/9:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/9
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# no switchport
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# shutdown
22.8 interface port-channel
Description
This interface port-channel command is used to create the port-channel
interface. To delete the specified port-channel interface, please use the no
interface port-channel command.
Syntax
interface port-channel {
port-channel-id
}
no interface port-channel {
port-channel-id
}
Parameter
port-channel-id
—— The ID of the port-channel interface, ranging from 1 to
14.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Create the port-channel interface 1:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface port-channel 1
195
22.9 ip route
Description
This ip route command is configure the static route. To clear the
corresponding entry, please use the no ip route command.
Syntax
ip route {
dest-address
} {
mask
} {
next-hop-address
}
[
distance
]
no ip route {
dest-address
} {
mask
} {
next-hop-address
}
Parameter
dest-address
—— The destination IP address.
mask
—— The subnet mask.
next
-
hop-address
—— The address of the next-hop.
distance
—— The distance metric of this route, ranging from 1 to 255. The
smaller the distance is, the higher the priority is.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Create a static route with the destination IP address as 192.168.2.0, the
subnet mask as 255.255.255.0 and the next-hop address as 192.168.0.2:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip route 192.168.2.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.0.2
22.10 ipv6 routing
Description
This ipv6 routing command is enale the IPv6 routing feature globally. To
diable IPv6 routing, please use the no ipv6 routing command.
Syntax
ipv6 routing
no ipv6 routing
196
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable IPv6 routing globally:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ipv6 routing
22.11 ipv6 route
Description
This ipv6 route command is configure the IPv6 static route. To clear the
corresponding entry, please use the no ipv6 route command.
Syntax
ipv6 route {
ipv6-dest-address
} {
next-hop-address
}
[
distance
]
no ipv6 route {
ipv6-dest-address
} {
next-hop-address
}
Parameter
ipv6-dest-address
—— The IPv6 address of the destination network.
next
-
hop-address
—— The IPv6 address of the next-hop.
distance
—— The distance metric of this route, ranging from 1 to 255. The
smaller the distance is, the higher the priority is.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Create a static route with the destination network IP address as 3200::/64 and
the next-hop address as 3100::1234:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ipv6 route 3200::/64 3100::1234
197
22.12 show interface vlan
Description
The show interface vlan command is used to display the information of the
specified interface VLAN.
Syntax
show interface vlan
vid
Parameter
vid
—— The VLAN ID.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the information of VLAN 2:
T1600G-28TS(config)#show interface vlan 2
22.13 show ip interface
Description
This show ip interface command is used to display the detailed information
of the specified Layer 3 interface.
Syntax
show ip interface [ gigabitEthernet
port |
port-channel
port-channel-id |
loopback
id
| vlan
vlan-id
]
Parameter
port
—— The port number.
port-channel-id
—— The ID of the port channel. Member ports in this port
channel should all be routed ports.
id
—— The loopback interface ID.
vlan-id
—— The VLAN interface ID.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
198
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the detailed information of the VLAN interface 2:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show ip interface vlan 2
22.14 show ip interface brief
Description
This show ip interface brief command is used to display the summary
information of the Layer 3 interfaces.
Syntax
show ip interface brief
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the summary information of the Layer 3 interfaces:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show ip interface brief
22.15 show ip route
Description
This show ip route command is used to display the route entries of the
specified type.
Syntax
show ip route [ static | connected
]
Parameter
static | connected —— Specify the route type. If not specified, all types of
route entries will be displayed.
static: The static routes.
199
connected: The connected routes.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the static routes:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show ip route static
22.16 show ip route specify
Description
This show ip route specify command is used to display the valid routing
information to the specified IP address or network segments.
Syntax
show ip route specify {
ip
} [
mask
] [ longer-prefixes ]
Parameter
ip
—— Specify the destination IP address.
mask
—— Specify the destination IP address together with the parameter
ip
.
longer-prefixes —— Specify the destination subnets that match the network
segment determined by the ip and mask parameters.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the shortest route to 192.168.0.100:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show ip route specify 192.168.0.100
Look up the route entry with the destination as 192.168.0.0/24:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show ip route specify 192.168.0.0 255.255.255.0
Display the routes to all the subnets that belongs to 192.168.0.0/16:
200
T1600G-28TS(config)# show ip route specify 192.168.0.0 255.255.0.0
longer-prefixes
22.17 show ip route summary
Description
This show ip route summary command is used to display the summary
information of the route entries classified by their sources.
Syntax
show ip route summary
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the summary information of route entries:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show ip route summary
22.18 show ipv6 interface
Description
This command is used to display the configured IPv6 information of the
management interface, including ipv6 function status, link-local address and
global address, IPv6 multicast groups etc.
Syntax
show ipv6 interface
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the IPv6 information of the management interface:
201
T1600G-28TS(config)# show ipv6 interface
22.19 show ipv6 route
Description
This show ipv6 route command is used to display the IPv6 route entries of
the specified type.
Syntax
show ipv6 route [ static | connected
]
Parameter
static | connected —— Specify the route type. If not specified, all types of
route entries will be displayed.
static: The static routes.
connected: The connected routes.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the IPv6 static routes:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show ipv6 route static
22.20 show ipv6 route summary
Description
This show ipv6 route summary command is used to display the summary
information of the IPv6 route entries classified by their sources.
Syntax
show ipv6 route summary
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
202
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the summary information of IPv6 route entries:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show ipv6 route summary
203
Chapter 23 IPv6 Address Configuration Commands
The IPv6 address configuration commands are provided in the Interface Configuration Mode,
which includes the routed port, the port-channel interface and the VLAN interface. Enter the
configuration mode of these Layer 3 interfaces and configure their IPv6 parameters.
23.1 ipv6 enable
Description
This command is used to enable the IPv6 function on the specified Layer 3
interface. IPv6 function should be enabled before the IPv6 address
configuration management. By default it is enabled on VLAN interface 1. IPv6
function can only be enabled on one Layer 3 interface at a time.
If the IPv6 function is disabled, the corresponding IPv6-based modules will be
invalid, for example SSHv6, SSLv6, TFTPv6 and more. To disable the IPv6
function, please use no ipv6 enable command.
Syntax
ipv6 enable
no ipv6 enable
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the IPv6 function on the VLAN interface 1：
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface vlan 1
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# ipv6 enable
23.2 ipv6 address autoconfig
Description
This command is used to enable the automatic configuration of the ipv6
link-local address. The switch has only one ipv6 link-local address, which can
be configured automatically or manually. The general ipv6 link-local address
204
has the prefix as fe80::/10. IPv6 routers cannot forward packets that have
link-local source or destination addresses to other links. The autu-configured
ipv6 link-local address is in EUI-64 format. To verify the uniqueness of the
link-local address, the manually configured ipv6 link-local address will be
deleted when the auto-configured ipv6 link-local address takes effect.
Syntax
ipv6 address autoconfig
Configuration Mode
Interface Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the automatic configuration of the ipv6 link-local address on VLAN
interface 1:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface vlan 1
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# ipv6 address autoconfig
23.3 ipv6 address link-local
Description
The ipv6 address link-local command is used to configure the ipv6 link-local
address manually on a specified interface. To delete the configured link-local
address, please use no ipv6 address link-local command.
Syntax
ipv6 address
ipv6-addr
link-local
no ipv6 address
ipv6-addr
link-local
Parameter
ipv6-addr
—— The link-local address of the interface. It should be a
standardized IPv6 address with the prefix fe80::/10, otherwise this command
will be invalid.
Configuration Mode
Interface Configuration Mode
205
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the link-local address as fe80::1234 on the VLAN interface 1:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface vlan 1
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# ipv6 address fe80::1234 link-local
23.4 ipv6 address dhcp
Description
The ipv6 address dhcp command is used to enable the DHCPv6 Client
function. When this function is enabled, the Layer 3 interface will try to obtain
IP from DHCPv6 server. To delete the allocated IP from DHCPv6 server and
disable the DHCPv6 Client function, please use no ipv6 address dhcp
command.
Syntax
ipv6 address dhcp
no ipv6 address dhcp
Configuration Mode
Interface Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the DHCP Client function on VLAN interface 1:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface vlan 1
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# ipv6 address dhcp
23.5 ipv6 address ra
Description
This command is used to configure the interface’s global IPv6 address
according to the address prefix and other configuration parameters from its
206
received RA(Router Advertisement) message. To disable this function, please
use no ipv6 address ra command.
Syntax
ipv6 address ra
no ipv6 address ra
Configuration Mode
Interface Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the automatic ipv6 address configuration function to obtain IPv6
address through the RA message on VLAN interface 1:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface vlan 1
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# ipv6 address ra
23.6 ipv6 address eui-64
Description
This command is used to manually configure a global IPv6 address with an
extended unique identifier (EUI) in the low-order 64 bits on the interface.
Specify only the network prefix. The last 64 bits are automatically computed
from the switch MAC address. To remove a EUI-64 IPv6 address from the
interface, please use the no ipv6 address eui-64 command.
Syntax
ipv6 address
ipv6-addr
eui-64
no ipv6 address
ipv6-addr
eui-64
Parameter
ipv6-addr
—— Global IPv6 address with 64 bits network prefix, for example
3ffe::/64.
Configuration Mode
Interface Configuration Mode
207
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure an EUI-64 global address on the interface with the network prefix
3ffe::/64:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface vlan 1
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# ipv6 address 3ffe::/64 eui-64
23.7 ipv6 address
Description
This command is used to manually configure a global IPv6 address on the
interface. To remove a global IPv6 address from the interface, please use no
ipv6 address command.
Syntax
ipv6 address
ipv6-addr
no ipv6 address
ipv6-addr
Parameter
ipv6-addr
—— Global IPv6 address with network prefix, for example
3ffe::1/64.
Configuration Mode
Interface Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the global address 3001::1/64 on VLAN interface 1:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface vlan 1
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# ipv6 address 3001::1/64
208
23.8 show ipv6 interface
Description
This command is used to display the configured ipv6 information of the
management interface, including ipv6 function status, link-local address and
global address, ipv6 multicast groups etc.
Syntax
show ipv6 interface
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the ipv6 information of the management interface:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show ipv6 interface
209
Chapter 24 ARP Commands
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is used to resolve an IP address into an Ethernet MAC
address. The switch maintains an ARP mapping table to record the IP-to-MAC mapping
relations, which is used for forwarding packets. An ARP mapping table contains two types of
ARP entries: dynamic and static. An ARP dynamic entry is automatically created and maintained
by ARP. A static ARP entry is manually configured and maintained.
24.1 arp
Description
This arp command is used to add a static ARP entry. To delete the specified
ARP entry, please use the no arp command.
Syntax
arp
ip mac type
no arp
ip type
Parameter
ip
—— The IP address of the static ARP entry.
mac
—— The MAC address of the static ARP entry.
type
—— The ARP type. Configure it as “arpa”.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Create a static ARP entry with the IP as 192.168.0.1 and the MAC as
00:11:22:33:44:55:
T1600G-28TS(config)# arp 192.168.0.1 00:11:22:33:44:55 arpa
210
24.2 clear arp-cache
Description
This clear arp-cache command is used to clear all the dynamic ARP entries.
Syntax
clear arp-cache
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Clear all the dynamic ARP entries:
T1600G-28TS(config)# clear arp-cache
24.3 arp dynamicrenew
Description
This arp dynamicrenew command is used to automatically renew dynamic
ARP entries. To disable the switch to automatically renew dynamic ARP
entries, please use the no arp dynamicremew command. By default, it is
enabled.
Syntax
arp dynamicremew
no arp dynamicremew
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the switch to automatically renew the dynamic ARP entries:
T1600G-28TS(config)# arp dynamicrenew
211
24.4 arp timeout
Description
This arp timeout command is used to configure the ARP aging time of the
interface.
Syntax
arp timeout
timeout
no arp timeout
Parameter
timeout
—— Specify the aging time, ranging from 10 to 3000 seconds. The
default value is 1200 seconds.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the ARP aging time as 60 seconds:
T1600G-28TS(config)# arp timeout 60
24.5 gratuitous-arp intf-status-up enable
Description
This gratuitous-arp intf-status-up enable command is used to enable the
Layer 3 interface to send a gratuitous ARP packet when the interface’s status
becomes up.
Syntax
gratuitous-arp intf-status-up enable
no gratuitous-arp intf-status-up enable
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
212
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Enable the switch’s Layer 3 interfaces to send gratuitous ARP packets when
their status becomes up:
T1600G-28TS(config)# gratuitous-arp intf-status-up enable
24.6 gratuitous-arp dup-ip-detected enable
Description
This gratuitous-arp dup-ip-detected enable command is used to enable the
Layer 3 interface to send a gratuitous ARP packet when receiving a
gratuitous packets of which the IP address is the same as its own.
Syntax
gratuitous-arp dup-ip-detected enable
no gratuitous-arp dup-ip-detected enable
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Enable the switch’s Layer 3 interface to send gratuitous ARP packets when
receiving a gratuitous packets of which the IP address is the same as its own:
T1600G-28TS(config)# gratuitous-arp dup-ip-detected enable
24.7 gratuitous-arp learning enable
Description
This gratuitous-arp learning enable command is used to enable the Layer 3
interface to learn MAC addresses from the gratuitous ARP packets.
Syntax
gratuitous-arp learning enable
no gratuitous-arp learning enable
213
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Enable the Layer 3 interface to learn MAC addresses from the gratuitous ARP
packets:
T1600G-28TS(config)# gratuitous-arp learning enable
24.8 gratuitous-arp send-interval
Description
This gratuitous-arp send-interval command is used to configure the interval
at which the interface periodically send the gratuitous ARP packets.
Syntax
gratuitous-arp send-interval
interval
Parameter
Interval
—— Specify the interval at which the interface periodically send the
gratuitous ARP packets. Value 0 means the interface will not send gratuitous
ARP packets.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface vlan / interface gigabitEthernet /
interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range
port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Specify the interface VLAN 1 to send gratuitous ARP packets every 1 second:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface vlan 1
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# gratuitous-arp send-interval 1
214
24.9 ip proxy-arp
Description
The ip proxy-arp command is used to enable Proxy ARP function on the
specified VLAN interface or routed port. To disable Proxy ARP on this interface,
please use no ip proxy-arp command.
Syntax
ip proxy-arp
no ip proxy-arp
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
None
Example
Enable the Proxy ARP function on VLAN Interface 2:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface vlan 2
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# ip proxy-arp
Enable the Proxy ARP function on routed port 1/0/2:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 2
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# no switchport
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# ip proxy-arp
24.10 ip local-proxy-arp
Description
The ip local-proxy-arp command is used to enable Local Proxy ARP function
on the specified VLAN interface or routed port. To disable Local Proxy ARP
function on this interface, please use no ip local-proxy-arp command.
Syntax
ip local-proxy-arp
no ip local-proxy-arp
215
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (Interface vlan / interface gigabitEthernet /
interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range
port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
None
Example
Enable the Proxy ARP function on VLAN Interface 2:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface vlan 2
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# ip local-proxy-arp
Enable the Proxy ARP function on routed port 1/0/2:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 2
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# no switchport
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# ip local-proxy-arp
24.11 show arp
Description
This show arp command is used to display the active ARP entries. If no
parameter is speicified, all the active ARP entries will be displayed.
Syntax
show arp [
ip
] [
mac
]
Parameter
ip
—— Specify the IP address of your desired ARP entry.
mac
—— Specify the MAC address of your desired ARP entry.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
216
Example
Display the ARP entry with the IP as 192.168.0.2:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show arp 192.168.0.2
24.12 show ip arp (interface)
Description
This show ip arp (interface) command is used to display the active ARP
entries associated with a specified Layer 3 interface.
Syntax
show ip arp { gigabitEthernet
port
| port-channel
port-channel-id
| vlan
id
}
Parameter
port
—— Specify the number of the routed port.
port-channel-id
—— Specify the ID of the port channel.
id
—— Specify the VLAN interface ID.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the ARP entry associated with VLAN interface 2:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show ip arp vlan 2
24.13 show ip arp summary
Description
This show ip arp summary command is used to display the number of the
active ARP entries.
Syntax
show ip arp summary
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
217
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the number of the ARP entries:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show ip arp summary
24.14 show gratuitous-arp
Description
This show gratuitous arp command is used to display the configuration of
gratuitous ARP.
Syntax
show gratuitous-arp
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the configuration of gratuitous ARP:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show gratuitous-arp
24.15 show ip proxy-arp
Description
The show ip proxy-arp command is used to display the Proxy ARP status.
Syntax
show ip proxy-arp
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None
218
Example
Display the Proxy ARP status:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show ip proxy-arp
219
Chapter 25 DHCP Server Commands
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is a network configuration protocol for hosts on
TCP/IP networks, and it provides a framework for distributing configuration information to
hosts. DHCP server assigns IP addresses from specified address pools on a switch or router to
DHCP clients and manages them.
25.1 service dhcp server
Description
The service dhcp server command is used to enable DHCP service globally.
To disable DHCP server service, please use no service dhcp server
command.
Syntax
service dhcp server
no service dhcp server
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable DHCP server service globally:
T1600G-28TS(config)# service dhcp server
25.2 ip dhcp server extend-option capwap-ac-ip
Description
The ip dhcp server extend-option capwap-ac-ip command is used to
configure the IP address of the remote DHCP server. To delete the remote
DHCP server’s IP address, please use no ip dhcp server extend-option
capwap-ac-ip command.
Syntax
ip dhcp server extend-option capwap-ac-ip
ip-address
no ip dhcp server extend-option capwap-ac-ip
220
Parameter
ip-address
—— Specify the IP address of the remote server.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Set the remote DHCP server’s IP address as 192.168.3.1:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp server extend-option capwap-ac-ip
192.168.3.1
25.3 ip dhcp server extend-option vendor-class-id
Description
The ip dhcp server extend-option vendor-class-id command is used to
configure the class ID of the packets from DHCP server in a different network
segment. To delete the class ID settings, please use no ip dhcp server
extend-option vendor-class-id command.
Syntax
ip dhcp server extend-option vendor-class-id
class-id
no ip dhcp server extend-option vendor-class-id
Parameter
class-id
—— Specify the class ID of the DHCP packets from another network
segment.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Set the class ID of the DHCP packets from another network segment as 34:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp server extend-option vendor-class-id 34
221
25.4 ip dhcp server exclude-address
Description
The ip dhcp server exclude-address command is used to specify the
reserved IP addresses which are forbidden to allocate, such as the gateway
address, the network segment broadcast address, the server address etc. To
delete the reserved IP addresses, please use no ip dhcp server
exclude-address command.
Syntax
ip dhcp server exclude-address
start-ip-address end-ip-address
no ip dhcp server exclude-address
start-ip-addr end-ip-address
Parameter
start-ip-address
—— Specify the start IP address of the reserved IP pool.
end-ip-address
—— Specify the end IP address of the reserved IP pool. Only
one IP address will be reserved if the end IP address and the start IP address
are the same.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Set the reserved IP addresses from 192.168.1.1 to 192.168.1.9:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp server exclude-address 192.168.1.1
192.168.1.9
25.5 ip dhcp server pool
Description
The ip dhcp server pool command is used to create the address pool of
DHCP Server and enter the dhcp configuration mode. To delete the address
pool, please use no ip dhcp server pool command.
Syntax
ip dhcp server pool
pool-name
no ip dhcp server pool
pool-name
222
Parameter
pool-name
—— Specify the address pool name, ranging from 1 to 8
characters.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Create the address pool of name POOL1:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp server pool POOL1
25.6 ip dhcp server ping timeout
Description
The ip dhcp server ping timeout command is used to specify the timeout of
PING process. To resume the default value, please use no ip dhcp server
ping timeout command.
Syntax
ip dhcp server ping timeout
value
no ip dhcp server ping timeout
Parameter
value
—— Specify the timeout value, ranging from 100 to 10000ms. The
default value is 100ms.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Set the timeout of PING as 200ms:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp server ping timeout 200
223
25.7 ip dhcp server ping packets
Description
The ip dhcp server ping packets command is used to specify the number of
PING packets sent. If this value is set to 0, the PING process will be disabled.
To resume the default value, please use no ip dhcp server ping packets
command.
Syntax
ip dhcp server ping packets
num
Parameter
num
—— Specify the PING packets’ number, ranging from 0 to 10. By default
it’s 1.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify the PING packets’ number as 2:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp server ping packets 2
25.8 network
Description
The network command is used to specify the address and subnet of the
network pool.
Syntax
network
network-address subnet-mask
Parameter
network-address
—— Specify the network address of the pool, with the
format A.B.C.D. All the IP addresses in the same subnet are allocatable except
the reserved addresses and specific addresses.
subnet-mask
—— Specify the subnet mask of the pool, with the format
A.B.C.D.
224
Command Mode
DHCP Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify the address pool “product” as 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp server pool product
T1600G-28TS(config-dhcp)# network 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0
25.9 lease
Description
The lease command is used to specify the lease time of the address pool.
Syntax
lease
lease-time
Parameter
lease-time
—— Specify the lease time of the pool, ranging from 1 to 2880
minutes. The default value is 120 minutes.
Command Mode
DHCP Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify the lease time of address pool “product” as 10 minutes:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp server pool product
T1600G-28TS(config-dhcp)# lease 10
225
25.10 address hardware-address
Description
The address hardware-address command is used to reserve the static
address bound with hardware address in the address pool. To delete the
binding, please use no address hardware-address.
Syntax
address
ip-address
hardware-address
hardware-address
hardware-type
{ ethernet | ieee802 }
no address
ip-address
Parameter
ip-address
—— Specify the static binding IP address.
hardware-address
—— Specify the hardware address, in the format
XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX.
ethernet | ieee802 —— Specify the hardware type.
Command Mode
DHCP Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Reserve the IP address 192.168.0.10 in the address pool “product” for the
device with the MAC address as 5e:4c:a6:31:24:01 and the hardware type as
ethernet:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp server pool product
T1600G-28TS(config-dhcp)# address 192.168.0.10
hardware-address
5e:4c:a6:31:24:01
hardware-type ethernet
25.11 address client-identifier
Description
The address client-identifier command is used to specify the static address
bound with client ID in the address pool. To delete the binding, please use no
address command.
226
Syntax
address
ip-address
client-identifier
client-id
[ascii]
no address
ip-address
Parameter
ip-address
—— Specify the static binding IP address.
client-id
—— Specify the client ID, in the format of hex value.
ascii —— The client ID is entered with ASCII characters.
Command Mode
DHCP Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Reserve the IP address 192.168.0.10 in the address pool “product” for the
device with the client ID as abc in ASCII:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp pool product
T1600G-28TS(dhcp-config)# address 192.168.0.10 client-identifier abc
ascii
25.12 default-gateway
Description
The default-gateway command is used to specify the default gateway of the
address pool. To delete the configuration, please use no default-gateway.
Syntax
default-gateway
gateway-list
no default-gateway
Parameter
gateway-list
—— Specify the gateway list, with the format of A.B.C.D,E.F.G.H.
At most 8 gateways can be configured, separated by comma.
Command Mode
DHCP Configuration Mode
227
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify the address pool product’s default gateways as 192.168.0.1 and
192.168.1.1:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp server pool product
T1600G-28TS(dhcp-config)# default-gateway 192.168.0.1,192.168.1.1
25.13 dns-server
Description
The dns-server command is used to specify the DNS server of the address
pool. To delete this configuration, please use no dns-server command.
Syntax
dns-server
dns-list
no dns-server
Parameter
dns-list
—— Specify the DNS server list, with the format of A.B.C.D,E.F.G.H. At
most 8 DNS servers can be configured, separated by comma.
Command Mode
DHCP Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify the address pool’s DNS servers as 192.168.0.1 and 192.168.1.1:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp server pool product
T1600G-28TS(config-dhcp)# dns-server 192.168.0.1,192.168.1.1
228
25.14 netbios-name-server
Description
The netbios-name-server command is used to specify the Netbios server’s
IP address. To delete the Netbios servers, please use no
netbios-name-server command.
Syntax
netbios-name-server
NBNS-list
no netbios-name-server
Parameter
NBNS-list
—— Specify the Netbios server list, with the format of
A.B.C.D,E.F.G.H. At most 8 Netbios servers can be configured, separated by
comma.
Command Mode
DHCP Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify the address pool’s Netbios servers as 192.168.0.1 and 192.168.1.1:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp server pool product
T1600G-28TS(config-dhcp)# netbios-name-server 192.168.0.1,192.168.1.1
25.15 netbios-node-type
Description
The netbios-node-type command is used to specify the Netbios server’s
node type. To delete the node type setttings, please use no
netbios-node-type command.
Syntax
netbios-node-type
type
no netbios-node-type
Parameter
type
—— Specify the node type as b-node, h-node, m-node or p-node.
229
Command Mode
DHCP Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify the address pool’s Netbios server type as b-node:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp server pool product
T1600G-28TS(config-dhcp)# netbios-node-type b-node
25.16 next-server
Description
The next-server command is used to specify the next DHCP server’s
address during the DHCP boot process. To delete the next server, please use
no next-server command.
Syntax
next-server
ip-address
next-server
Parameter
ip-address
—— Specify the IP address of the next server.
Command Mode
DHCP Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify the next server’s IP address as 192.168.2.1:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp server pool product
T1600G-28TS(config-dhcp)# next-server 192.168.2.1
230
25.17 domain-name
Description
The domain-name command is used to specify the domain name for the
DHCP client. To delete the domain name, please use no domain-name
command.
Syntax
domain-name
domainname
no domain-name
Parameter
domainname
—— Specify the domain name for the DHCP client.
Command Mode
DHCP Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify the DHCP client’s domain name as edu:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp server pool product
T1600G-28TS(config-dhcp)# domain-name edu
25.18 bootfile
Description
The bootfilecommand is used to specify the name of the DHCP client’s
bootfile. To delete the bootfile, please use no bootfile command.
Syntax
bootfile
file-name
no bootfile
Parameter
file-name
—— Specify the name of the DHCP client’s bootfile.
Command Mode
DHCP Configuration Mode
231
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify the name of the DHCP client’s bootfile as boot1:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp server pool product
T1600G-28TS(config-dhcp)# bootfile boot1
25.19 show ip dhcp server status
Description
The show ip dhcp server status command is used to display the status of
the DHCP service.
Syntax
show ip dhcp server status
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the status of DHCP service:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show ip dhcp server status
25.20 show ip dhcp server statistics
Description
The show ip dhcp server statistics command is used to display the DHCP
packets received and sent by DHCP server.
Syntax
show ip dhcp server statistics
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
232
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the statistics of DHCP packets received and sent by the DHCP server:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show ip dhcp server statistics
25.21 show ip dhcp server extend-option
Description
The show ip dhcp server extend-option command is used to display the
configuration of the remote DCHP servers.
Syntax
show ip dhcp server extend-option
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the configurations of the remote DCHP servers:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show ip dhcp server extend-option
25.22 show ip dhcp server pool
Description
The show ip dhcp server pool command is used to display the configuration
of the address pool.
Syntax
show ip dhcp server pool
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
233
Example
Display the configured address pool:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show ip dhcp server pool
25.23 show ip dhcp server excluded-address
Description
The show ip dhcp server excluded-address command is used to display the
configuration of reserved addresses.
Syntax
show ip dhcp server excluded-address
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the configured reserved addresses:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show ip dhcp server excluded-address
25.24 show ip dhcp server manual-binding
Description
The show ip dhcp server manual-binding command is used to display the
configuration of static binding address.
Syntax
show ip dhcp server manual-binding
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
234
Example
Display the configured static binding address:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show ip dhcp server manual-binding
25.25 show ip dhcp server binding
Description
The show ip dhcp server binding command is used to display the binding
entries.
Syntax
show ip dhcp server binding [ ip
ip-address
]
Parameter
ip-address
—— Specify the binding IP address.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the address binding entries:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show ip dhcp server binding
25.26 clear ip dhcp server statistics
Description
The clear ip dhcp server statistics command is used to clear the statistics
information of DHCP packets.
Syntax
clear ip dhcp server statistics
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
235
Example
Clear the packet statistics:
T1600G-28TS(config)# clear ip dhcp server statistics
25.27 clear ip dhcp server binding
Description
The clear ip dhcp server binding command is used to clear the binding
information.
Syntax
clear ip dhcp server binding [
ip-address
]
Parameter
ip-address
—— Specify the binding IP address.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Clear all the binding addresses:
T1600G-28TS(config)# clear ip dhcp server binding
236
Chapter 26 DHCP Relay Commands
A DHCP Relay agent is a Layer 3 device that forwards DHCP packets between clients and
servers. DHCP Relay forward requests and replies between clients and servers when they are
not on the same physical subnet.
26.1 service dhcp relay
Description
The service dhcp relay command is used to enable DHCP Relay function
globally. To disable DHCP Relay function, please use no service dhcp relay
command.
Syntax
service dhcp relay
no service dhcp relay
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable DHCP Relay function globally:
T1600G-28TS(config)# service dhcp relay
26.2 ip dhcp relay hops
Description
The ip dhcp relay hops command is used to specify the maximum hops
(DHCP Relay agent) that the DHCP packets can be relayed. To restore the
default value, please use no service dhcp relay hops command.
Syntax
ip dhcp relay hops
hops
no ip dhcp relay hops
237
Parameter
hops
——Specify the maximum hops (DHCP Relay agent) that the DHCP
packets can be relayed. If a packet’s hop count is more than the value you set
here, the packet will be dropped. The valid value ranges from the 1 to 16, and
the default value is 4.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the maximum number of relay hops as 6:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp relay hops 6
26.3 ip dhcp relay time
Description
The ip dhcp relay time command is used to specify the DHCP relay time
threshold. DHCP relay time is the time elapsed since client began address
acquisition or renewal process. When the elapsed time of the DHCP packet is
greater than the value set here, the DHCP packet will be dropped by the
switch. To restore the default value, please use no service dhcp relay time
command.
Syntax
ip dhcp relay time
time
no ip dhcp relay time
Parameter
time
——Specify the DHCP relay time threshold. The valid value ranges from
1 to 65535. The default value is 0, which means the switch will not examine
this field of the DHCP packets.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
238
Example
Configure the DHCP Relay time as 30 seconds:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp relay time 30
26.4 ip helper-address
Description
The ip helper-address command is used to add DHCP Server address to the
Layer 3 interface. To delete the server address, please use no ip
helper-address command.
Syntax
ip helper-address
ip-address
no ip helper-address [
ip-address
]
Parameter
ip-address
—— DHCP Server address.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Add DHCP Server address 192.168.2.1 to interface VLAN 1:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface vlan 1
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# ip helper-address 192.168.2.1
26.5 ip dhcp relay information
Description
The ip dhcp relay information command is used to enable option 82 support
in DHCP Relay. To disable this function, please use no ip dhcp relay
information command.
Syntax
ip dhcp relay information
no ip dhcp relay information
239
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet/interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable option 82 support in DHCP Relay for port 2:
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# ip dhcp relay information
26.6 ip dhcp relay information strategy
Description
The ip dhcp relay information strategy command is used to specify the
operation for the Option 82 field of the DHCP request packets from the Host.
To restore to the default option, please use no ip dhcp relay information
strategy command.
Syntax
ip dhcp relay information strategy { drop | keep | replace }
no ip dhcp relay information strategy
Parameter
drop | keep | replace ——The operations for Option 82 field of the DHCP
request packets from the Host. The default operation is keep.
drop: Discard the packet with the Option 82 field.
keep: Keep the Option 82 field in the packet.
replace: Replace the option 82 field with the system option defined by the
switch.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
240
Example
Specify the option 82 strategy as replace to replace the Option 82 field with
the local parameter on receiving the DHCP request packet for port 2:
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# ip dhcp relay information strategy replace
26.7 ip dhcp relay information format
Description
The ip dhcp relay information format command is used to select the format
of option 82 sub-option value field. To restore to the default option, please
use no ip dhcp relay information format command.
Syntax
ip dhcp relay information format { normal | private }
no ip dhcp relay information format
Parameter
normal | private —— The format type of option 82 sub-option value field.
normal: Indicates that the format of sub-option value field is TLV
(type-length-value).
private: Indicates that the format of sub-option value field is the value you
configure for the related sub-option.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Select the format of option 82 sub-option value field as TLV
(type-length-value) for port 2:
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T1600G-28TS(config-if)#ip dhcp relay information format normal
241
26.8 ip dhcp relay information circuit-id
Description
The ip dhcp relay information circuit-id command is used to specify the
custom circuit ID when option 82 customization is enabled. To clear the
circuit ID, please use no ip dhcp relay information circuit-id command.
Syntax
ip dhcp relay information circuit-id
circuitID
no ip dhcp relay information circuit-id
Parameter
circuitID
—— Specify the circuit ID, ranging from 1 to 64 characters.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify the circuit ID as “TP-Link” for port 2:
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# ip dhcp relay information circuit-id TP-Link
26.9 ip dhcp relay information remote-id
Description
The ip dhcp relay information remote-id command is used to specify the
custom remote ID when option 82 customization is enabled. To clear the
remote ID, please use no ip dhcp relay information remote-id command.
Syntax
ip dhcp relay information remote-id
remoteID
no ip dhcp relay information remote-id
Parameter
remoteID
—— Specify the remote ID, ranging from 1 to 64 characters.
242
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify the remote ID as “TP-Link” for port 2:
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# ip dhcp relay information remote-id TP-Link
26.10 ip dhcp relay default-interface
Description
The ip dhcp relay default-interface command is used to configure default
relay agent interface. When the switch works at DHCP VLAN Relay mode and
there is no IP interface in the VLAN, the switch uses the IP of default relay
agent interface to fill in the relay agent IP address field of DHCP packets. To
delete the default relay agent interface use no ip dhcp relay
default-interface.
Syntax
ip dhcp relay default-interface
no ip dhcp relay default-interface
Command mode
Interface Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure interface VLAN 1 as the default relay agent interface：
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface vlan 1
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# ip dhcp relay default-interface
243
26.11 ip dhcp relay vlan
Description
The ip dhcp relay vlan command is used to add DHCP server address to
specified VLAN. If there is an IP interface in the VLAN and it has configured a
DHCP server address at the interface level, then the configuration at the
interface level has higher priority. In this case, the DHCP server configured on
the VLAN will not be used to forward the DHCP packets. To delete the DHCP
server address use no ip dhcp relay vlan.
Syntax
ip dhcp relay vlan
vid
helper-address
ip-address
no ip dhcp relay vlan
vid
helper-address
[ ip-address ]
Parameter
vid
—— VLAN ID.
ip-address
—— DHCP Server address.
Command mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Add DHCP server address 192.168.2.1 to VLAN 1：
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp relay vlan 1 helper-address 192.168.2.1
26.12 show ip dhcp relay
Description
The show ip dhcp relay command is used to display the global status and
Option 82 configuration of DHCP Relay.
Syntax
show ip dhcp relay
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
244
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the configuration of DHCP Relay:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show ip dhcp relay
245
Chapter 27 DHCP L2 Relay Commands
27.1 ip dhcp l2relay
Description
The ip dhcp l2relay command is used to enable DHCP L2 Relay function
globally. To disable DHCP L2 Relay function, please use no ip dhcp l2relay
command.
Syntax
ip dhcp l2relay
no ip dhcp l2relay
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable DHCP L2 Relay function globally:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp l2relay
27.2 ip dhcp l2relay vlan
Description
The ip dhcp l2relay vlan command is used to enable DHCP L2 relay in the
specified VLAN. To disable DHCP L2 Relay in the specific vlan, please use no
ip dhcp l2relay vlan command.
Syntax
ip dhcp l2relay vlan
vlan-range
no ip dhcp l2relay vlan
vlan-range
Parameter
vlan-range
—— Specify the vlan to be enabled with DHCP L2 relay.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
246
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable DHCP L2 Relay for VLAN 2:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp l2relay vlan 2
27.3 ip dhcp l2relay information
Description
The ip dhcp l2relay information command is used to enable option 82
support in DHCP Relay. To disable this function, please use no ip dhcp
l2relay information command.
Syntax
ip dhcp l2relay information
no ip dhcp l2relay information
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable option 82 support in DHCP Relay for port 2:
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# ip dhcp l2relay information
27.4 ip dhcp l2relay information strategy
Description
The ip dhcp l2relay information strategy command is used to specify the
operation for the Option 82 field of the DHCP request packets from the Host.
To restore to the default option, please use no ip dhcp l2relay information
strategy command.
247
Syntax
ip dhcp l2relay information strategy { drop | keep | replace }
no ip dhcp l2relay information strategy
Parameter
drop | keep | replace —— The operations for Option 82 field of the DHCP
request packets from the Host. The default operation is keep.
drop: Discard the packet with the Option 82 field.
keep: Keep the Option 82 field in the packet.
replace: Replace the option 82 field with the system option defined by the
switch.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify the option 82 strategy as replace to replace the Option 82 field with
the local parameter on receiving the DHCP request packet for port 2:
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# ip dhcp l2relay information strategy replace
27.5 ip dhcp l2relay information format
Description
The ip dhcp l2relay information format command is used to select the
format of option 82 sub-option value field. To restore to the default option,
please use no ip dhcp l2relay information format command.
Syntax
ip dhcp l2relay information format { normal | private }
no ip dhcp l2relay information format
Parameter
normal | private —— The format type of option 82 sub-option value field.
248
normal: Indicates that the format of sub-option value field is TLV
(type-length-value).
private: Indicates that the format of sub-option value field is the value you
configure for the related sub-option.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Select the format of option 82 sub-option value field as TLV
(type-length-value) for port 2:
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T1600G-28TS(config-if)#ip dhcp l2relay information format normal
27.6 ip dhcp l2relay information circuit-id
Description
The ip dhcp l2relay information circuit-id command is used to specify the
custom circuit ID when option 82 customization is enabled. To clear the
circuit ID, please use no ip dhcp l2relay information circuit-id command.
Syntax
ip dhcp l2relay information circuit-id
circuitID
no ip dhcp l2relay information circuit-id
Parameter
circuitID
—— Specify the circuit ID, ranging from 1 to 64 characters.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
249
Example
Specify the circuit ID as “TP-Link” for port 2:
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# ip dhcp l2relay information circuit-id TP-Link
27.7 ip dhcp l2relay information remote-id
Description
The ip dhcp l2relay information remote-id command is used to specify the
custom remote ID when option 82 customization is enabled. To clear the
remote ID, please use no ip dhcp l2relay information remote-id command.
Syntax
ip dhcp l2relay information remote-id
remoteID
no ip dhcp l2relay information remote-id
Parameter
remoteID
—— Specify the remote ID, ranging from 1 to 64 characters.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify the remote ID as “TP-Link” for port 2:
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# ip dhcp l2relay information remote-id TP-Link
27.8 show ip dhcp l2relay
Description
The show ip dhcp l2relay command is used to display the global status and
Option 82 configuration of DHCP Relay.
Syntax
show ip dhcp l2relay
250
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the configuration of DHCP Relay:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show ip dhcp l2relay
27.9 show ip dhcp l2relay interface
Description
The show ip dhcp l2relay interface command is used to display the DHCP
L2 Relay status for the ports.
Syntax
show ip dhcp l2relay interface [ gigabitEthernet
port
| port-channel
port-channel-id
]
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the configuration of DHCP L2 Relay:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show ip dhcp l2relay interface
251
Chapter 28 QoS Commands
QoS (Quality of Service) function is used to optimize the network performance. It provides you
with network service experience of a better quality. The switch implements three priority
modes based on port, on 802.1p and on DSCP.
28.1 qos trust mode
Description
The qos trust mode command is used to configure the trust mode of CoS
(Class of Service) function for the ports. The default trust mode is trust port
priority.
Syntax
qos trust mode { dot1p | dscp | untrust }
Parameter
dot1p—— Trust 802.1p mode. In this mode, data will be classified into
different services based on the 802.1p priority.
dscp—— Trust dscp mode. In this mode, data will be classified into different
services based on the dscp priority.
untrust—— Trust port mode. In this mode, data will be classified into different
services based on the based on the port priority.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Set the trust mode of port 1/0/3 as dscp:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# qos trust mode dscp
252
28.2 qos port-priority
Description
The qos port-priority command is used to configure the port to 802.1p
priority mapping for the desired port. To return to the default configuration,
please use no qos port-priority command. When Port Priority is enabled, the
packets will be mapped to different priority queues based on the ingress
ports.
Syntax
qos port-priority {
dot1p-priority
}
no qos port-priority
Parameter
dot1p-priority
—— The 802.1p priority that the packets will be mapped to
from the desired port. It ranges from 0 to 7, which represent 802.1p priority
0-7 respectively. By default, the priority is 0.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the priority of port 5 as 3:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# qos port-priority 3
28.3 qos cos-map
Description
The qos cos-map command is used to configure 802.1p to queue mapping
globally. To return to the default configuration, please use no qos cos-map
command. When 802.1P Priority is enabled, the packets with 802.1Q tag are
mapped to different priority levels based on 802.1P priority.
253
Syntax
qos cos-map {
dot1p-priority
} {
tc-queue
}
no qos cos-map
Parameter
dot1p-priority
—— The value of 802.1p priority. It ranges from 0 to 7, which
represent 802.1p priority 0-7 respectively.
tc-queue
—— The number of TC queue that the 80.1p priority will be mapped
to. It ranges from 0 to 7.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Map the 802.1p priority 5 to TC-2:
T1600G-28TS (config)# qos cos-map 5 2
28.4 qos dot1p-remap
Description
The qos dot1p-remap command is used to configure the 802.1p to 802.1p
mappings. To return to the default configuration, please use no qos
dot1p-remap command. When 802.1p remap is configured, the packets with
the specific 802.1p priority will tagged with the desired new 802.1p priority.
Syntax
qos dot1p-remap {
dot1p-priority
} {
new-dot1p-priority
}
no qos dot1p-remap
Parameter
dot1p-priority
—— The original 802.1p priority. It ranges from 0 to 7, which
represent 802.1p priority 0-7 respectively.
new-dot1p-priority
—— The new 802.1p priority. It ranges from 0 to 7.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
254
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Remap 802.1p priority 5 to 802.1p priority 6:
T1600G-28TS(config)#qos dot1p-remap 5 6
28.5 qos dscp-map
Description
The qos dscp-map command is used to configure the DSCP to 802.1p
mapping. To return to the default configuration, please use no qos dscp-map
command. DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) is a new definition to IP ToS field given
by IEEE. This field is used to divide IP datagram into 64 priorities. When DSCP
Priority is enabled, IP datagram are mapped to different priority levels based
on DSCP priority.
Syntax
qos dscp-map {
dscp-value-list
} {
dot1p-priority
}
no qos dscp-map
Parameter
dscp-value-list
—— The DSCP value list in the format of “1-3,5,7”. The valid
values are from 0 to 63.
dot1p-priority
——The 802.1p priority to which the DSCP priority will be
mapped. It ranges from 0 to 7, which represent 802.1p priority 0-7
respectively. By default, the priority is 0.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
255
Example
Map DSCP Priority 5 to 802.1p priority 2:
T1600G-28TS(config)#qos dscp-map 5 2
28.6 qos dscp-remap
Description
The qos dscp-remap command is used to configure the DSCP to DSCP
mappings. To return to the default configuration, please use no qos
dscp-remap command. When DSCP remap is configured, the packets with
the specific DSCP priority will be changed to the desired new DSCP priority.
Syntax
qos queue dscp-map {
dscp-value-list
} {
dscp-remap-value
}
no qos queue dscp-map
Parameter
Dscp-value-list
——The original DSCP value list in the format of “1-3,5,7”. The
valid values are from 0 to 63.
Dscp-remap-value
—— The new DSCP value, which ranges from 0 to 63.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Map DSCP values 10-12 to DSCP value 2:
T1600G-28TS(config)# qos dscp-remap 10-12 2
28.7 qos queue mode
Description
The qos queue mode command is used to configure the Scheduler Mode.
When the network is congested, the program that many packets complete for
resources must be solved, usually in the way of queue scheduling. The switch
will control the forwarding sequence of the packets according to the priority
256
queues and scheduling algorithms you set. On this switch, the priority levels
are labeled as TC0, TC1, TC2 … TC7.
Syntax
qos queue {
tc-queue
} mode { sp | wrr } [ weight
weight
]
Parameter
tc-queue
—— The egress queue ID. It ranges from 0 to 7, which represents
TC queue from TC0 to TC7 respectively.
sp —— Strict-Priority Mode. In this mode, the queue with higher priority will
occupy the whole bandwidth. Packets in the queue with lower priority are sent
only when the queue with higher priority is empty.
wrr
—— Weight Round Robin Mode. In this mode, packets in all the queues
are sent in order based on the weight value for each queue. If you select this
mode, you need to specify the queue weight at the same time.
weight
—— Configure the weight value of the specified TC queue. When the
scheduler mode is specified as WRR, the weight value ranges from 1 to 127.
The 8 queues will take up the bandwidth according to their ratio.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify the Scheduler Mode of TC1 as WRR and set the queue weight as 10
for port 1/0/1:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# qos queue 1 mode wrr weight 10
28.8 show qos cos-map
Description
The show qos cos-msp command is used to display the 802.1p priority to TC
queue mappings.
Syntax
show qos cos-map
257
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the 802.1p to queue mappings:
T1600G-28TS# show qos cos-map
28.9 show qos dot1p-remap
Description
The show qos dot1p-remap interface command is used to display the
802.1p priority to 802.1p priority mappings.
Syntax
show qos dot1p-remap
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the IEEE 802.1P remap configuration:
T1600G-28TS# show qos dot1p-remap
28.10 show qos dscp-map
Description
The show qos dscp-map interface command is used to display the DSCP
priority configuration.
Syntax
show qos dscp-map
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
258
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the DSCP priority configuration:
T1600G-28TS# show qos dscp-map
28.11 show qos dscp-remap
Description
The show qos dscp-remap interface command is used to display the DSCP
priority to DSCP priority mappingss.
Syntax
show qos dscp-remap
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the DSCP to DSCP mappings:
T1600G-28TS# show qos dscp-remap
28.12 show qos port-priority interface
Description
The show qos port-priority interface command is used to display the port to
802.1p priority mappings for the ports.
Syntax
show qos port-priority interface [fastEthernet
port
| gigabitEthernet
port
|
ten-gigabitEthernet
port
| port-channel
port-channel-id
]
Parameter
port
—— The port number.
port-channel-id
—— The ID of the port channel.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
259
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the port to 802.1p priority mappings for all the ports:
T1600G-28TS# show qos port-priority interface
28.13 show qos trust interface
Description
The show qos trust interface command is used to display the trust mode of
the ports.
Syntax
show qos trust interface [fastEthernet
port
| gigabitEthernet
port
|
ten-gigabitEthernet
port
| port-channel
port-channel-id
]
Parameter
port
—— The port number.
port-channel-id
—— The ID of the port channel.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the trust mode of all the ports:
T1600G-28TS# show qos trust interface
28.14 show qos queue interface
Description
The show qos queue interface command is used to display the scheduler
settings of the ports.
Syntax
show qos queue interface [fastEthernet
port
| gigabitEthernet
port
|
ten-gigabitEthernet
port
| port-channel
port-channel-id
]
260
Parameter
port
—— The port number.
port-channel-id
—— The ID of the port channel.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the scheduler settings of all the ports:
T1600G-28TS# show qos queue interface
261
Chapter 29 Bandwidth Control Commands
Bandwidth Control functions to control the traffic rate and traffic threshold on each port to
ensure network performance. Rate limit functions to limit the ingress/egress traffic rate on
each port. Storm Control function allows the switch to monitor broadcast packets, multicast
packets and Unknown unicast frames in the network.
29.1 storm-control rate-mode
Description
The storm-control rate-mode command is used to configure the storm
control mode of the interface. To return to the default configuration, please
use no storm-control rate-mode command.
Syntax
storm-control rate-mode { kbps | ratio }
no storm-control rate-mode
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
User Guidelines
This command should be used along with the storm-control command to
enable the storm control function and specify the detailed parameters.
Example
Set the storm control mode as kbps on port 1/0/5:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# storm-control rate-mode kbps
29.2 storm-control
Description
The storm-control command is used to enable the broadcast, multicast, or
unknown unicast strom control function and to set threshold levels on an
262
interface. To return to the default configuration, please use no storm-control
command.
Syntax
storm-control { broadcast | multicast | unicast } {
rate
}
no storm-control { broadcast | multicast | unicast }
Parameter
broadcast | multicast | unicast —— Select the mode of the storm control on
the interface.
rate
—— Specify the bandwidth for receiving packets on the port. The
specified type of packet traffic exceeding the bandwidth will be processed
according to the configuration of storm-control exceed command. For kbps,
the rate ranges from 1 to 1000000 kbps. For ratio, the rate ranges from 1 to
100 percent.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
User Guidelines
Before you configure the storm-control type as kbps or ratio, pelease ensure
that the port is not in pps mode.
Example
Configure the broadcast storm control rate as 1024 kbps on port 1/0/5:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# storm-control rate-mode kbps
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# storm-control broadcast 1024
29.3 storm-control exceed
Description
The storm-control exceed command is used to configure the action that the
switch will perform when the storm exceeds the defined limit on an interface.
Syntax
storm-control exceed { drop | shutdown } [ revocer-time
time
]
263
Parameter
drop —— Set the Action as Drop. The port will drop the subsequent packets
when the traffic exceeds the limit.
shutdown —— Set the Action as Shutdown. The port will be shutdown when
the traffic exceeds the limit.
time
——Specify the recover time for the port. It takes effect only when the
action is set as shutdown. The valid values are from 0 to 3600 and the default
value is 0. When the port is shutdown, it can recover to its normal state after
the recover time passed. If the recover time is specified as 0, which means
the port will not recover to its normal state automatically and you can recover
the port manually using storm-control recover command.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the action as drop on port 1/0/5:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# storm-control exceed drop
29.4 storm-control recover
Description
The storm-control recover command is used to recover the port manually
after the port is shutdown because of the storm. When the recover time is
specified as 0, the port will not recover to its normal state automatically. In
this condition, you need to use this command to recover the port manually.
Syntax
storm-control recover
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
264
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Recover port 1/0/5 manually:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# storm-control recover
29.5 bandwidth
Description
The bandwidth command is used to configure the bandwidth limit for an
Ethernet port. To disable the bandwidth limit, please use no bandwidth
command.
Syntax
bandwidth {[ ingress
ingress-rate
] [ egress
egress-rate
]}
no bandwidth { all | ingress | egress }
Parameter
ingress-rate
—— Specify the bandwidth for receiving packets. Range:
1-1000000Kbps for the gigaport.
egress-rate
—— Specify the bandwidth for sending packets. Range:
1-1000000Kbps for the gigaport.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the ingress-rate as 5120Kbps and egress-rate as 1024Kbps for
port 1/0/5:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# bandwidth ingress 5120 egress 1024
265
29.6 show storm-control
Description
The show storm-control command is used to display the storm-control
information of Ethernet ports.
Syntax
show storm-control interface [ fastEthernet
port
| gigabitEthernet
port-list
ten-gigabitEthernet
port
| port-channel
port-channel-id-list
]
Parameter
port-list
——The list of Ethernet ports.
port-channel-id-list
—— The list of port channels.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the storm-control information of port 4, 5, 6, and 7:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show storm-control interface gigabitEthernet
1/0/4-7
29.7 show bandwidth
Description
The show bandwidth command is used to display the bandwidth-limit
information of Ethernet ports.
Syntax
show bandwidth interface [ fastEthernet
port
| gigabitEthernet
port-list
ten-gigabitEthernet
port
| port-channel
port-channel-id-list
]
Parameter
port-list
——The list of Ethernet ports.
port-channel-id-list
—— The list of port channels.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
266
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the bandwidth-limit information of port 1/0/4:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show bandwidth interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/4
267
Chapter 30 Voice VLAN Commands
Voice VLANs are configured specially for voice data stream. By configuring Voice VLANs and
adding the ports with voice devices attached to voice VLANs, you can perform QoS-related
configuration for voice data, ensuring the transmission priority of voice data stream and voice
quality.
30.1 voice vlan
Description
The voice vlan command is used to enable Voice VLAN function. To disable
Voice VLAN function, please use no voice vlan command.
Syntax
voice vlan
vlan-id
no voice vlan
Parameter
vlan-id
—— Specify IEEE 802.1Q VLAN ID, ranging from 2 to 4094.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the Voice VLAN function for VLAN 10:
T1600G-28TS(config)# voice vlan 10
30.2 voice vlan (interface)
Description
The voice vlan command is used to enable Voice VLAN function on the
desired ports. To disable Voice VLAN function on ports, please use no voice
vlan command.
268
Syntax
voice vlan
no voice vlan
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the Voice VLAN function for port 1/0/1:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
T1600G-28TS(config-if)#voice vlan
30.3 voice vlan priority
Description
The voice vlan priority command is used to configure the priority for the
Voice VLAN. To restore to the default priority, please use no voice vlan
priority command.
Syntax
voice vlan priority
pri
no voice vlan priority
Parameter
pri
—— Priority, ranging from 0 to 7, and the default value is 7.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
269
Example
Configure the priority of the Voice VLAN as 5:
T1600G-28TS(config)# voice vlan priority 5
30.4 voice vlan oui
Description
The voice vlan oui command is used to create Voice VLAN OUI. To delete the
specified Voice VLAN OUI, please use no voice vlan oui command.
Syntax
voice vlan oui
oui-prefix
oui-desc
string
no voice vlan mac-address
oui-prefix
Parameter
oui-prefix
—— The OUI address of the voice device, in the format of
XX:XX:XX.
string
—— Give a description to the OUI for identification which contains 16
characters at most.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Create a Voice VLAN OUI described as TP-Phone with the OUI address
00:11:11:11:11:11 and the mask address FF:FF:FF:00:00:00:
T1600G-28TS(config)#voice vlan oui 00:11:11 oui-desc TP-Phone
30.5 show voice vlan
Description
The show voice vlan command is used to display the global configuration
information of Voice VLAN.
270
Syntax
show voice vlan
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Display the configuration information of Voice VLAN globally:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show voice vlan
30.6 show voice vlan oui-table
Description
The show voice vlan oui command is used to display the configuration
information of Voice VLAN OUI.
Syntax
show voice vlan oui
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Display the configuration information of Voice VLAN OUI:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show voice vlan oui-table
30.7 show voice vlan interface
Description
The show voice vlan interface command is used to display the Voice VLAN
configuration information of all ports.
271
Syntax
show voice vlan interface
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Display the Voice VLAN configuration information of all ports and port
channels:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show voice vlan interface
272
Chapter 31 Auto VoIP Commands
The Auto VoIP feature is used to prioritize the transmission of voice traffic. Voice over Internet
Protocol (VoIP) enables telephone calls over a data network, and the Auto VoIP feature helps
provide a classification mechanism for voice packets. When Auto VoIP is configured on a port
that receives both voice and data traffic, this feature can help ensure that the sound quality of
an IP phone does not deteriorate when data traffic on the port is heavy.
31.1 auto-voip
Description
The auto-voip command is used to enable the Auto VoIP function globally.
To disable the Auto VoIP function, use no auto-voip command.
Syntax
auto-voip
no auto-voip
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Example
Enable the Auto VoIP function globally:
T1600G-28TS(config)# auto-voip
31.2 auto-voip (interface)
Description
The auto-voip command is used to specify the interface mode as VLAN ID
for the ports. In this mode, the voice devices will send voice packets with
desired VLAN tag.
Syntax
auto-voip
vlan-id
Parameter
vlan-id
——Specify the Auto VoIP VLAN ID. The valid values are from 2 to
4094.
273
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Example
Set Auto VoIP VLAN 3 for port 3:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# auto-voip 3
31.3 auto-voip dot1p
Description
The auto-voip dot1p command is used to specify the interface mode as
dat1p for the ports. In this mode, the voice devices will send voice packets
with desired 802.1p priority.
Syntax
auto-voip dot1p
dot1p
Parameter
dot1p
——Set the 802.1p priority of Auto VoIP on specified ports. It ranges
from 0 to 7.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Example
Set the 802.1p priority as 5 for the port:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# auto-voip dot1p 5
274
31.4 auto-voip untagged
Description
The auto-voip untagged command is used to specify the interface mode as
untagged for the ports. In this mode, the voice devices will send untagged
voice packets.
Syntax
auto-voip untagged
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Example
Set the interface mode as untagged for port 1/0/3:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# auto-voip untagged
31.5 auto-voip none
Description
The auto-voip none command is used to specify the interface mode as none
for the ports. In this mode, the switch allows the voice devices to use its own
configuration to send voice traffic.
Syntax
auto-voip none
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Example
Instruct voice devices that are connected to port 3 to send the packets
according to its own configuration:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# auto-voip none
275
31.6 no auto-voip (interface)
Description
The no auto-voip command is used to specify the interface mode as
disabled for the ports, which means the Auto VoIP function is disabled on the
corresponding port.
Syntax
no auto-voip
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Example
Disable the Auto VoIP function on port 1/0/3:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# no auto-voip
31.7 auto-voip dscp
Description
The auto-voip dscp command is used to set the DSCP value of Auto VoIP on
specified ports.
Syntax
auto-voip dscp
value
Parameter
value
——Set the DSCP value of Auto VoIP on specified ports. It ranges from
0 to 63. By default, it is 0.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Example
Set DSCP value of Auto VoIP on port 3 as 33:
276
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# auto-voip dscp 33
31.8 auto-voip data priority
Description
The auto-voip data priority command is used to enable or disable the CoS
Override Mode on specified ports.
Syntax
auto-voip data priority { trust | untrust }
Parameter
trust——In this mode, the switch will then put the voice packets in the
corresponding TC queue according to the 802.1p priority of the packets.
untrust——In this mode, the switch will ignore the 802.1p priority in the voice
packets and put the packets in TC-5 directly.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Example
Set the CoS Override Mode as trust for port 1/0/3:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# auto-voip data priority trust
31.9 show auto-voip
Description
The show auto-voip command is used to display the Auto VoIP configuration
information.
Syntax
show auto-voip [ interface ]
277
Parameter
interface —— Displays the Auto VoIP configuration information of ports.
When no parameter is entered, displays the global Auto VoIP configuration
information.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and any Configuration Mode
Example
Displays the global Auto VoIP configuration information:
T1600G-28TS (config)# show auto-voip
278
Chapter 32 Access Control Commands
32.1 user access-control ip-based enable
Description
The user access-control ip-based enable command is used to configure the
access control mode IP-based. To disable the access control feature, please
use no user access-control command.
Syntax
user access-control ip-based enable
no user access-control
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the access control mode as IP-based:
T1600G-28TS(config)# user access-control ip-based enable
32.2 user access-control ip-based
Description
The user access-control ip-based command is used to limit the IP-range of
the users for login. Only the users within the IP-range you set here are
allowed to login. You can add up to 30 IP-based entries. To cancel the user
access limit, please use no user access-control ip-based command.
Syntax
user access-control ip-based {
ip-addr ip-mask
}
[ snmp ] [ telnet ] [ ssh ]
[ http ] [ https ] [ ping ] [ all ]
no user access-control ip-based index
id
279
Parameter
ip-addr
—— The source IP address. Only the users within the IP-range you
set here are allowed for login. 5 IP-based entries can be configured at most.
ip-mask
—— The subnet mask of the IP address.
[ snmp ] [ telnet ] [ ssh ] [ http ] [ https ] [ ping ] [ all ] —— Specify the access
interface. These interfaces are enabled by default.
id
—— Delete the specified IP-based entry.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable the access-control of the user whose IP address is 192.168.0.148:
T1600G-28TS(config)# user access-control ip-based 192.168.0.148
255.255.255.255
32.3 user access-control mac-based enable
Description
The user access-control mac-based enable command is used to configure
the access control mode MAC-based. To disable the access control feature,
please use no user access-control command.
Syntax
user access-control mac-based enable
no user access-control
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
280
Example
Configure the access control mode as MAC-based:
T1600G-28TS(config)# user access-control mac-based enable
32.4 user access-control mac-based
Description
The user access-control mac-based command is used to limit the MAC
address of the users for login. Only the user with this MAC address you set
here is allowed to login. You can add up to 30 mac-based control entries. To
delete the mac-based access control entry, please use no user
access-control mac-based command.
Syntax
user access-control mac-based {
mac-addr
}
[ snmp ] [ telnet ] [ ssh ] [ http ]
[ https ] [ ping ] [ all ]
no user access-control mac-based index
id
Parameter
mac-addr
—— The source MAC address. Only the user with this MAC
address is allowed to login.
[ snmp ] [ telnet ] [ ssh ] [ http ] [ https ] [ ping ] [ all ] —— Specify the access
interface. These interfaces are enabled by default.
id
—— Specify the ID of the mac-based entry to be deleted.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure that only the user whose MAC address is 00:00:13:0A:00:01 is
allowed to login:
T1600G-28TS(config)# user access-control mac-based 00:00:13:0A:00:01
281
32.5 user access-control port-based enable
Description
The user access-control port-based enable command is used to configure
the access control mode Port-based. To disable the access control feature,
please use no user access-control command.
Syntax
user access-control port-based enable
no user access-control
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the access control mode as Port-based:
T1600G-28TS(config)# user access-control port-based enable
32.6 user access-control port-based
Description
The user access-control port-based command is used to limit the ports for
login. Only the users connected to these ports you set here are allowed to
login. You can add up to 30 port-based control entries. To delete the
port-based access control entry, please use no user access-control
port-based command.
Syntax
user access-control port-based interface { gigabitEthernet
port-list
} [ snmp ]
[ telnet ] [ ssh ] [ http ] [ https ] [ ping ] [ all ]
no user access-control port-based index
id
Parameter
port-list
——The list group of Ethernet ports, in the format of 1/0/1-4. You can
appoint 5 ports at most.
282
[ snmp ] [ telnet ] [ ssh ] [ http ] [ https ] [ ping ] [ all ] —— Specify the access
interface. These interfaces are enabled by default.
id
—— Specify the ID of the port-based entry to be deleted.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure that only the users connected to ports 2-6 are allowed to login:
T1600G-28TS(config)# user access-control port-based interface
gigabitEthernet 1/0/2-6
283
Chapter 33 HTTP and HTTPS Commands
With the help of HTTP (HyperText Transfer Protocol) or HTTPS (Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
over Secure Socket Layer), you can manage the switch through a standard browser.
HTTP is the protocol to exchange or transfer hypertext.
SSL (Secure Sockets Layer), a security protocol, is to provide a secure connection for the
application layer protocol (e.g. HTTP) based on TCP. Adopting asymmetrical encryption
technology, SSL uses key pair to encrypt/decrypt information. A key pair refers to a public key
(contained in the certificate) and its corresponding private key. By default the switch has a
certificate (self-signed certificate) and a corresponding private key. The Certificate/Key
Download function enables the user to replace the default key pair.
33.1 ip http server
Description
The ip http server command is used to enable the HTTP server within the
switch. To disable the HTTP function, please use no ip http server command.
This function is enabled by default. The HTTP and HTTPS server function
cannot be disabled at the same time.
Syntax
ip http server
no ip http server
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Disable the HTTP function:
T1600G-28TS(config)# no ip http server
33.2 ip http port
Description
284
The ip http port command is used to configure the port number of the HTTP
server within the switch. To set the number to the default value, please use no
ip http port command.
Syntax
ip http port
port-num
no ip http port
Parameter
port-num
—— Enter the port number. This value ranges from 1 to 65535.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Set the port number of HTTP server as 1800:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip http port 1800
33.3 ip http max-users
Description
The ip http max-users command is used to configure the maximum number
of users that are allowed to connect to the HTTP server. To cancel this
limitation, please use no ip http max-users command.
Syntax
ip http max-users
admin-num operator-num poweruser-num user-num
no ip http max-users
Parameter
admin-num
—— The maximum number of the users logging on to the HTTP
server as Admin, ranging from 1 to 16. The total number of users should be
no more than 16.
operator-num
—— The maximum number of the users logging on to the
HTTP server as operator, ranging from 0 to 15. The total number of users
should be no more than 16.
285
poweruser-num
—— The maximum number of the users logging on to the
HTTP server as Power User, ranging from 0 to 15. The total number of users
should be no more than 16.
user-num
—— The maximum number of the users logging on to the HTTP
server as User, ranging from 0 to 15. The total number of users should be no
more than 16.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the maximum number of the Admin, Operator, Power User and
User as 5, 1, 1, 1 for HTTP:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip http max-users 5 1 1 1
33.4 ip http session timeout
Description
The ip http session timeout command is used to configure the connection
timeout of the HTTP server. To restore to the default timeout time, please use
no ip http session timeout command.
Syntax
ip http session timeout
time
no ip http session timeout
Parameter
time
——The timeout time, ranging from 5 to 30 in minutes. By default, the
value is 10.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
286
Configure the timeout time of the HTTP connection as 15 minutes:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip http session timeout 15
33.5 ip http secure-server
Description
The ip http secure-server command is used to enable the HTTPS server
within the switch. To disable the HTTPS function, please use no ip http
secure-server command. This function is enabled by default. The HTTP and
HTTPS server function cannot be disabled at the same time.
Syntax
ip http secure-server
no ip http secure-server
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Disable the HTTP function:
T1600G-28TS(config)# no ip http secure-server
33.6 ip http secure-port
Description
The ip http secure-port command is used to configure the port number of
the HTTPS server within the switch. To set the number to the default value,
please use no ip http secure-port command.
Syntax
ip http secure-port
port-num
no ip http secure-port
Parameter
port-num
—— Enter the port number. This value ranges from 1 to 65535.
287
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Set the port number of HTTPS server as 2800:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip http port 2800
33.7 ip http secure-protocol
Description
The ip http secure-protocol command is used to configure the SSL protocol
version. To restore to the default SSL version, please use no ip http
secure-protocol command. By default, the switch supports SSLv3 and
TLSv1.
Syntax
ip http secure-protocol
{ [ ssl3 ] [ tls1 ] }
no ip http session
Parameter
ssl3
—— The SSL 3.0 protocol.
tls1
—— The TLS 1.0 protocol
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the protocol of SSL connection as SSL 3.0:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip http secure-protocol ssl3
288
33.8 ip http secure-ciphersuite
Description
The ip http secure-ciphersuite command is used to configure the
cipherSuites over the SSL connection supported by the switch. To restore to
the default ciphersuite types, please use no ip http secure-ciphersuite
command.
Syntax
ip http secure-ciphersuite
{ [ 3des-ede-cbc-sha ] [ rc4-128-md5 ]
[ rc4-128-sha ] [ des-cbc-sha ] }
no ip http secure-ciphersuite
Parameter
[ 3des-ede-cbc-sha ] [ rc4-128-md5 ] [ rc4-128-sha ] [ des-cbc-sha ]
——
Specify the encryption algorithm and the digest algorithm to use on an SSL
connection. By default, the switch supports all these ciphersuites.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the ciphersuite to be used for encryption over the SSL connection
as 3des-ede-cbc-sha:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip http secure-ciphersuite 3des-ede-cbc-sha
33.9 ip http secure-max-users
Description
The ip http secure-max-users command is used to configure the maximum
number of users that are allowed to connect to the HTTPs server. To cancel
this limitation, please use no ip http secure-max-users command.
Syntax
289
ip http secure-max-users
admin-num operator-num poweruser-num
user-num
no ip secure-max-users
Parameter
admin-num
—— The maximum number of the users logging on to the HTTPs
server as Admin, ranging from 1 to 16. The total number of users should be
less than 16.
Operator-num
—— The maximum number of the users logging on to the
HTTPs server as operator, ranging from 0 to 15. The total number of users
should be less than 16.
poweruser-num
—— The maximum number of the users logging on to the
HTTP server as Power User, ranging from 0 to 15. The total number of users
should be less than 16.
user-num
—— The maximum number of the users logging on to the HTTP
server as User, ranging from 0 to 15. The total number of users should be less
than 16.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the maximum number of the Admin, Operator, Power User and
User as 5, 1, 1, 1 for HTTPs:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip http secure-max-users 5 1 1 1
33.10 ip http secure-session timeout
Description
The ip http secure-session timeout command is used to configure the
connection timeout of the HTTPS server. To restore to the default timeout
time, please use no ip http secure-session timeout command.
Syntax
ip http secure-session timeout
time
290
no ip http secure-session timeout
Parameter
time
—— The timeout time, ranging from 5 to 30 in minutes. By default, the
value is 10.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the timeout time of the HTTPs connection as 15 minutes:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip http secure-session timeout 15
33.11 ip http secure-server download certificate
Description
The ip http secure-server download certificate command is used to
download a certificate to the switch from TFTP server.
Syntax
ip http secure-server download certificate
ssl-cert
ip-address
ip-addr
Parameter
ssl-cert
—— The name of the SSL certificate which is selected to download
to the switch. The length of the name ranges from 1 to 25 characters. The
Certificate must be BASE64 encoded.
ip-addr
—— The IP address of the TFTP server. Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses
are supported, for example 192.168.0.1 or fe80::1234.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
291
Download an SSL Certificate named ssl-cert from TFTP server with the IP
address of 192.168.0.146:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip http secure-server download certificate ssl-cert
ip-address 192.168.0.146
Download an SSL Certificate named ssl-cert from TFTP server with the IP
address of fe80::1234
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip http secure-server download certificate ssl-cert
ip-address fe80::1234
33.12 ip http secure-server download key
Description
The ip http secure-server download key command is used to download an
SSL key to the switch from TFTP server.
Syntax
ip http secure-server download key
ssl-key
ip-address
ip-addr
Parameter
ssl-key
—— The name of the SSL key which is selected to download to the
switch. The length of the name ranges from 1 to 25 characters. The Key must
be BASE64 encoded.
ip-addr
—— The IP address of the TFTP server. Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses
are supported, for example 192.168.0.1 or fe80::1234.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Download an SSL key named ssl-key from TFTP server with the IP address of
192.168.0.146:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip http secure-server download key ssl-key
ip-address 192.168.0.146
292
Download an SSL key named ssl-key from TFTP server with the IP address of
fe80::1234
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip http secure-server download key ssl-key
ip-address fe80::1234
33.13 show ip http configuration
Description
The show ip http configuration command is used to display the
configuration information of the HTTP server, including status, session
timeout, access-control, max-user number and the idle-timeout, etc.
Syntax
show ip http configuration
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the configuration information of the HTTP server:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show ip http configuration
33.14 show ip http secure-server
Description
The show ip http secure-server command is used to display the global
configuration of SSL.
Syntax
show ip http secure-server
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
293
Example
Display the global configuration of SSL:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show ip http secure-server
294
Chapter 34 SSH Commands
SSH (Security Shell) can provide the unsecured remote management with security and
powerful authentication to ensure the security of the management information.
34.1 ip ssh server
Description
The ip ssh server command is used to enable SSH function. To disable the
SSH function, please use no ip ssh server command.
Syntax
ip ssh server
no ip ssh server
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the SSH function:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip ssh server
34.2 ip ssh port
Description
The ip ssh port command is used to configure the port for SSH service. To
set the value to the default, please use no ip ssh port command.
Syntax
ip ssh port
port
no ip ssh port
295
Parameter
port
—— Set the port number. It ranges from 1 to 65535. The default value is
22.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the SSH port number as 22:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip ssh port 22
34.3 ip ssh version
Description
The ip ssh version command is used to enable the SSH protocol version. To
disable the protocol version, please use no ip ssh version command.
Syntax
ip ssh version { v1 | v2 }
no ip ssh version { v1 | v2 }
Parameter
v1 | v2
—— The SSH protocol version to be enabled. They
represent SSH v1 and SSH v2 respectively.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable SSH v2:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip ssh version v2
296
34.4 ip ssh algorithm
Description
The ip ssh algorithm command is used to configure the algorithm in SSH
function. To disable the specified algorithm, please use no ip ssh algorithm
command.
Syntax
ip ssh algorithm { AES128-CBC | AES192-CBC | AES256-CBC | Blowfish-CBC
| Cast128-CBC | 3DES-CBC | HMAC-SHA1 | HMAC-MD5 }
no ip ssh algorithm
Parameter
AES128-CBC | AES192-CBC | AES256-CBC | Blowfish-CBC |
Cast128-CBC | 3DES-CBC | HMAC-SHA1 | HMAC-MD5
——
Specify the SSH algorithm.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify the SSH algorithm as AES128-CBC:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip ssh algorithm AES128-CBC
34.5 ip ssh timeout
Description
The ip ssh timeout command is used to specify the idle-timeout time of SSH.
To restore to the factory defaults, please use ip ssh timeout command.
Syntax
ip ssh timeout
value
no ip ssh timeout
Parameter
value
—— The Idle-timeout time. During this period, the system
will automatically release the connection if there is no
297
operation from the client. It ranges from 1 to 120 in seconds.
By default, this value is 120 seconds.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify the idle-timeout time of SSH as 30 seconds:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip ssh timeout 30
34.6 ip ssh max-client
Description
The ip ssh max-client command is used to specify the maximum number of
the connections to the SSH server. To return to the default configuration,
please use no ip ssh max-client command.
Syntax
ip ssh max-client
num
no ip ssh max-client
Parameter
num
—— The maximum number of the connections to the SSH server. It
ranges from 1 to 5. By default, this value is 5.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify the maximum number of the connections to the SSH server as 3:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip ssh max-client 3
298
34.7 ip ssh download
Description
The ip ssh download command is used to download the SSH key file from
TFTP server.
Syntax
ip ssh download { v1 | v2 }
key-file
ip-address
ip-addr
Parameter
v1 | v2 —— Select the type of SSH key to download, v1 represents SSH-1,
v2 represents SSH-2.
key-file
—— The name of the key-file which is selected to download. The
length of the name ranges from 1 to 25 characters. The key length of the
downloaded file must be in the range of 512 to 3072 bits.
ip-addr
—— The IP address of the TFTP server. Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses
are supported, for example 192.168.0.1 or fe80::1234.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Download an SSH-1 type key file named ssh-key from TFTP server with the IP
address 192.168.0.148:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip ssh download v1 ssh-key ip-address
192.168.0.148
Download an SSH-1 type key file named ssh-key from TFTP server with the IP
address fe80::1234:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip ssh download v1 ssh-key ip-address fe80::1234
34.8 remove public-key
Description
The remove public-key command is used to remove the SSH public key from
the switch.
299
Syntax
remove public-key { v1 | v2 }
Parameter
v1 | v2
—— Select the type of SSH public key, v1 represents SSH-1, v2
represents SSH-2.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Remove the SSH-1 type public key from the switch:
T1600G-28TS# remove public-key v1
34.9 show ip ssh
Description
The show ip ssh command is used to display the global configuration of SSH.
Syntax
show ip ssh
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the global configuration of SSH:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show ip ssh
300
Chapter 35 Telnet Commands
35.1 telnet enable
Description
The telnet enable command is used to enable the Telnet function. To disable
the Telnet function, please use the telnet disable command. This function is
enabled by default.
Syntax
telnet enable
telnet disable
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Disable the Telnet function:
T1600G-28TS(config)# telnet disable
35.2 telnet port
Description
The telnet port command is used to configure the telent port number. To
restore the setting, please use the no telnet port command.
Syntax
telnet port
port
no telnet port
Parameter
port
——The number of telnet port.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
301
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the telnet port number as 566:
T1600G-28TS(config)# telnet port 566
35.3 show telnet-status
Description
The show telnet-status command is used to display the configuration
information of the Telnet function.
Syntax
show telnet-status
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display whether the Telnet function is enabled:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show telnet-status
302
Chapter 36 AAA Commands
AAA stands for authentication, authorization and accounting. This feature is used to
authenticate users trying to log in to the switch or trying to access the administrative level
privilege.
Applicable Access Application
The authentication can be applied on the following access applications: Telnet, SSH and HTTP.
Authentication Method List
A method list describes the authentication methods and their sequence to authenticate a user.
The switch supports Login List for users to gain access to the switch, and Enable List for
normal users to gain administrative privileges.
RADIUS/TACACS+ Server
User can configure the RADIUS/TACACS+ servers for the connection between the switch and
the server.
Server Group
User can define the authentication server group with up to several servers running the same
secure protocols, either RADIUS or TACACS+. Users can set these servers in a preferable
order, which is called the server group list. When a user tries to access the switch, the switch
will ask the first server in the server group list for authentication. If no response is received, the
second server will be queried, and so on.
36.1 tacacas-server host
Description
The tacacs-server host command is used to configure a new TACACS+
server. To delete the specified TACACS+ server, please use no
tacacs-server host command.
Syntax
tacacs-server host
ip-address
[ port
port-id
]
[ timeout
time
] [ key { [ 0 ]
string
| 7
encryped-string
} ]
no tacacs-server host
ip-address
Parameter
ip-address
—— Specify the IP address of the TACACS+ server.
port-id
—— Specify the server’s port number for AAA. By default it is 49.
303
time
—— Specify the time in seconds the switch waits for the server’s
response before it times out. The time ranges from 1 to 9 seconds. The
default is 5 seconds.
[ 0 ]
string
| 7
encrypted-string
—— 0 and 7 are the encryption type. 0
indicates that an unencrypted key will follow. 7 indicates that a symmetric
encrypted key with a fixed length will follow. By default, the encryption type is
0. “
string
”
is
the shared key for the switch and the authentication servers to
exchange messages which contains 32 characters at most. The question
marks and spaces are not allowed. “
encrypted-string
” is a symmetric
encrypted key with a fixed length, which you can copy from another switch’s
configuration file. The key or encrypted-key you configured here will be
displayed in the encrypted form. Always configure the key as the last item of
this command.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
User Guidelines
The TACACS+ servers you configured are added in the server group “tacacs”
by default.
Example
Configure a TACACS+ server with the IP address as 1.1.1.1, TCP port as 1500,
timeout as 6 seconds, and the unencrypted key string as 12345.
T1600G-28TS(config)# tacacs-server host 1.1.1.1 port 1500 timeout 6 key
12345
36.2 show tacacs-server
Description
This show tacacs-server command is used to display the summary
information of the TACACS+ servers.
Syntax
show tacacs-server
304
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Display the information of all the TACACS+ servers:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show tacacs-server
36.3 radius-server host
Description
The radius-server host command is used to configure a new RADIUS server.
To delete the specified RADIUS server, please use no radius-server host
command.
Syntax
radius-server host
ip-address
[ auth-port
port-id
] [ acct-port
port-id
]
[ timeout
time
] [ retransmit
number
] [ nas-id
nas-id
] [ key { [ 0 ]
string
| 7
encrypted-string
} ]
no radius-server host
ip-address
Parameter
ip-address
—— Specify the IP address of the RADIUS server.
auth-port
port-id
—— Specify the UDP destination port for authentication
requests. By default it is 1812.
acct-port
port-id
—— Specify the UDP destination port for accouting
requests. By deault it is 1813.
time
—— Specify the time in seconds the switch waits for the server’s
response before it times out. The time ranges from 1 to 9 seconds. The
default is 5 seconds.
number
—— Specify the number of times a RADIUS request is resent to a
server if the server is not responding in time. By default it is 2 times.
nas-id
——Specify the name of the NAS (Network Access Server) to be
contained in RADIUS packets for identification. It ranges from 1 to 31
characters. The default value is the MAC address of the switch. Generally, the
NAS indicates the switch itself.
305
[ 0 ]
string
| 7
encrypted-string
—— 0 and 7 are the encryption type. 0
indicates that an unencrypted key will follow. 7 indicates that a symmetric
encrypted key with a fixed length will follow. By default, the encryption type is
0. “
string
”
is
the shared key for the switch and the authentication servers to
exchange messages which contains 32 characters at most. The question
marks and spaces are not allowed. “
encrypted-string
” is a symmetric
encrypted key with a fixed length, which you can copy from another switch’s
configuration file. The key or encrypted-key you configured here will be
displayed in the encrypted form. Always configure the key as the last item of
this command.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
User Guidelines
The RADIUS servers you configured are added in the server group “radius” by
default.
Example
Configure a RADIUS server with the IP address as 1.1.1.1, authentication port
as 1200, timeout as 6 seconds, retransmit times as 3, and the unencrypted
key string as 12345.
T1600G-28TS(config)# radius-server host 1.1.1.1 auth-port 1200 timeout
6 retransmit 3 key 12345
36.4 show radius-server
Description
This show radius-server command is used to display the summary
information of the RADIUS servers.
Syntax
show radius-server
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
306
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Display the information of all the RADIUS servers:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show radius-server
36.5 aaa group
Description
This aaa group command is used to create AAA server groups to group
existing TACACS+/RADIUS servers for authentication. This command puts
the switch in the server group subconfiguration mode.
To delete the corresponding AAA group, please use the no aaa group
command.
Syntax
aaa group { radius | tacacs }
group-name
no aaa group { radius | tacacs }
group-name
Parameter
radius | tacacs —— Specify the server group type as RADIUS or TACACS+.
group-name
—— Specify the server group name.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Create a RADIUS server group with the name radius1:
T1600G-28TS(config)# aaa group radius radius1
307
36.6 server
Description
This server command is used to add the existing server in the defined server
group. To remove the specified server from the server group, please use the
no server command.
Syntax
server
ip-address
no server
ip-address
Parameter
ip-address
—— Specify the server’s IP address.
Command Mode
Server Group Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Create the RADIUS server 1.1.1.1 to RADIUS server group “radius1”:
T1600G-28TS(config)# aaa group radius radius1
T1600G-28TS(aaa-group)# server 1.1.1.1
36.7 show aaa group
Description
This show aaa group command is used to display the summary information
of the AAA groups. All the servers in this group will be listed if you specify the
group name.
Syntax
show aaa group [
group-name
]
Parameter
group-name
—— Specify the server group name.
308
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Display the information of all the server groups:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show aaa group
36.8 aaa authentication login
Description
This aaa authentication login command is used to configure a login
authentication method list. A method list describes the authentication
methods and their sequence to authenticate a user. To delete the specified
authentication method list, please use the no aaa authentication login
command.
Syntax
aaa authentication login {
method-list
} {
method1
} [
method2
] [
method3
]
[
method4
]
no authentication login
method-list
Parameter
method-list
—— Specify the method list name.
method1, method2, method3, method4
—— Specify the authentication
methods in order. The next authentication method is tried only if the previous
method does not respond, not if it fails.
The preset methods include radius, tacacs, local and none. “radius” means
the RADIUS server group “radius”; “tacacs” means the RACACS+ server
group “tacacs”; “local” means local username database are used; “none”
means no authentication is used for login.
Users can aslo define new method with the aaa group command.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
309
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
User Guidelines
By default the login authentication method list is “default” with “local” as
method1.
Example
Configure a login authentication method list “list1” with the priority1 method
as radius and priority2 method as local:
T1600G-28TS(config)# aaa authenticaiton login list1 radius local
36.9 aaa authentication enable
Description
This aaa authentication enable command is used to configure a privilege
authentication method list. A method list describes the authentication
methods and their sequence to elevate a user’s privilege. To delete the
specified authentication method list, please use the no aaa authentication
enable command.
Syntax
aaa authentication enable {
method-list
} {
method1
} [
method2
] [
method3
]
[
method4
]
no authentication enable
method-list
Parameter
method-list
—— Specify the method list name.
method1, method2, method3, method4
—— Specify the authentication
methods in order. The next authentication method is tried only if the previous
method does not respond, not if it fails.
The preset methods include radius, tacacs, local and none. “radius” means
the RADIUS server group “radius”; “tacacs” means the RACACS+ server
group “tacacs”; “local” means local username database are used; “none”
means no authentication is used for privilege elevation.
Users can aslo define new method with the aaa group command.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
310
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
User Guidelines
By default the enable authentication method is “default” with “none” as
method1.
Example
Configure a privilege authentication method list “list2” with the priority1
method as radius and priority2 method as local:
T1600G-28TS(config)# aaa authenticaiton enable list2 radius local
36.10 aaa authentication dot1x default
Description
This aaa authentication dot1x default command is used to configure an
802.1x authentication method list. A method list describes the authentication
methods for users’ login in 802.1x. To delete the default authentication
method list, please use the no aaa authentication dot1x default command.
Syntax
aaa authentication dot1x default {
method
}
no aaa authentication dot1x default
Parameter
method
—— Specify the method name. Only RADIUS server group is
supported, and the default method is server group “radius”.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the default 802.1x authentication method as “radius1”:
T1600G-28TS(config)# aaa authentication dot1x default radius1
311
36.11 aaa accounting dot1x default
Description
This aaa accounting dot1x default command is used to configure an 802.1x
accounting method list. To delete the default accounting method list, please
use the no aaa accounting dot1x default command.
Syntax
aaa accounting dot1x default {
method
}
no aaa accounting dot1x default
Parameter
method
—— Sp+ecify the method name. Only RADIUS server group is
supported, and the default method is server group “radius”.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the default 802.1x accounting method as “radius1”:
T1600G-28TS(config)# aaa accounting dot1x default radius1
36.12 show aaa authentication
Description
This show aaa authentication command is used to display the summary
information of the authentication login, enable and dot1x metheod list.
Syntax
show aaa authentication [ login | enable | dot1x ]
Parameter
login | enable | dot1x —— Specify the method list type.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
312
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Display the information of all the authentication method lists:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show aaa authentication
36.13 show aaa accounting
Description
This show aaa accounting command is used to display the summary
information of the accounting metheod list.
Syntax
show aaa accounting [ dot1x ]
Parameter
dot1x —— Specify the method list type.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Display the information of the default 802.1x accounting method list:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show aaa accounting
36.14 line telnet
Description
The line telnet command is used to enter the Line Configuration Mode to
configure the telnet terminal line to which you want to apply the
authentication list.
Syntax
line telnet
313
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enter the telnet terminal line configuration mode:
T1600G-28TS(config)#line telnet
36.15 login authentication (telnet)
Description
The login authentication command is used to apply the login authentication
method list to the telnet terminal line. To restore to the default authentication
method list, please use the no login authentication command.
Syntax
login authentication {
method-list
}
no login authentication
Parameter
method-list
—— Specify the login method list on the telnet terminal line. It is
“default” by default, which contains the method “local”.
Command Mode
Line Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the login authentication method list on the telnet terminal line as
“list1”:
T1600G-28TS(config)#line telnet
T1600G-28TS(config-line)# login authentication list1
314
36.16 line ssh
Description
The line ssh command is used to enter the Line Configuration Mode to
configure the ssh terminal line to which you want to apply the authentication
list.
Syntax
line ssh
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enter the ssh terminal line configuration mode:
T1600G-28TS(config)#line ssh
36.17 login authentication (ssh)
Description
The login authentication command is used to apply the login authentication
method list to the ssh terminal line. To restore to the default authentication
method list, please use the no login authentication command.
Syntax
login authentication {
method-list
}
no login authentication
Parameter
method-list
—— Specify the login method list on the ssh terminal line. It is
“default” by default, which contains the method “local”.
Command Mode
Line Configuration Mode
315
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the login authentication method list on the ssh terminal line as
“list1”:
T1600G-28TS(config)# line ssh
T1600G-28TS(config-line)# login authentication list1
36.18 enable authentication (telnet)
Description
The enable authentication command is used to apply the privilege
authentication method list to the telnet terminal line. To restore to the default
authentication method list, please use the no enable authentication
command.
Syntax
enable authentication {
method-list
}
no enable authentication
Parameter
method-list
—— Specify the enable method list on the telnet terminal line. It is
“default” by default, which contains the method “none”.
Command Mode
Line Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the enable authentication method list on the telnet terminal line as
“list2”:
T1600G-28TS(config)#line telnet
T1600G-28TS(config-line)# enable authentication list2
316
36.19 enable authentication (ssh)
Description
The enable authentication command is used to apply the privilege
authentication method list to the ssh terminal line. To restore to the default
authentication method list, please use the no enable authentication
command.
Syntax
enable authentication {
method-list
}
no enable authentication
Parameter
method-list
—— Specify the enable method list on the ssh terminal line. It is
“default” by default, which contains the method “none”.
Command Mode
Line Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the enable authentication method list on the ssh terminal line as
“list2”:
T1600G-28TS(config)# line ssh
T1600G-28TS(config-line)# enable authentication list2
36.20 ip http login authentication
Description
The ip http login authentication command is used to apply the login
authentication method list to users accessing through HTTP. To restore to
the default authentication method list, please use the no ip http login
authentication command.
Syntax
ip http login authentication {
method-list
}
317
no ip http login authentication
Parameter
method-list
—— Specify the login method list on the HTTP access. It is
“default” by default, which contains the method “local”.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the login authentication method list on the HTTP access as “list1”:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip http login authentication list1
36.21 ip http enable authentication
Description
The ip http enable authentication command is used to apply the privilege
authentication method list to users accessing through HTTP. To restore to
the default authentication method list, please use the no ip http enable
authentication command.
Syntax
ip http enable authentication {
method-list
}
no ip http enable authentication
Parameter
method-list
—— Specify the enable method list on the HTTP access. It is
“default” by default, which contains the method “none”.
Command Mode
Line Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
318
Example
Configure the enable authentication method list on the HTTP access as
“list2”:
T1600G-28TS(config)# ip http enable authentication list2
36.22 show aaa global
Description
This show aaa global command is used to display global status of AAA
function and the login/enable method lists of different application modules:
telnet, ssh and HTTP.
Syntax
show aaa global
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Display the AAA function’s global status and each application’s method list:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show aaa global
36.23 enable-admin
Description
The enable-admin command is used to get the administrative privelges by a
non-admin user.
Syntax
enable-admin
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode
319
Privilege Requirement
Only User, Power User and Operator level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Get the administrative privelges (the Enable password is “123456”):
T1600G-28TS# enable-admin
Password: 123456
320
Chapter 37 IEEE 802.1x Commands
IEEE 802.1x function is to provide an access control for LAN ports via the authentication. An
802.1x system include three entities: supplicant, authenticator and authentication server.
Supplicant: the device that requests access to the LAN.
Authentication server: performs the actual authentication of the supplicant. It validates the
identity of the supplicant and notifies the authenticator whether or not the supplicant is
authorized to access the LAN.
Authenticator: controls the physical access to the network based on the authentication
status of the supplicant. It is usually an 802.1x-supported network device, such as this
TP-Link switch. It acts as an intermediary (proxy) between the supplicant and the
authentication server, requesting identity information from the supplicant, verifying that
information with the authentication server, and relaying a response to the supplicant.
This chapter handles with the authentication process between the supplicant and the switch.
To realize the authentication and accounting function, you should also enbable the AAA
function and configure the RADIUS server. Go to Chapter 42 AAA Commands for more details.
37.1 dot1x system-auth-control
Description
The dot1x system-auth-control command is used to enable the IEEE 802.1x
function globally. To disable the IEEE 802.1x function, please use no dot1x
system-auth-control command.
Syntax
dot1x system-auth-control
no dot1x system-auth-control
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the IEEE 802.1x function:
T1600G-28TS(config)#dot1x system-auth-control
321
37.2 dot1x handshake
Description
The dot1x handshake command is used enable the handshake feature. The
handshake feature is used to detect the connection status between the
TP-Link 802.1x supplicant and the switch. Please disable the handshake
feature if you are using a non-TP-Link 802.1x-compliant client software. This
feature is enabled by default.
Syntax
dot1x handshake
no dot1x handshake
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Disable the 802.1x handshake function:
T1600G-28TS(config)# no dot1x handshake
37.3 dot1x auth-protocol
Description
The dot1x auth-protocol command is used to configure the authentication
protocol of IEEE 802.1x and the default 802.1x authentication method is “eap”.
To restore to the default 802.1x authentication protocol, please use no dot1x
auth-protocol command.
Syntax
dot1x auth-protocol { pap | eap }
no dot1x auth-protocol
Parameter
pap | eap ——Authentication protocols.
322
pap: EAP termination mode. IEEE 802.1x authentication system uses
extensible authentication protocol (EAP) to exchange information between
the switch and the client. The EAP packets are terminated at the switch and
repackaged in the Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) packets, and then
transferred to the RADIUS server.
eap: EAP relay mode. IEEE 802.1x authentication system uses extensible
authentication protocol (EAP) to exchange information between the switch
and the client. The EAP protocol packets with authentication data are
encapsulated in the advanced protocol (such as RADIUS) packets and
transmitted to the authentication server.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the Authentication protocol of IEEE 802.1x as “pap”:
T1600G-28TS(config)#dot1x auth-protocol pap
37.4 dot1x vlan-assignment
Description
The dot1x vlan-assignment command is used to enable the VLAN
assignment feature.To disable this feature, please use no dot1x
vlan-assignment command.
802.1x VLAN assignment is a technology allowing the RADIUS server to send
the VLAN assignment to the port when the port is authenticated.
If the assigned VLAN does not exist on the switch, the switch will create the
related VLAN automatically, add the authenticated port to the VLAN and
change the PVID based on the assigned VLAN.
If the assigned VLAN exists on the switch, the switch will directly add the
authenticated port to the related VLAN and change the PVID instead of
creating a new VLAN.
If no VLAN is supplied by the RADIUS server or if 802.1x authentication is
disabled, the port will be in its original VLAN after successful authentication.
323
Syntax
dot1x vlan-assignment
no dot1x vlan-assignment
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the VLAN assignment feature:
T1600G-28TS(config)#dot1x vlan-assignment
37.5 dot1x accounting
Description
The dot1x accounting command is used to enable the IEEE 802.1x
accounting function globally. To disable the IEEE 802.1x accounting function,
please use no dot1x accounting command.
Syntax
dot1x accounting
no dot1x accounting
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the enable the IEEE 802.1x accounting function globally:
T1600G-28TS(config)#dot1x accounting
324
37.6 dot1x mab
Description
The dot1x mab command is used to enable the MAB feature on the port.To
disable this feature, please use no dot1x mab command.
With MAB (MAC-Based Authentication Bypass) feature enabled, the switch
automatically sends the authentication server a RADIUS access request frame
with the client’s MAC address as the username and password. It is also
necessary to configure the RADIUS server with the client’s information for
authentication. You can enable this feature on IEEE 802.1x ports connected to
devices without 802.1x capability. For example, most printers, IP phones and
fax machines do not have 802.1x capability.
Syntax
dot1x mab
no dot1x mab
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the MAB feature on the Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1:
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
T1600G-28TS(config-if)#dot1x mab
37.7 dot1x guest-vlan
Description
The dot1x guest-vlan command is used to configure the Guest VLAN
function on the port. To disable the Guest VLAN function, please use no
dot1x guest-vlan command.
325
Syntax
dot1x guest-vlan
vid
no dot1x guest-vlan
Parameter
vid
—— The VLAN ID needed to enable the Guest VLAN function, ranging
from 0 to 4094. 0 means that Guest VLAN is disabled. The supplicants in the
Guest VLAN can access the specified network source.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the Guest VLAN function for VLAN 5 and set the VLAN ID as 20 on the
Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1::
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
T1600G-28TS(config-if)#dot1x guest-vlan 5
37.8 dot1x timeout quiet-period
Description
The dot1x timeout quiet-period command is used to enable the quiet-period
function on the port. To disable the function, please use no dot1x timeout
quiet-period command.
Syntax
dot1x timeout quiet-period [
time
]
no dot1x timeout quiet-period
Parameter
time
—— The length of the quiet-period time. If one user’s authentication fails,
its subsequent IEEE 802.1x authentication requests will not be processed
during the quiet-period time. It ranges from 1 to 999 seconds and the default
value is 10 seconds.
326
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the quiet-period function and set the quiet-period as 5 seconds on the
Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1:
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
T1600G-28TS(config-if)#dot1x quiet-period 5
37.9 dot1x timeout supp-timeout
Description
The dot1x timeout supp-timeout command is used to configure the
supplicant timeout on the port.To restore to the default, please use no dot1x
timeout supp-timeout command.
Syntax
dot1x timeout
supp-timeout
time
no dot1x timeout supp-timeout
Parameter
time
——The maximum time for the switch to wait for the response from
supplicant before resending a request to the supplicant., ranging from 1 to 9
in second. By default, it is 3 seconds.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the supplicant timeout value as 5 seconds on the Gigabit Ethernet
pot 1/0/1:
327
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
T1600G-28TS(config-if)#dot1x timeout supp-timeout 5
37.10 dot1x max- req
Description
The dot1x max-req command is used to configure the maximum transfer
times of the repeated authentication request when the server cannot be
connected. To restore to the default value, please use no dot1x max-req
command.
Syntax
dot1x max-req
times
no dot1x max-req
Parameter
times
—— The maximum transfer times of the repeated authentication
request, ranging from 1 to 9 in times. By default, the value is 3.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the maximum transfer times of the repeated authentication
request as 5 on the Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1:
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
T1600G-28TS(config-if)#dot1x max-req 5
37.11 dot1x
Description
The dot1x command is used to enable the IEEE 802.1x function for a
specified port. To disable the IEEE 802.1x function for a specified port, please
use no dot1x command.
328
Syntax
dot1x
no dot1x
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet )
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the IEEE 802.1x function for the Gigabit Ethernet port 1:
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
T1600G-28TS(config-if)#dot1x
37.12 dot1x port-control
Description
The dot1x port-control command is used to configure the Control Mode of
IEEE 802.1x for the specified port. By default, the control mode is “auto”. To
restore to the default configuration, please use no dot1x port-control
command.
Syntax
dot1x port-control {auto | authorized-force | unauthorized-force}
no dot1x port-control
Parameter
auto | authorized-force | unauthorized-force —— The Control Mode for the
port.
auto: In this mode, the port will normally work only after passing the 802.1x
Authentication.
authorized-force: In this mode, the port can work normally without passing
the 802.1x Authentication.
unauthorized-force: In this mode, the port is forbidden working for its fixed
unauthorized status.
329
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the Control Mode for Gigabit Ethernet port 20 as
“authorized-force”:
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/20
T1600G-28TS(config-if)#dot1x port-control authorized-force
37.13 dot1x port-method
Description
The dot1x port-method command is used to configure the control type of
IEEE 802.1x for the specified port. By default, the control type is “mac-based”.
To restore to the default configuration, please use no dot1x port-method
command.
Syntax
dot1x port-method { mac-based | port-based }
no dot1x port-method
Parameter
mac-based | port-based ——The control type for the port.
mac-based: Any client connected to the port should pass the 802.1x
authentication for access.
port-based: All the clients connected to the port can access the network on
the condition that any one of the clients has passed the 802.1x
Authentication.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
330
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the Control Type for Gigabit Ethernet port 20 as “port-based”:
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/20
T1600G-28TS(config-if)#dot1x port-method port-based
37.14 dot1x auth-init
Description
The dot1x auth-init command is used to initialize the specific client.
Syntax
dot1x auth-init [ mac
mac-address
]
Parameter
mac-address
: Enter the MAC address of the client that will be unauthorized.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Initialize the client whose MAC address is a 00:02:58:4f:6c:23 on port 1:
T1600G-28TS(Config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
T1600G-28TS(Config-if)#dot1x auth-init mac 00:02:58:4f:6c:23
37.15 dot1x auth-reauth
Description
The dot1x auth-reauth command is used to reauthenticate the specific
client.
331
Syntax
dot1x auth-reauth [ mac
mac-address
]
Parameter
mac-address
: Enter the MAC address of the client that will be
reauthenticated.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Reauthenticate the client whose MAC address is a 00:02:58:4f:6c:23 on port
1:
T1600G-28TS(Config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
T1600G-28TS(Config-if)#dot1x auth-reauth mac 00:02:58:4f:6c:23
37.16 show dot1x global
Description
The show dot1x global command is used to display the global configuration
of 801.X.
Syntax
show dot1x global
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the configuration of 801.X globally:
T1600G-28TS(config)#show dot1x global
332
37.17 show dot1x interface
Description
The show dot1x interface command is used to display all ports or the
specified port’s configuration information of 801.X.
Syntax
show dot1x interface [ gigabitEthernet
port
]
Parameter
port
—— The Ethernet port number. If not specified, the information of all the
ports will be displayed.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the configuration information of 801.X for Gigabit Ethernet port 20:
T1600G-28TS(config)#show dot1x interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/20
Display the configuration information of 801.X for all Ethernet ports:
T1600G-28TS(config)#show dot1x interface
37.18 show dot1x auth-state
Description
The show dot1x auth-state command is used to display the authentication
status of each port.
Syntax
show dot1x auth-state
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
333
Example
Display the authentication status of each port:
T1600G-28TS(config)#show dot1x auth-state
334
Chapter 38 Port Security Commands
You can limit the number of MAC addresses that can be learned on each port on this page, thus
preventing the MAC address table from being exhausted by the attack packets.
38.1 mac address-table max-mac count
Description
The mac address-table max-mac-count command is used to enable the port
security feature of the port and configure the related parameters. To disable
the feature and restore the parameters to defaults on the port, please use no
mac address-table max-mac-count command.
Syntax
mac address-table max-mac-count { [ max-number
num
]
[ exceed-max-learned enable | disable ] [ mode { dynamic | static |
permanent } ] [ status { forward | drop | disable } ] }
no mac address-table max-mac-count [ max-number | mode | status ]
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Set the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on port
1/0/1 as 30, enable exceed-max-leaned feature and configure the mode as
permanent and the status as drop:
T1600G-28TS (config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
T1600G-28TS(config-if)#mac address-table max-mac-count max-number
30 exceed-maxlearned enable mode permanent status drop
38.2 show mac address-table max-mac-count
Description
The show mac address-table max-mac-count command is used to display
the port security configuration on each port.
335
Syntax
show mac address-table max-mac-count interface { fastEthernet
port
|
gigabitEthernet
port
| ten-gigabitEthernet
port
}
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the port security configuration on port 1/0/1
T1600G-28TS# show mac address-table max-mac-count interface
gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
336
Chapter 39 Port Mirroring Commands
Port Mirroring allows the switch to send a copy of the traffic that passes through specified
sources (ports, LAGs or the CPU) to a destination port. It does not affect the switching of
network traffic on source ports, LAGs or the CPU. Usually, the monitoring port is connected to
data diagnose device, which is used to analyze the monitored packets for monitoring and
troubleshooting the network.
39.1 monitor session destination interface
Description
The monitor session destination
interface command is used to configure
the monitoring port. Each monitor session has only one monitoring port. To
change the monitoring port, please use the monitor session destination
interface
command by changing the port value. The no monitor session
command is used to delete the corresponding monitoring port or monitor
session.
Syntax
monitor session
session_num
destination
interface
gigabitEthernet
port
no monitor session
session_num
destination
interface
gigabitEthernet
port
no monitor session
session_num
Parameter
session_num
—— The monitor session number, can only be specified as 1.
port ——
The monitoring port number.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Create monitor session 1 and configure port 1/0/1 as the monitoring port:
T1600G-28TS(config)# monitor session 1 destination interface
gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
Delete the monitoring port 1/0/2 from monitor session 1：
337
T1600G-28TS(config)# no monitor session 1 destination interface
gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
Delete the monitor session 1:
T1600G-28TS(config)# no monitor session 1
39.2 monitor session source
Description
The monitor session source
command is used to configure the monitored
interface. To delete the corresponding monitored interface, please use no
monitor session source
command.
Syntax
monitor session
session_num
source {
cpu
cpu_number
| interface
gigabitEthernet
port-list
| interface port-channel
port-channel-id
}
mode
no monitor session
session_num
source {
cpu
cpu_number
| interface
gigabitEthernet
port-list
| interface port-channel
port-channel-id
}
mode
Parameter
session_num
—— The monitor session number. It can only be specified as 1.
cpu_number
—— The CPU number. It can only be specified as 1.
port-list
—— List of the Ethernet port number. It is multi-optional.
lag-list
—— List of LAG interfaces. It is multi-optional.
mode
—— The monitor mode. There are three options: rx, tx and both. Rx
(ingress monitoring mode), means the incoming packets received by the
monitored interface will be copied to the monitoring port. Tx (egress
monitoring mode), indicates the outgoing packets sent by the monitored
interface will be copied to the monitoring port. Both (ingress and egress
monitoring), presents the incoming packets received and the outgoing
packets sent by the monitored interface will both be copied to the monitoring
port.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
338
User Guidelines
1. The monitoring port is corresponding to current interface configuration
mode.
2. Monitored ports number is not limited, but it can’t be the monitoring port
at the same time.
3. Whether the monitoring port and monitored ports are in the same VLAN
or not is not demanded strictly.
4. The monitoring port and monitored ports cannot be link-aggregation
member.
Example
Create monitor session 1, then configure port 4, 5, 7 as monitored port and
enable ingress monitoring:
T1600G-28TS(config)# monitor session 1 source interface
gigabitEthernet 1/0/4-5,1/0/7 rx
Delete port 4 in monitor session 1 and its configuration:
T1600G-28TS(config)# no monitor session 1 source interface
gigabitEthernet 1/0/4 rx
39.3 show monitor session
Description
The show monitor session command is used to display the configuration of
port monitoring.
Syntax
show monitor session [
session_num
]
Parameter
session_num
—— The monitor session number, can only be specified as 1. It
is optional.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the monitoring configuration of monitor session 1:
339
T1600G-28TS(config)# show monitor session 1
340
Chapter 40 ACL Commands
ACL (Access Control List) is used to filter data packets by configuring a series of match
conditions, operations and time ranges. It provides a flexible and secured access control policy
and facilitates you to control the network security.
40.1 access-list create
Description
The access-list create command is used to create an ACL.
Syntax
access-list create
acl-id
[ name
acl-name
]
no access-list create {
acl-id
}
Parameter
acl-id
——Enter an ACL ID. The IDs for MAC ACL are from 0 to 499. The IDs
for IP ACL are from 500 to 999. The IDs for IPv6 ACL are from 1500 to 1999.
acl-name
—— Enter a name to identify the ACL.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Create an IP ACL whose ID is 523:
T1600G-28TS(config)# access-list create 523
40.2 access-list resequence
Description
The access-list resequence command is used to resequence the rules by
providing a Start Rule ID and Step value.
Syntax
access-list resequence
acl-id-or-name
start
start-rule-id
step
rule-id-step-value
341
Parameter
acl-id-or-name
—— The ACL ID or name.
start-rule-id
—— The start rule ID.
rule-id-step-value
—— The step value.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Resequence the rules of ACL 12 with the start ID as 1 and step value as 5:
T1600G-28TS(config)# access-list resequence 12 start 1 step 5
40.3 access-list mac
Description
The access-list mac command is used to create MAC ACL. To delete the
MAC ACL, please use no access-list mac.
Syntax
access-list mac
acl-id-or-name
rule { auto |
rule-id
} { deny | permit } logging
{enable | disable} [smac
source-mac
smask
source-mac-mask
] [dmac
destination-mac
dmask
destination-mac-mask
] [type
ether-type
] [pri
dot1p-priority
] [vid
vlan-id
] [tseg
time-range-name
]
no access-list mac
acl-id-or-name
rule
rule-id
Parameter
acl-id-or-name
—— Enter the ID or name of the ACL that you want to add a
rule for.
auto —— The rule ID will be assigned automatically and the interval between
rule IDs is 5.
rule-id
—— Assign an ID to the rule.
deny | permit —— Specify the action to be taken with the packets that match
the rule. By default, it is set to permit. The packets will be discarded if “deny”
is selected and forwarded if “permit” is selected.
enable | disable —— Enable or disable Logging function for the ACL rule. If
"enable " is selected, the times that the rule is matched will be logged every 5
342
minutes. With ACL Counter trap enabled, a related trap will be generated if
the matching times changes.
source-mac
—— Enter the source MAC address. The format is
FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF.
source-mac-mask —— Enter the mask of the source MAC address. This is
required if a source MAC address is entered. The format is FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF.
destination-mac
—— Enter the destination MAC address. The format is
FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF.
destination-mac-mask
—— Enter the mask of the destination MAC address.
This is required if a destination MAC address is entered. The format is
FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF.
ether-type
—— Specify an Ethernet-type with 4 hexadecimal numbers.
dot1p-priority
: The user priority ranges from 0 to 7. The default is No Limit.
vlan-id
—— The VLAN ID ranges from 1 to 4094.
time-range-name
—— The name of the time-range. The default is No Limit.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Create MAC ACL 50 and configure Rule 5 to permit packets with source MAC
address 00:34:a2:d4:34:b5:
T1600G-28TS (config)#access-list create 50
T1600G-28TS (config-mac-acl)#access-list mac 50 rule 5 permit logging
disable smac 00:34:a2:d4:34:b5 smask ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
40.4 access-list ip
Description
The access-list ip command is used to add IP ACL rule. To delete the
corresponding rule, please use no access-list ip command. IP ACLs analyze
and process data packets based on a series of match conditions, which can
be the source IP addresses and destination IP addresses carried in the
packets.
343
Syntax
access-list ip
acl-id-or-name
rule {auto |
rule-id
} {deny | permit} logging
{enable | disable} [ sip
sip-address
sip-mask
sip-address-mask
] [ dip
dip-address
dip-mask
dip-address-mask
] [dscp
dscp-value
] [tos
tos-value
]
[pre
pre-value
] [protocol
protocol
[s-port
s-port-number
] [s-port-mask
s-port-mask
] [d-port
d-port-number
] [d-port-mask
d-port-mask
] [tcpflag
tcpflag
]] [tseg
time-range-name
]
no access-list ip
acl-id-or-name
rule
rule-id
Parameter
acl-id-or-name
—— Enter the ID or name of the ACL that you want to add a
rule for.
auto —— The rule ID will be assigned automatically and the interval between
rule IDs is 5.
rule-id
—— Assign an ID to the rule.
deny | permit —— Specify the action to be taken with the packets that match
the rule. By default, it is set to permit. The packets will be discarded if “deny”
is selected and forwarded if “permit” is selected.
logging {enable | disable} —— Enable or disable Logging function for the ACL
rule. If "enable " is selected, the times that the rule is matched will be logged
every 5 minutes. With ACL Counter trap enabled, a related trap will be
generated if the matching times changes.
sip-address
—— Enter the source IP address.
sip-address-mask
——
Enter the mask of the source IP address. This is
required if a source IP address is entered.
dip-address
——
Enter the destination IP address.
dip-address-mask
——
Enter the mask of the destination IP address. This is
required if a destination IP address is entered.
dscp-value
——
Specify the DSCP value between 0 and 63.
tos-value
——Specify an IP ToS value to be matched between 0 and 15.
pre-value
——Specify an IP Precedence value to be matched between 0 and
7.
protocol
——
Specify a protocol type.
s-port-number
——
Specify the source port number.
s-port-mask
——
Specify the source port mask with 4 hexadecimal numbers.
d-port-number
—— Specify the destination port number.
344
d-port-mask
——
Specify the destination port mask with 4 hexadacimal
numbers.
tcpflag
——
For TCP protocol, specify the flag value using either binary
numbers or * (for example, 01*010*). The default is *, which indicates that the
flag will not be matched. The flags are URG (Urgent flag), ACK (acknowledge
flag), PSH(push flag), RST(reset flag),SYN(synchronize flag), and FIN(finish
flag).
time-range-name
—— The name of the time-range. The default is No Limit.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Create IP ACL 600, and configure Rule 1 to permit packets with source IP
address 192.168.1.100：
T1600G-28TS (config)#access-list create 600
T1600G-28TS (config)#access-list ip 600 rule 1 permit logging disable sip
192.168.1.100 sip-mask 255.255.255.255
40.5 access-list ipv6
Description
The access-list ipv6 command is used to add IPv6 ACL rule. To delete the
corresponding rule, please use no access-list ipv6 command. IPv6 ACLs
analyze and process data packets based on a series of match conditions,
which can be the source IP addresses and destination IP addresses carried in
the packets, the DSCP and flow-label value, etc.
Syntax
access-list ipv6
acl-id-or-name
rule {auto |
rule-id
} {deny | permit} logging
{enable | disable} [class
class-value
] [flow-label
flow-label-value
] [sip
source-ip-address
sip-mask
source-ip-mask
] [dip
destination-ip-address
dip-mask
destination-ip-mask
] [s-port
source-port-number
] [d-port
destination-port-number
] [tseg
time-range-name
]
no access-list ipv6
acl-id-or-name
rule
rule-id
345
Parameter
acl-id-or-name
—— Enter the ID or name of the ACL that you want to add a
rule for.
auto —— The rule ID will be assigned automatically and the interval between
rule IDs is 5.
rule-id
—— Assign an ID to the rule.
deny | permit —— Specify the action to be taken with the packets that match
the rule. By default, it is set to permit. The packets will be discarded if “deny”
is selected and forwarded if “permit” is selected.
logging {enable | disable} —— Enable or disable Logging function for the ACL
rule. If "enable " is selected, the times that the rule is matched will be logged
every 5 minutes. With ACL Counter trap enabled, a related trap will be
generated if the matching times changes.
class-value
—— Specify a class value to be matched. It ranges from 0 to 63.
flow-label-value
—— Specify a Flow Label value to be matched.
source-ip-address
—— Enter the source IP address. Enter the destination
IPv6 address to be matched. All types of IPv6 address will be checked. You
may enter a complete 128-bit IPv6 address but only the first 64 bits will be
valid.
source-ip-mask
—— Enter the source IP address mask. The mask is required
if the source IPv6 address is entered. Enter the mask in complete format (for
example, ffff:ffff:0000:ffff). The mask specifies which bits in the source IPv6
address to match the rule.
destination-ip-address
—— Enter the destination IPv6 address to be
matched. All types of IPv6 address will be checked. You may enter a
complete 128-bit IPv6 addresses but only the first 64 bits will be valid.
destination-ip-mask
: Enter the source IP address mask. The mask is required
if the source IPv6 address is entered. Enter the mask in complete format (for
example, ffff:ffff:0000:ffff). The mask specifies which bits in the source IPv6
address to match the rule.
source-port-number
—— Enter the TCP/UDP source port if TCP/UDP
protocol is selected.
destination-port-number
—— Enter the TCP/UDP destination port if
TCP/UDP protocol is selected.
time-range-name
—— The name of the time-range. The default is No Limit.
346
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
User Guidelines
Before binding an IPv6 ACL to a VLAN or interface, you should configure the
SDM template as “enterpriseV6” and save your configurations.
Example
Create IPv6 ACL 1600 and configure Rule 1 to deny packets with source IPv6
address CDCD:910A:2222:5498:8475:1111:3900:2020:
T1600G-28TS(config)# access-list create 1600
T1600G-28TS(config)# access-list ipv6 1600 rule 1 deny logging disable
sip CDCD:910A:2222:5498:8475:1111:3900:2020 sip-mask ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff
40.6 access-list action
Description
The access-list action command is used to specify a rule to be configured
with policies and enter Action Configuration mode. To delete the
corresponding policies, please use no access-list action command.
Syntax
access-list action
acl-id-or-name
rule
rule-id
no access-list action
acl-id-or-name
rule
rule-id
Parameter
acl-id-or-name
—— Enter the ID or name of the ACL.
rule-id
—— Enter the ID of the ACL rule.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify the rule 1 of ACL 200 to be configured with policies:
347
T1600G-28TS(config)# access-list action 200 rule 1
40.7 redirect interface
Description
The redirect interface command is used to define the policy to redirect the
matched packets to the desired port. To disable this policy, please use no
redirect interface command.
Syntax
redirect interface { fastEthernet
port
| gigabitEthernet
port
|
ten-gigabitEthernet
port
}
no redirect interface { fastEthernet
port
| gigabitEthernet
port
|
ten-gigabitEthernet
port
}
Parameter
port
—— The destination port to which the packets will be redirected. The
default is All.
Command Mode
Action Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Define the policy to redirect the matched packets to port 1/0/1 for rule 1 of
ACL 6:
T1600G-28TS(config)# access-list action 6 rule 1
T1600G-28TS(config-action)# redirect interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
40.8 s-condition
Description
The s-condition command is used to limit the rate of the matched packets.
To restore the settings to the defaults, please use no s-condition.
Syntax
s-condition rate
rate
burst
burst-size
osd { none | discard
}
no s-condition
348
Parameter
rate
—— Specify a rate, ranging from 0 to 1000000kbps.
burst-size
—— Specify the number of bytes allowed in one second ranging
from 1 to 128.
osd ——Select either “none” or “discard” as the action to be taken for the
packets whose rate is beyond the specified rate. The default is None.
Command Mode
Action Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure a policy for rule 1 of ACL 6: limit the transmission rate of the
matched packets as 1000 Kbps and if the number of bytes per second is
beyond 100, the packets will be discarded by the switch:
T1600G-28TS(config)#access-list action 6 rule 1
T1600G-28TS(config-action)# s-condition rate 1000 burst 100 osd discard
40.9 s-mirror
Description
The s-mirror command is used to define the policy to mirror the matched
packets to the desired port. To disable this policy, please use no s-mirror
command.
Syntax
s-mirror interface { fastEthernet
port
| gigabitEthernet
port
|
ten-gigabitEthernet
port
}
Parameter
port
—— The destination port to which the packets will be mirrored.
Command Mode
Action Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
349
Example
Configure a policy for rule 1 of ACL 6: specify the mirror port as Gigabit
Ethernet port 1/0/2 for the data packets matching this rule:
T1600G-28TS(config)#access-list action 6 rule 1
T1600G-28TS(config-action)#s-mirror interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
40.10 qos-remark
Description
The qos-remark command is used to configure QoS Remark function of
policy action. To restore the settings to the default, please use no
qos-remark.
Syntax
qos-remark [ dscp
dscp
] [ priority
pri
] [dot1p dot1p-pri]
no qos-remark
Parameter
dscp
—— DSCP of QoS Remark. Specify the DSCP region for the data
packets matching the corresponding ACL. DSCP ranges from 0 to 63. By
default, it is not limited.
pri
—— Local Priority of QoS Remark. Specify the local priority for the data
packets matching the corresponding ACL. Local Priority ranges from 0 to 7.
dot1p-pri
—— 802.1P priority of QoS Remark. This remark configuration will
change the data packet's 802.1P priority field to the dot1p-pri you set. 802.1P
priority ranges from 0 to 7.
Note:
The DSCP and dot1p cannot be configured at the same time.
Command Mode
Action Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure a policy for rule 1 of ACL 6: specify the DSCP region as 30 and
local priority 2 for the packets matching this rule:
350
T1600G-28TS(config)#access-list action 6 rule 1
T1600G-28TS(config-action)# qos-remark dscp 30 priority 2
40.11 access bind
Description
The access-list policy name command is used to add Policy. To delete the
corresponding Policy, please use no access-list policy name command. A
Policy is used to control the data packets those match the corresponding
ACL rules.
Syntax
access-list bind
acl-id-or-name
interface { [ vlan
vlan-list
] | [ fastEthernet
port-list
] | [gigabitEthernet
port-list
] | [ ten-gigabitEthernet
port-list
] }
no access-list bind
acl-id-or-name
interface { [ vlan
vlan-list
] |
[ fastEthernet
port-list
] | [gigabitEthernet
port-list
] | [ ten-gigabitEthernet
port-list
] }
Parameter
acl-id-or-name
—— Enter the ID or name of the ACL that you want to add a
rule for.
vlan-list
—— Specify the ID or the ID list of the VLAN(s) that you want to bind
the ACL to. The valid values are from 1 to 4094, for example, 2-3,5.
port-list
—— Specify the number or the list of the Ethernet port that you want
to bind the ACL to.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Bind ACL 1 to port 3 and VLAN 4:
T1600G-28TS(config)#access-list bind 1 interface vlan 4 gigabitEthernet
1/0/3
351
40.12 show access-list
Description
The show access-list command is used to display configuration of ACL.
Syntax
show access-list
acl-id-or-name
Parameter
acl-id-or-name
—— The ID or name of the ACL selected to display the
configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the configuration of the MAC ACL whose ID is 20:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show access-list 20
40.13 show access-list bind
Description
The show access-list bind command is used to display the configuration of
ACL binding.
Syntax
show access-list bind
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the configuration of Policy bind:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show access-list bind
352
40.14 show access-list status
Description
The show access-list status command is used to display usage status of
ACL entry resource.
Syntax
show access-list status
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the usage status of ACL entry resource:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show access-list status
40.15 show access-list counter
Description
The show access-list counter command is used to display the packet
counter of a specified ACL.
Syntax
show access-list
acl-id-or-name
counter
Parameter
acl-id-or-name
—— The ID or name of the ACL to display.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the packet counter of ACL 100:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show access-list 100 counter
353
40.16 clear access-list
Description
The show access-list command is used to clear the counter of matched
packets of a specified ACL or rule.
Syntax
clear access-list
acl-id-or-name
[rule
rule-id
]
Parameter
acl-id-or-name
—— The ID or name of the ACL.
rule-id
—— The ID of the rule.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Clear the packet counter of ACL 100:
T1600G-28TS(config)# clear access-list 100
354
Chapter 41 IPv4 IMPB Commands
You can bind the IP address, MAC address, VLAN and the connected Port number of the Host
together, which can be the condition for the ARP Inspection and IP verify source to filter the
packets.
41.1 ip source binding
Description
The ip source binding command is used to bind the IP address, MAC address,
VLAN ID and the Port number together manually. You can manually bind the
IP address, MAC address, VLAN ID and the Port number together in the
condition that you have got the related information of the Hosts in the LAN.
To delete the IP-MAC–VID-PORT entry from the binding table, please use no
ip source binding index command.
Syntax
ip source binding
hostname ip-addr mac-addr
vlan
vlan-id
interface
{ fastEthernet
port
| gigabitEthernet
port
| ten-gigabitEthernet
port
|
port-channel
port-channel-id
} { none | arp-detection | ip-verify-source |
both }
no ip source binding index
ip-addr
Parameter
hostname
——The Host Name, which contains 20 characters at most.
ip-addr
—— The IP address of the Host.
mac-addr
—— The MAC address of the Host.
vlan-id
——The VLAN ID needed to be bound, ranging from 1 to 4094.
port
—— The number of port connected to the Host.
none | arp-detection | ip-verify-source | both ——The protect type for the
entry. “arp-detection” indicates ARP detection; “ip-verify-source” indicates IP
source filter; “none” indicates applying none; “both” indicates applying both.
ip-addr
—— The IP address of the entry to be deleted.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
355
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Bind an ACL entry with the IP 192.168.0.1, MAC 00:00:00:00:00:01, VLAN ID 2
and the Port number 5 manually. And then enable the entry for the ARP
detection:
T1600G-28TS(config)#ip source binding host1 192.168.0.1
00:00:00:00:00:01 vlan 2 interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5 arp-detection
Delete the IP-MAC–VID-PORT entry with the index 5:
T1600G-28TS(config)#no ip source binding index 5
41.2 ip dhcp snooping
Description
The ip dhcp snooping command is used to enable DHCP Snooping function
globally. To disable DHCP Snooping function globally, please use no ip dhcp
snooping command. DHCP Snooping functions to monitor the process of the
Host obtaining the IP address from DHCP server, and record the IP address,
MAC address, VLAN and the connected Port number of the Host for
automatic binding.
Syntax
ip dhcp snooping
no ip dhcp snooping
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the DHCP Snooping function globally:
T1600G-28TS(config)#ip dhcp snooping
356
41.3 ip dhcp snooping vlan
Description
The ip dhcp snooping vlan command is used to enable DHCP Snooping
function on a specified VLAN. To disable DHCP Snooping function on this
VLAN, please use no ip dhcp snooping vlan command.
Syntax
ip dhcp snooping vlan
vlan-range
no ip dhcp snooping vlan
vlan-range
Parameter
vlan-range
—— Specify the VLANs to enable the DHCP snooping function, in
the format of 1-3, 5.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the DHCP Snooping function on VLAN 1,4,6-7:
T1600G-28TS(config)#ip dhcp snooping vlan 1,4,6-7
41.4 ip dhcp snooping max-entries
Description
The ip dhcp snooping max-entries command is used to configure the
maximum number of entries that can be learned on a port via DHCP Snooping.
To restore to the default setting, please use no ip dhcp snooping
max-entries command.
Syntax
ip dhcp snooping max-entries
value
no ip dhcp snooping max-entries
357
Syntax
value
——
Enter the value of maximum number of entries that can be learned
on the port via DHCP Snooping.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the maximum number of entries that can be learned on port 1 as
100:
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
T1600G-28TS(config-if)#ip dhcp snooping max-entries 100
41.5 show ip source binding
Description
The show ip source binding command is used to display the IP-MAC-VID-
PORT binding table.
Syntax
show ip source binding
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the IP-MAC-VID-PORT binding table:
T1600G-28TS(config)#show ip source binding
358
41.6 show ip dhcp snooping
Description
The show ip dhcp snooping command is used to display the running status
of DHCP Snooping.
Syntax
show ip dhcp snooping
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the running status of DHCP Snooping:
T1600G-28TS#show ip dhcp snooping
41.7 show ip dhcp snooping interface
Description
The show ip dhcp snooping interface command is used to display the DHCP
Snooping configuration of a desired Gigabit Ethernet port/port channel or of
all Ethernet ports/port channels.
Syntax
show ip dhcp snooping interface [ gigabitEthernet
port
| port-channel
port-channel-id
]
Parameters
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
port-channel-id
—— The ID of the port channel.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
359
Example
Display the DHCP Snooping configuration of all Ethernet ports and port
channels:
T1600G-28TS#show ip dhcp snooping interface
Display the DHCP Snooping configuration of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/5:
T1600G-28TS#show ip dhcp snooping interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5
360
Chapter 42 IPv6 IMPB Commands
You can bind the IPv6 address, MAC address, VLAN and the connected Port number of the
Host together, which can be the condition for the ARP Inspection and IP verify source to filter
the packets.
42.1 Ipv6 source binding
Description
The ipv6 source binding command is used to bind the IPv6 address, MAC
address, VLAN ID and the Port number together manually. You can manually
bind the IPv6 address, MAC address, VLAN ID and the Port number together
in the condition that you have got the related information of the Hosts in the
LAN. To delete the IPv6-MAC–VID-PORT entry from the binding table, please
use no ipv6 source binding index command.
Syntax
Ipv6 source binding
hostname ipv6-addr mac-addr
vlan
vlan-id
interface
{ fastEthernet
port
| gigabitEthernet
port
| ten-gigabitEthernet
port
|
port-channel
port-channel-id
} { none | nd-detection | ipv6-verify-source |
both }
no ipv6 source binding index
ipv6-addr
Parameter
hostname
——The Host Name, which contains 20 characters at most.
Ipv6-addr
—— The IP address of the Host.
mac-addr
—— The MAC address of the Host.
vlan-id
——The VLAN ID needed to be bound, ranging from 1 to 4094.
port
—— The number of port connected to the Host.
none | nd-detection | ipv6-verify-source | both ——The protect type for the
entry. “nd-detection” indicates ND detection; “ipv6-verify-source” indicates
IPv6 source filter; “none” indicates applying none; “both” indicates applying
both.
Ipv6-addr
—— The IPv6 address of the entry to be deleted.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
361
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
The following example shows how to bind an entry with the hostname host1,
IPv6 address 2001:0:9d38:90d5::34, MAC address AA-BB-CC-DD-EE-FF,
VLAN ID 10, port number 1/0/5, and enable this entry for ND Detection.
T1600G-28TS(config)# ipv6 source binding host1 2001:0:9d38:90d5::34
aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff vlan 10 interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5 nd-detection
42.2 ipv6 dhcp snooping
Description
The ipv6 dhcp snooping command is used to enable DHCPv6 Snooping
function globally. To disable DHCPv6 Snooping function globally, please use
no ipv6 dhcp snooping command. DHCPv6 Snooping functions to monitor
the process of the Host obtaining the IP address from DHCPv6 server, and
record the IPv6 address, MAC address, VLAN and the connected Port
number of the Host for automatic binding.
Syntax
Ipv6 dhcp snooping
no ipv6 dhcp snooping
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the DHCPv6 Snooping function globally:
T1600G-28TS(config)#ipv6 dhcp snooping
362
42.3 ipv6 dhcp snooping vlan
Description
The ipv6 dhcp snooping vlan command is used to enable DHCP Snooping
function on a specified VLAN. To disable DHCP Snooping function on this
VLAN, please use no ipv6 dhcp snooping vlan command.
Syntax
ipv6 dhcp snooping vlan
vlan-range
no ipv6 dhcp snooping vlan
vlan-range
Parameter
vlan-range
—— Specify the VLANs to enable the DHCP snooping function, in
the format of 1-3, 5.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the DHCPv6 Snooping function on VLAN 1,4,6-7:
T1600G-28TS(config)#ipv6 dhcp snooping vlan 1,4,6-7
42.4 ipv6 dhcp snooping max-entries
Description
The ipv6 dhcp snooping max-entries command is used to configure the
maximum number of entries that can be learned on a port via DHCPv6
Snooping. To restore to the default setting, please use no ipv6 dhcp
snooping max-entries command.
Syntax
Ipv6 dhcp snooping max-entries
value
no ipv6 dhcp snooping max-entries
363
Syntax
value:
Enter the value of maximum number of entries that can be learned on
the port via DHCPv6 Snooping.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the maximum number of entries that can be learned on port 1 as
100:
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
T1600G-28TS(config-if)#ipv6 dhcp snooping max-entries 100
42.5 ipv6 nd snooping
Description
The ipv6 nd snooping command is used to enable ND snooping function
globally. To disable ND Snooping function globally, please use no ipv6 nd
snooping command. ND Snooping functions to monitor the process of the
duplication address detection, and record the IPv6 address, MAC address,
VLAN and the connected Port number of the Host for automatic binding.
Syntax
ipv6 nd snooping
no ipv6 nd snooping
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
364
Enable the ND snooping function globally:
T160G-28TS(config)#ipv6 nd snooping
42.6 ipv6 nd snooping vlan
Description
The ipv6 nd snooping vlan command is used to enable ND snooping function
on a specified VLAN. To disable ND Snooping function on this VLAN, please
use no ipv6 nd snooping vlan command.
Syntax
ipv6 nd snooping vlan
vlan-range
no ipv6 nd snooping vlan
vlan-range
Parameter
vlan-range
—— Specify the VLANs to enable the ND snooping function, in the
format of 1-3, 5.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the ND snooping function on VLAN 1,4,6-7:
T1600G-28TS(config)#ipv6 nd snooping vlan 1,4,6-7
42.7 ipv6 nd snooping max-entries
Description
The ipv6 nd snooping max-entries command is used to specify the
maximum number of binding entries that are allow to be bound to a port. To
return the default, please use no ipv6 nd snooping max-entries command.
Syntax
ipv6 nd snooping max-entries
value
365
no ipv6 nd snooping max-entries
Parameter
value
—— Specify the maximum number of ND snooping entries on this
interface.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the maximum number of binding entries from ND Snooping of
Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/2 is 100:
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T1600G-28TS(config-if)#ipv6 nd snooping max-entries 100
42.8 show ipv6 source binding
Description
The show ipv6 source binding command is used to display the
IPv6-MAC-VID- PORT binding table.
Syntax
show ipv6 source binding
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the IPv6-MAC-VID-PORT binding table:
T1600G-28TS(config)#show ipv6 source binding
366
42.9 show ipv6 dhcp snooping
Description
The show ipv6 dhcp snooping command is used to display the running
status of DHCPv6 Snooping.
Syntax
show ipv6 dhcp snooping
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the running status of DHCPv6 Snooping:
T1600G-28TS#show ipv6 dhcp snooping
42.10 show ipv6 dhcp snooping interface
Description
The show ipv6 dhcp snooping interface command is used to display the
DHCPv6 Snooping configuration of a desired Gigabit Ethernet port/port
channel or of all Ethernet ports/port channels.
Syntax
show ipv6 dhcp snooping interface [ gigabitEthernet
port
| port-channel
port-channel-id
]
Parameters
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
port-channel-id
—— The ID of the port channel.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
367
Example
Display the DHCPv6 Snooping configuration of all Ethernet ports and port
channels:
T1600G-28TS#show ipv6 dhcp snooping interface
Display the DHCPv6 Snooping configuration of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/5:
T1600G-28TS#show ipv6 dhcp snooping interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5
42.11 show ipv6 nd snooping
Description
The show ipv6 nd snooping command is used to display the running status
of ND Snooping.
Syntax
show ipv6 nd snooping
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the running status of ND Snooping:
T1600G-28TS#show ipv6 nd snooping
368
Chapter 43 IP Verify Source Commands
IP Verify Source is to filter the IP packets based on the IP-MAC Binding entries. Only the
packets matched to the IP-MAC Binding rules can be processed, which can enhance the
bandwidth utility.
43.1 ip verify source
Description
The ip verify source command is used to configure the IP Verify Source
mode for a specified port. To disable the IP Verify Source function, please use
no ip verify source command.
Syntax
ip verify source { sip+mac | sip }
no ip verify source
Parameter
sip+mac —— Security type. “sip+mac” indicates that only the packets with its
source IP address, source MAC address and port number matched to the
IP-MAC binding rules can be processed.
sip —— Security type. “sip” indicates that only the packets with its source IP
address and port number matched to the IP-MAC binding rules can be
processed.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the IP Verify Source function for Gigabit Ethernet ports 5-10.
Configure that only the packets with its source IP address, source MAC
address and port number matched to the IP-MAC binding rules can be
processed:
369
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/5-10
T1600G-28TS(config-if-range)#ip verify source sip+mac
43.2 ip verify source logging
Description
The ip verify source logging command is used to enable the log feature.
With this feature enabled, the switch will generate a log when illegal packets
are received. To disable the log feature, please use no ip verify source
logging command.
Syntax
ip verify source logging
no ip verify source logging
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the log feature to make the switch generate logs when receiving illegal
packets:
T1600G-28TS(config)#ip verify source logging
43.3 show ip verify source
Description
The show ip verify source command is used to display the IP Verify Source
configuration information.
Syntax
show ip verify source
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
370
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the IP Verify Source configuration information:
T1600G-28TS(config)#show ip verify source
43.4 show ip verify source interface
Description
The show ip verify source interface command is used to display the IP verify
source configuration of a desired Gigabit Ethernet port.
Syntax
show ip verify source interface [fastEthernet
port
| gigabitEthernet
port
|
ten-gigabitEthernet
port
| port-channel
port-channel-id
]
Parameters
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
port-channel-id
—— The ID of the port channel.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the IP verify source configuration of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/5:
T1600G-28TS#show ip verify source interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5
371
Chapter 44 IPv6 Verify Source Commands
IPv6 Verify Source is to filter the IPv6 packets based on the IPv6-MAC Binding entries. Only the
packets matched to the IPv6-MAC Binding rules can be processed, which can enhance the
bandwidth utility.
Before configuring IPv6 Verify Source feature, you should configure the SDM template as
“enterpriseV6” and save your configurations.
44.1 ipv6 verify source
Description
The ipv6 verify source command is used to configure the IPv6 Verify Source
mode for a specified port. To disable the IPv6 Verify Source function, please
use no ipv6 verify source command.
Syntax
ipv6 verify source { sipv6+mac | sipv6 }
no ipv6 verify source
Parameter
sipv6+mac —— Security type. “sipv6+mac” indicates that only the packets
with its source IPv6 address, source MAC address and port number matched
to the IPv6-MAC binding rules can be processed.
sipv6 —— Security type. “sipv6” indicates that only the packets with its
source IPv6 address and port number matched to the IPv6-MAC binding rules
can be processed.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet )
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the IPv6 Verify Source function for Gigabit Ethernet ports 5-10.
Configure that only the packets with its source IPv6 address, source MAC
372
address and port number matched to the IPv6-MAC binding rules can be
processed:
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/5-10
T1600G-28TS(config-if-range)#ipv6 verify source sipv6+mac
44.2 show ipv6 verify source
Description
The show ipv6 verify source command is used to display the IPv6 Verify
Source configuration information.
Syntax
show ipv6 verify source
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the IPv6 Verify Source configuration information:
T1600G-28TS(config)#show ipv6 verify source
44.3 show ipv6 verify source interface
Description
The show ipv6 verify source interface command is used to display the IPv6
verify source configuration of a desired Gigabit Ethernet port.
Syntax
show ipv6 verify source interface gigabitEthernet
port
Parameters
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
373
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the IPv6 verify source configuration of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/5:
T1600G-28TS#show ipv6 verify source interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5
374
Chapter 45 DHCPv4 Filter Commands
DHCPv4 Filter function allows the user to not only to restrict all DHCP Server packets but also
to receive any specified DHCP server packet by any specified DHCP client, it is useful when
one or more DHCP servers are present on the network and both provide DHCP services to
different distinct groups of clients.
45.1 ip dhcp filter
Description
The ip dhcp filter command is used to enable DHCP Filter function globally.
To disable DHCP Filter function globally, please use no ip dhcp filter
command.
Syntax
ip dhcp filter
no ip dhcp filter
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the DHCP Filter function globally:
T1600G-28TS(config)#ip dhcp filter
45.2 ip dhcp filter (interface)
Description
The ip dhcp filter (interface) command is used to enable DHCP Filter
function on a specified port. To disable DHCP Filter function on this port,
please use no ip dhcp filter (interface) command.
375
Syntax
ip dhcp filter
no ip dhcp filter
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the DHCP Filter on port 1/0/1
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
T1600G-28TS(Config-if)#ip dhcp filter
45.3 ip dhcp filter mac-verify
Description
The ip dhcp filter mac-verify command is used to enable the MAC Verify
feature. To disable the MAC Verify feature, please use no ip dhcp filter
mac-verify command. There are two fields of the DHCP packet containing
the MAC address of the Host. The MAC Verify feature is to compare the two
fields and discard the packet if the two fields are different.
Syntax
ip dhcp filter mac-verify
no ip dhcp filter mac-verify
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
376
Example
Enable the MAC Verify feature for the Gigabit Ethernet port 10/2:
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T1600G-28TS(config-if)#ip dhcp filter mac-verify
45.4 ip dhcp filter limit rate
Description
The ip dhcp filter limit rate command is used to enable the Flow Control
feature for the DHCP packets. The excessive DHCP packets will be discarded.
To restore to the default configuration, please use no ip dhcp filter limit rate
command.
Syntax
ip dhcp filter limit rate
value
no ip dhcp filter limit rate
Parameter
value
—— The value of Flow Control. The options are 5/10/15/20/25/30
(packet/second). The default value is 0, which stands for “disable”.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Set the Flow Control of GigabitEthernet port 2 as 20 pps:
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T1600G-28TS(config-if)#ip dhcp filter limit rate 20
377
45.5 ip dhcp filter decline rate
Description
The ip dhcp filter decline rate command is used to enable the Decline
Protect feature and configure the rate limit on DHCP Decine packets. The
excessive DHCP Decline packets will be discarded. To disable the Decline
Protect feature, please use no ip dhcp filter decline rate command.
Syntax
ip dhcp filter decline rate
value
no ip dhcp filter decline rate
Parameter
value
—— Specify the rate limit of DHCP Decline packets, and the optional
values are 0, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25 and 30 (units:packet/second). It default value is
0, which stands for “disable”.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the rate limit of DHCP Decline packets as 20 packets per second
on Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/2:
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T1600G-28TS(config-if)#ip dhcp filter decline 20
45.6 ip dhcp filter server permit-entry
Description
The ip dhcp filter server permit-entry command is used to add entry for the
legal DHCP server. To restore to the default option, please use no ip dhcp
snooping information strategy command.
378
Syntax
ip dhcp filter server permit-entry server-ip
ipAddr
client-mac
macAddr
interface { fastEthernet
port
| gigabitEthernet port | ten-gigabitEthernet
port
| interface port-channel
port-channel-id
}
no ip dhcp filter server permit-entry server-ip
ipAddr
client-mac
macAddr
interface { fastEthernet
port
| gigabitEthernet port | ten-gigabitEthernet
port
| interface port-channel
port-channel-id
}
Parameter
ipAddr
—— Specify the IP address of the legal DHCPv4 server.
macAddr
—— Specify the MAC address of the DHCP Client. The value “all”
means all client mac addresses.
port-list | port-channel-id
—— Specify the port that the legal DHCPv4 server
is connected to.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Create an entry for the legal DHCPv4 server whose IP address is
192.168.0.100 and connected port number is 1/0/1 without client MAC
address restricted:
T1600G-28TS(config)#ip dhcp filter server permit-entry server-ip
192.168.0.100 client-mac all interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
45.7 show ip dhcp filter
Description
The show ip dhcp filter command is used to display the configuration of
DHCP Filter.
Syntax
show ip dhcp filter
379
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the DHCP Filter configuration:
T1600G-28TS#show ip dhcp filter
45.8 show ip dhcp filter interface
Description
The show ip dhcp filter interface command is used to display the
configuration of DHCP Filter on ports.
Syntax
show ip dhcp filter interface [fastEthernet
port
| gigabitEthernet
port
|
ten-gigabitEthernet
port
| port-channel
port-channel-id
]
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the DHCP Filter configuration on port 1/0/3:
T1600G-28TS#show ip dhcp filter interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
45.9 show ip dhcp filter server permit-entry
Description
The show ip dhcp filter server permit-entry command is used to display the
legal server configuration.
Syntax
show ip dhcp filter server permit-entry
380
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the legal DHCP server configuration:
T1600G-28TS#show ip dhcp filter server permit-entry
381
Chapter 46 DHCPv6 Filter Commands
DHCPv6 Filter function allows the user to not only to restrict all DHCPv6 Server packets but
also to receive any specified DHCPv6 server packet by any specified DHCPv6 client, it is useful
when one or more DHCPv6 servers are present on the network and both provide DHCPv6
services to different distinct groups of clients.
46.1 ipv6 dhcp filter
Description
The ipv6 dhcp filter command is used to enable DHCP Filter function globally.
To disable DHCPv6 Filter function globally, please use no ipv6 dhcp filter
command.
Syntax
Ipv6 dhcp filter
no ipv6 dhcp filter
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the DHCPv6 Filter function globally:
T1600G-28TS(config)#ipv6 dhcp filter
46.2 ipv6 dhcp filter (interface)
Description
The ipv6 dhcp filter (interface) command is used to enable DHCPv6 Filter
function on a specified port. To disable DHCPv6v Filter function on this port,
please use no ipv6 dhcp filter (interface) command.
382
Syntax
ipv6 dhcp filter
no ipv6 dhcp filter
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the DHCPv6 Filter on port 1/0/1
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
T1600G-28TS(Config-if)#ipv6 dhcp filter
46.3 ipv6 dhcp filter limit rate
Description
The ipv6 dhcp filter limit rate command is used to enable the Flow Control
feature for the DHCPv6 packets. The excessive DHCPv6 packets will be
discarded. To restore to the default configuration, please use no ipv6 dhcp
filter limit rate command.
Syntax
Ipv6 dhcp filter limit rate
value
no ipv6 dhcp filter limit rate
Parameter
value
—— The value of Flow Control. The options are 5/10/15/20/25/30
(packet/second). The default value is 0, which stands for “disable”.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
383
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Set the Flow Control of GigabitEthernet port 2 as 20 pps:
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T1600G-28TS(config-if)#ipv6 dhcp filter limit rate 20
46.4 ipv6 dhcp filter decline rate
Description
The ipv6 dhcp filter decline rate command is used to enable the Decline
Protect feature and configure the rate limit on DHCP Decine packets. The
excessive DHCPv6 Decline packets will be discarded. To disable the Decline
Protect feature, please use no ipv6 dhcp filter decline rate command.
Syntax
Ipv6 dhcp filter decline rate
value
no ipv6 dhcp filter decline rate
Parameter
value
—— Specify the rate limit of DHCPv6 Decline packets, and the optional
values are 0, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25 and 30 (units:packet/second). It default value is
0, which stands for “disable”.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
384
Example
Configure the rate limit of DHCPv6 Decline packets as 20 packets per second
on Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/2:
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T1600G-28TS(config-if)#ipv6 dhcp filter decline 20
46.5 ipv6 dhcp filter server permit-entry
Description
The ipv6 dhcp filter server permit-entry command is used to add entry for
the legal DHCPv6 server. To restore to the default option, please use no ipv6
dhcp snooping information strategy command.
Syntax
Ipv6 dhcp filter server permit-entry server-ip
ipAddr
interface
{ fastEthernet
port
| gigabitEthernet port | ten-gigabitEthernet
port
|
interface port-channel
port-channel-id
}
no ipv6 dhcp filter server permit-entry server-ip
ipAddr
interface
{ fastEthernet
port
| gigabitEthernet port | ten-gigabitEthernet
port
|
interface port-channel
port-channel-id
}
Parameter
ipAddr
—— Specify the IPv6 address of the legal DHCPv6 server.
port-list | port-channel-id
—— Specify the port that the legal DHCPv6 server
is connected to.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Create an entry for the legal DHCPv6 server whose IP address is
192.168.0.100 and connected port number is 1/0/1:
T1600G-28TS(config)#ipv6 dhcp filter server permit-entry server-ip
2003::1 interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
385
46.6 show ipv6 dhcp filter
Description
The show ipv6 dhcp filter command is used to display the configuration of
DHCPv6 Filter.
Syntax
show ipv6 dhcp filter
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the DHCPv6 Filter configuration:
T1600G-28TS#show ipv6 dhcp filter
46.7 show ipv6 dhcp filter interface
Description
The show ipv6 dhcp filter interface command is used to display the
configuration of DHCPv6 Filter on ports.
Syntax
show ipv6 dhcp filter interface [fastEthernet
port
| gigabitEthernet
port
|
ten-gigabitEthernet
port
| port-channel
port-channel-id
]
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the DHCPv6 Filter configuration on port 1/0/3:
T1600G-28TS#show ipv6 dhcp filter interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
386
46.8 show ip dhcp filter server permit-entry
Description
The show ipv6 dhcp filter server permit-entry command is used to display
the legal server configuration.
Syntax
show ipv6 dhcp filter server permit-entry
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the legal DHCPv6 server configuration:
T1600G-28TS#show ipv6 dhcp filter server permit-entry
387
Chapter 47 DoS Defend Commands
DoS (Denial of Service) Attack is to occupy the network bandwidth maliciously by the network
attackers or the evil programs sending a lot of service requests to the Host. With the DoS
Defend enabled, the switch can analyze the specific field of the received packets and provide
the defend measures to ensure the normal working of the local network.
47.1 ip dos-prevent
Description
The ip dos-prevent command is used to enable the DoS defend function
globally. To disable the DoS defend function, please use no ip dos-prevent
command.
Syntax
ip dos-prevent
no ip dos-prevent
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the DoS defend function globally:
T1600G-28TS(config)#ip dos-prevent
47.2 ip dos-prevent type
Description
The ip dos-prevent type command is used to select the DoS Defend Type.
To disable the corresponding Defend Type, please use no ip dos-prevent
type command.
388
Syntax
ip dos-prevent type { land | scan-synfin | xma-scan | null-scan |
port-less-1024 | blat | ping-flood | syn-flood | win-nuke | ping-of-death |
smurf }
no ip dos-prevent type { land | scan-synfin | xma-scan | null-scan |
port-less-1024 | blat | ping-flood | syn-flood | win-nuke | ping-of-death |
smurf }
Parameter
land ——The attacker sends a specific fake SYN (synchronous) packet to the
destination host. Because both of the source IP address and the destination
IP address of the SYN packet are set to be the IP address of the host, the
host will be trapped in an endless circle of building the initial connection.
scan-synfin ——The attacker sends the packet with its SYN field and the FIN
field set to 1. The SYN field is used to request initial connection whereas the
FIN field is used to request disconnection. Therefore, the packet of this type
is illegal.
xma-scan ——The attacker sends the illegal packet with its TCP index, FIN,
URG and PSH field set to 1.
null-scan ——The attacker sends the illegal packet with its TCP index and all
the control fields set to 0. During the TCP connection and data transmission,
the packets with all control fields set to 0 are considered illegal.
port-less-1024 ——The attacker sends the illegal packet with its TCP SYN
field set to 1 and source port smaller than 1024.
blat ——The attacker sends the illegal packet with the same source port and
destination port on Layer 4 and with its URG field set to 1. Similar to the Land
Attack, the system performance of the attacked host is reduced because the
Host circularly attempts to build a connection with the attacker.
ping-flood ——The attacker floods the destination system with Ping packets,
creating a broadcast storm that makes it impossible for the system to
respond to legal communication.
syn-flood ——The attacker uses a fake IP address to send TCP request
packets to the server. Upon receiving the request packets, the server
responds with SYN-ACK packets. Since the IP address is fake, no response
will be returned. The server will keep on sending SYN-ACK packets. If the
attacker sends overflowing fake request packets, the network resource will
be occupied maliciously and the requests of the legal clients will be denied.
win-nuke ——Because the Operation System with bugs cannot correctly
process the URG (Urgent Pointer) of TCP packets, the attacker sends this
389
type of packets to the TCP port139 (NetBIOS) of the host with the Operation
System bugs, which will cause the host with a blue screen.
ping-of-death ——Ping of Death attack means that the attacker sends
abnormal ping packets larger than 65535 bytes to cause system crash on the
target computer.
smurf ——Smurf attack is a distributed denial-of-service attack in which large
numbers of Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) packets with the
intended victim’s spoofed source IP are broadcast to a computer network
using an IP broadcast address. Most devices on a network will, by default,
respond to this by sending a reply to the source IP address. If the number of
machines on the network that receive and respond to these packets is very
large, the victim’s computer will be flooded with traffic.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the DoS Defend Type named Land attack:
T1600G-28TS(config)#ip dos-prevent type land
47.3 show ip dos-prevent
Description
The show ip dos-prevent command is used to display the DoS information of
the detected DoS attack, including enable/disable status, the DoS Defend
Type, the count of the attack, etc.
Syntax
show ip dos-prevent
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
390
Example
Display the DoS information of the detected DoS attack globally:
T1600G-28TS(config)#show ip dos-prevent
391
Chapter 48 DLDP Commands
DLDP (Device Link Detection Protocol) is used to monitor the link state of fiber-optic or
twisted-pair Ethernet cables. When a unidirectional link is detected, the corresponding port will
be shut down automatically or manually (depending on the shut mode configured).
48.1 dldp (global)
Description
The dldp command is used to enable the DLDP function globally. To disable it,
please use no dldp command.
Syntax
dldp
no dldp
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable the DLDP function globally:
T1600G-28TS(config)# dldp
48.2 dldp interval
Description
The dldp interval command is used to define the interval of sending
advertisement packets on ports that are in the advertisement state.
Syntax
dldp interval
interval-time
Parameter
interval-time
—— The interval of sending advertisement packets. It ranges
from 1 to 30 seconds. By default, it is 5 seconds.
392
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Specify the interval of sending advertisement packets as 10 seconds:
T1600G-28TS(config)# dldp interval 10
48.3 dldp shut-mode
Description
The dldp shut-mode command is used to configure the shutdown mode
when a unidirectional link is detected.
Syntax
dldp shut-mode { auto
|
manual
}
Parameter
auto —— The switch automatically shuts down ports when a unidirectional
link is detected. By default, the shut-mode is auto
.
manual ——The switch displays an alert when a unidirectional link is detected.
The operation to shut down the unidirectional link ports is accomplished by
the users.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the shut-mode
as manual:
T1600G-28TS(config)# dldp shut-mode manual
393
48.4 dldp(interface)
Description
The dldp command is used to enable the DLDP function of the specified port.
To disable it, please use no dldp command.
Syntax
dldp
no dldp
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable the DLDP function of ports 1/0/2-4:
T1600G-28TS (config)# interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/2-4
T1600G-28TS (config-if-range)# dldp
48.5 show dldp
Description
The show dldp command is used to display the global configuration of DLDP
function such as DLDP global state, DLDP interval and shut mode.
Syntax
show dldp
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the global configuration of DLDP function:
394
T1600G-28TS# show dldp
48.6 show dldp interface
Description
The show dldp interface command is used to display the configuration and
state of the specified Ethernet port. By default, the configuration and state of
all the ports will be displayed.
Syntax
show dldp interface [gigabitEthernet
port
]
Parameter
port
—— The Gigabit Ethernet port number.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the configuration and state of all ports:
T1600G-28TS# show dldp interface
Display the configuration and state of port 1/0/5:
T1600G-28TS# show dldp interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5
395
Chapter 49 SNMP Commands
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) functions are used to manage the network
devices for a smooth communication, which can facilitate the network administrators to
monitor the network nodes and implement the proper operation.
49.1 snmp-server
Description
The snmp-server command is used to enable the SNMP function. By default,
it is disabled. To return to the default configuration, please use no
snmp-server command.
Syntax
snmp-server
no snmp-server
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable the SNMP function:
T1600G-28TS(config)# snmp-server
49.2 snmp-server view
Description
The snmp-server view command is used to add View. To delete the
corresponding View, please use no snmp-server view command. The OID
(Object Identifier) of the SNMP packets is used to describe the managed
objects of the switch, and the MIB (Management Information Base) is the set
of the OIDs. The SNMP View is created for the SNMP management station to
manage MIB objects.
Syntax
snmp-server view
name
mib-oid
{ include | exclude }
no snmp-server view
name
mib-oid
396
Parameter
name
—— The entry name of View, ranging from 1 to 16 characters. Each
View includes several entries with the same name.
mib-oid
—— MIB Object ID. It is the Object Identifier (OID) for the entry of
View, ranging from 1 to 61 characters.
include | exclude —— View Type, with include and exclude options. They
represent the view entry can/cannot be managed by the SNMP management
station individually.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Add a View named view1, configuring the OID as 1.3.6.1.6.3.20, and this OID
can be managed by the SNMP management station:
T1600G-28TS(config)# snmp-server view view1 1.3.6.1.6.3.20 include
49.3 snmp-server group
Description
The snmp-server group command is used to manage and configure the
SNMP group. To delete the corresponding SNMP group, please use no
snmp-server group command. SNMP v3 provides the VACM (View-based
Access Control Model) and USM (User-Based Security Model) mechanisms
for authentication. The users in the SNMP Group can manage the device via
the Read View, Write View and Notify View. And the authentication mode and
the privacy mode guarantee the high security for the communication
between the management station and the managed device.
Syntax
snmp-server group
name
[ smode v3 ] [ slev { noAuthNoPriv | authNoPriv |
authPriv }] [ read
read-view
] [ write
write-view
] [ notify
notify-view
]
no snmp-server group
name
smode v3 slev { noAuthNoPriv | authNoPriv |
authPriv }
Parameter
name
——The SNMP Group name, ranging from 1 to 16 characters. The
Group Name, Security Model and Security Level compose the identifier of the
397
SNMP Group. These three items of the Users in one group should be the
same.
v3 —— The security mode for the group, v3 indicates SNMPv3, the most
secure level.
slev —— The Security Level of SNMP v3 Group. There are three options,
including noAuthNoPriv (no authorization and no encryption), authNoPriv
(authorization and no encryption) and authPriv (authorization and encryption).
By default, the Security Level is noAuthNoPriv. There is no need to configure
this in SNMP v1 Mode and SNMP v2c Mode.
read-view
—— Select the View to be the Read View. The management access
is restricted to read-only, and changes cannot be made to the assigned
SNMP View.
write-view
—— Select the View to be the Write View. The management
access is writing only and changes can be made to the assigned SNMP View.
The View defined both as the Read View and the Write View can be read and
modified.
notify-view
—— Select the View to be the Notify View. The management
station can receive notification messages of the assigned SNMP view
generated by the switch's SNMP agent.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Add a group, and configure the name as group 1, the Security Model as SNMP
v3, the security level as authNoPriv, the management access to the assigned
View viewDefault as read-write, besides the notification messages sent by
View viewDefault can be received by Management station:
T1600G-28TS(config)# snmp-server group group1 smode v3 slev
authNoPriv read viewDefault write viewDefault notify viewDefault
Delete group 1:
T1600G-28TS(config)# no snmp-server group group1 smode v3 slev
authNoPriv
398
49.4 snmp-server user
Description
The snmp-server user command is used to add User. To delete the
corresponding User, please use no snmp-server user command. The User in
an SNMP Group can manage the switch via the management station software.
The User and its Group have the same security level and access right.
Syntax
snmp-server user
name
{ local | remote }
group-name
[ smode v3 ] [ slev
{ noAuthNoPriv | authNoPriv | authPriv }] [ cmode { none | MD5 | SHA }] [ cpwd
confirm-pwd
] [ emode { none | DES }] [ epwd
encrypt-pwd
]
no snmp-server user
name
Parameter
name
—— User Name, ranging from 1 to 16 characters.
local | remote —— User Type, with local and remote options. Local indicates
that the user is connected to a local SNMP engine, while remote means that
the user is connected to a remote SNMP engine. As the remote engine ID and
user password are used to compute the authentication and privacy digests,
before configuring a remote user, you need to set the remote engine ID first.
group-name
—— The Group Name of the User. The User is classified to the
corresponding Group according to its Group Name, Security Model and
Security Level.
v3 ——The security mode for the user. v3 indicates SNMPv3, the most
secure model.
slev —— The Security Level of SNMP v3 Group. There are three options,
including noAuthNoPriv (no authorization and no encryption), authNoPriv
(authorization and no encryption) and authPriv (authorization and encryption).
The security level from highest to lowest is: noAuthNoPriv, authNoPriv,
authPriv, and the default is noAuthNoPriv. The security level of the user
should not be lower than the group it belongs to.
cmode —— The Authentication Mode of the SNMP v3 User, with none, MD5
and SHA options. None indicates no authentication method is used, MD5
indicates the port authentication is performed via HMAC-MD5 algorithm and
SHA indicates the port authentication is performed via SHA (Secure Hash
Algorithm). SHA authentication mode has a higher security than MD5 mode.
By default, the Authentication Mode is “none”.
399
confirm-pwd
—— Authentication Password, ranging from 1 to 16 characters.
The question marks and spaces are not allowed. This password in the
configuration file will be displayed in the symmetric encrypted form.
emode —— The Privacy Mode of the SNMP v3 User, with none and DES
options. None indicates no privacy method is used, and DES indicates DES
encryption method is used. By default, the Privacy Mode is “none”.
encrypt-pwd
—— Privacy Password, ranging from 1 to 16 characters. The
question marks and spaces are not allowed. This password in the
configuration file will be displayed in the symmetric encrypted form.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Add Local User admin to Group group2, and configure the Security Model of
the user as v3, the Security Level of the group as authPriv, the Authentication
Mode of the user as MD5, the Authentication Password as 11111, the Privacy
Mode as DES, and the Privacy Password as 22222:
T1600G-28TS(config)# snmp-server user admin local group2 smode v3
slev authPriv cmode MD5 cpwd 11111 emode DES epwd 22222
49.5 snmp-server community
Description
The snmp-server community command is used to add Community. To
delete the corresponding Community, please use no snmp-server
community command. SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c adopt community name
authentication. The community name can limit access to the SNMP agent
from SNMP network management station, functioning as a password.
Syntax
snmp-server community
name
{ read-only | read-write }
mib-view
no snmp-server community
name
Parameter
name
—— Community Name, ranging from 1 to 16 characters.
read-only | read-write —— The access rights of the community, with
read-only and read-write options.
400
mib-view
—— The MIB View for the community to access.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Add community public, and the community has read-write management right
to View viewDefault:
T1600G-28TS(config)# snmp-server community public read-write
viewDefault
49.6 snmp-server host
Description
The snmp-server host command is used to add Notification. To delete the
corresponding Notification, please use no snmp-server host command.
Syntax
snmp-server host
ip
udp-port user-name
[ smode { v1 | v2c | v3 }] [ slev
{ noAuthNoPriv | authNoPriv | authPriv }] [ type { trap | inform }] [ retries
retries
]
[ timeout
timeout
]
no snmp-server host
ip user-name
Parameter
ip
—— The IP Address of the management Host. Both IPv4 and IPv6
addresses are supported, for example 192.168.0.100 or fe80::1234.
udp-port
—— UDP port, which is used to send notifications. The UDP port
functions with the IP address for the notification sending. It ranges from 1 to
65535.
user-name
—— The User name of the management station.
smode —— The Security Model of the management station, with v1, v2c and
v3 options. By default, the option is v1.
slev —— The Security Level of SNMP v3 Group. There are three options,
including noAuthNoPriv (no authorization and no encryption), authNoPriv
(authorization and no encryption) and authPriv (authorization and encryption).
By default, the option is “noAuthNoPriv”.
401
type —— The type of the notifications, with trap and inform options. Trap
indicates traps are sent, while inform indicates informs are sent. The inform
type has a higher security than the trap type and resend and timeout need to
be configured if you select this option. You can only select the trap type in
Security Model v1. By default, the type of the notifications is “trap”.
retries
—— The amount of times the switch retries an inform request, ranging
from 1 to 255. The switch will resend the inform request if it doesn’t get the
response from the management station during the Timeout interval, and it will
terminate resending the inform request if the resending times reach the
specified Retry times.
timeout
—— The maximum time for the switch to wait for the response from
the management station before resending a request, ranging from 1 to 3600
in seconds.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Add a Notification entry, and configure the IP address of the management
Host as 192.168.0.146, the UDP port as 162, the User name of the
management station as admin, the Security Model of the management station
as v2c, the type of the notifications as inform, the maximum time for the
switch to wait as 1000 seconds, and the retries time as 100:
T1600G-28TS(config)# snmp-server host 192.168.0.146 162 admin smode
v2c type inform retries 100 timeout 1000
Add a Notification entry, and configure the IP Address of the management
Host as fe80::1234, the UDP port as 162, the User name of the management
station as admin, the Security Model of the management station as v2c, the
type of the notifications as inform, the maximum time for the switch to wait as
1000 seconds, and the retries time as 100:
T1600G-28TS(config)# snmp-server host fe80::1234 162 admin smode v2c
type inform retries 100 timeout 1000
402
49.7 snmp-server engineID
Description
The snmp-server engineID command is used to configure the local and
remote engineID of the switch. To restore to the default setting, please use
no snmp-server engineID command.
Syntax
snmp-server engineID { [ local
local-engineID
] [ remote
remote-engineID
] }
no snmp-server engineID
Parameter
local-engineID
—— Local Engine ID for local clients. The Engine ID is a unique
alphanumeric string used to identify the SNMP engine on the switch. Its
length ranges from 10 to 64 hexadecimal characters, which must be even
number meanwhile.
remote-engineID
—— Remote Engine ID for the switch. The Engine ID is a
unique alphanumeric string used to identify the SNMP engine on the remote
device which receives informs from the switch. Its length ranges from 10 to
64 hexadecimal characters, which must be even number meanwhile. The
snmp-server engineID will be disabled if the local and remote are both not
configured.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Specify the local engineID as 1234567890, and the remote engineID as
abcdef123456:
T1600G-28TS(config)# snmp-server engineID local 1234567890 remote
abcdef123456
49.8 snmp-server traps snmp
Description
The snmp-server traps snmp command is used to enable SNMP standard
traps which include four types: linkup, linkdown, warmstart and coldstart. The
command without parameter enables all SNMP standard traps. All SNMP
403
standard traps are enabled by default. To disable the sending of SNMP
standard traps, please use no snmp-server traps snmp command.
Syntax
snmp-server traps snmp [ linkup | linkdown | warmstart | coldstart |
auth-failure ]
no snmp-server traps snmp [ linkup | linkdown | warmstart | coldstart |
auth-failure ]
Parameter
linkup —— Indicates a port status changes from linkdown to linkup, and can
be triggered when you connect a device to a port.
linkdown —— Indicates a port status changes from linkup to linkdown, and
can be triggered when you disconnect a device to a port.
warmstart —— Indicates the SNMP feature on the switch is reinitialized with
the physical configuration unchanged. The trap can be triggered if you
disable and then enable SNMP after the SNMP is completely configured and
enabled.
coldstart —— Indicates an SNMP initialization caused by the reinitialization of
the switch system. The trap can be triggered when you reboot the switch.
auth-failure —— Triggered when a received SNMP request fails the
authentication.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable SNMP standard linkup trap for the switch:
T1600G-28TS(config)# snmp-server traps snmp linkup
49.9 snmp-server traps
Description
The snmp-server traps command is used to enable SNMP extended traps.
To disable the sending of SNMP extended traps, please use no snmp-server
traps command. All SNMP extended traps are disabled by default.
404
Syntax
snmp-server traps { rate-limit | cpu | flash | lldp remtableschange | lldp
topologychange | loopback-detection | storm-control | spanning-tree |
memory }
no snmp-server traps { bandwidth-control | cpu | flash | lldp
remtableschange | lldp topologychange | loopback-detection | storm-control
| spanning-tree | memory }
Parameter
rate-limit ——Monitors whether the bandwidth has reached the limit you have
set. The trap can be triggered when the Rate Limit feature is enabled and
packets are sent to the port with a rate higher than what you have set.
cpu ——Monitors the load status of the switch CPU. The trap can be
triggered when the utilization rate of the CPU has exceeded the limit that you
have set. The limit of CPU utilization rate for the switch is 80% by default.
flash ——Triggered when flash is modified during operations such as backup,
reset, firmware upgrade, configuration import, and so on.
lldp remtableschange ——An lldp RemTablesChange notification is sent
when the value of lldp StatsRemTableLastChangeTime changes. It can be
utilized by an NMS host to trigger LLDP remote systems table maintenance
polls.
lldp topologychange ——A notification generated by the local device to
sense the change in the topology that indicates a new remote device
attached to a local port, or a remote device disconnected or moved from one
port to another.
loopback-detection ——The feature is used to detect loopbacks. And the
trap is disabled by default. The system will generate the trap when a loopback
is detected or cleared.
storm-control ——The feature is used to monitor network storms. And the
trap is disabled by default. The system will generate the trap when the rate of
broadcast or multicast reaches the limit of storm control.
spanning-tree ——The feature is used to monitor the spanning tree status.
And the trap is disabled by default. The system will generate the trap in the
following situations: a port changes from non-forwarding state to forwarding
state or the other way round; a port receives a packet with TC flag or a TCN
packet.
405
memory ——The feature is used to monitor the memory. And the trap is
disabled by default. The system will generate the trap when the memory
utilization exceeds 80%.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable SNMP extended bandwidth-control trap for the switch:
T1600G-28TS(config)# snmp-server traps bandwidth-control
49.10 snmp-server traps ddm
Note: Only T1600G-28TS supports DDM traps.
Description
The snmp-server traps ddm command is used to enable the corresponding
DDM traps. DDM function is used to monitor the status of the SFP modules
inserted into the SFP ports on the switch. The command without parameter
enables all SNMP DDM traps. To disable the sending of SNMP DDM traps, use
no snmp-server traps ddm command. All DDM traps are disabled by default.
Syntax
snmp-server traps ddm [ temperature | voltage | bias_current | tx_power |
rx_power ]
no snmp-server traps ddm [ temperature | voltage | bias_current | tx_power |
rx_power ]
Parameter
temperature ——Monitors the temperature of SFP modules inserted into the
SFP ports on the switch. The trap can be triggered when the temperature of
any SFP module has reached the warning or alarm threshold.
voltage ——Monitors the voltage of SFP modules inserted into the SFP ports
on the switch. The trap can be triggered when the voltage of any SFP module
has reached the warning or alarm threshold.
bias_current ——Monitors the bias current of SFP modules inserted into the
SFP ports on the switch. The trap can be triggered when the bias current of
any SFP module has reached the warning or alarm threshold.
406
tx_power ——Monitors the TX Power of SFP modules inserted into the SFP
ports on the switch. The trap can be triggered when the TX Power of any SFP
module has reached the warning or alarm threshold.
rx_power ——Monitors the RX Power of SFP modules inserted into the SFP
ports on the switch. The trap can be triggered when the RX Power of any SFP
module has reached the warning or alarm threshold.
User guidelines
The snmp-server traps ddm command without any parameter is used to
enable all the types of DDM traps. And the no snmp-server traps ddm
command without any parameter is used to disable all the types of DDM
traps.
For more instructions about the alarm threshold or warning threshold, refer to
Chapter 11 DDM Commands.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Example
Enable all the SNMP DDM traps for the switch:
T1600G-28TS(config)# snmp-server traps ddm
49.11 snmp-server traps vlan
Description
The snmp-server traps vlan command is used to enable the corresponding
VLAN traps. The command without parameter enables all SNMP VLAN traps.
To disable this function, please use no snmp-server traps vlan command. All
VLAN traps are disabled by default.
Syntax
snmp-server traps vlan [ create | delete ]
no snmp-server traps vlan [create | delete ]
Parameter
create ——Triggered when certain VLANs are created successfully.
delete ——Triggered when certain VLANs are deleted successfully.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
407
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable all SNMP extended VLAN-related traps for the switch：
T1600G-28TS(config)# snmp-server traps vlan
Enable VLAN-created trap only for the switch:
T1600G-28TS(config)# snmp-server traps vlan create
49.12 snmp-server traps security
Description
The snmp-server traps security command is used to enable the
corresponding security traps. To disable this feature, please use no
snmp-server traps security command. All security traps are disabled by
default.
Syntax
snmp-server traps security { dhcp-filter | ip-mac-binding | acl }
no snmp-server traps security { dhcp-filter | ip-mac-binding }
Parameter
dhcp-filter —— Triggered when the DHCPv4 Filter feature is enabled and the
switch receives DHCP packets from an illegal DHCP server.
ip-mac-binding —— Triggered when the ARP Inspection feature is enabled
and the switch receives an illegal ARP packet, or the IPv4 Source Guard
feature is enabled and the switch receives an illegal IP packet.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable the DHCP filter trap for the switch：
T1600G-28TS(config)# snmp-server traps security dhcp-filter
408
49.13 snmp-server traps acl
Description
The snmp-server traps acl command is used to enable the ACL trap. To
disable this feature, please use no snmp-server traps acl command. It is
disabled by default.
The trap monitors matched ACL information, including the matched ACL ID,
rule ID and the number of the matched packets. With both this trap and the
Logging feature in ACL rule settings enabled, the switch will check the
matched ACL information every five minutes and send SNMP traps if there is
any updated information.
Syntax
snmp-server traps acl
no snmp-server traps acl
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable the ACL trap for the switch：
T1600G-28TS(config)# snmp-server traps acl
49.14 snmp-server traps ip
Description
The snmp-server traps ip command is used to enable IP traps. To disable
this feature, please use no snmp-server traps ip command. All IP traps are
disabled by default.
Syntax
snmp-server traps ip { change | duplicate }
no snmp-server traps ip { change | duplicate }
Parameter
change —— Triggered when the DHCPv4 Filter feature is enabled and the
switch receives DHCP packets from an illegal DHCP server.
duplicate —— Triggered when the ARP Inspection feature is enabled and the
switch receives an illegal ARP packet, or the IPv4 Source Guard feature is
enabled and the switch receives an illegal IP packet.
409
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable the IP-Change trap for the switch：
T1600G-28TS(config)# snmp-server traps ip change
49.15 snmp-server traps power
Note: Only T1600G-28MPS supports this command.
Description
The snmp-server traps power command is used to enable PoE traps. The
command without parameter enables all PoE traps. To disable this feature,
please use no snmp-server traps power command. All PoE traps are
disabled by default.
Syntax
snmp-server traps power [over-max-pwr-budget | port-pwr-change |
port-pwr-deny | port-pwr-over-30w | port-pwr-overload | port-short-circuit |
thermal-shutdown ]
no snmp-server traps power [over-max-pwr-budget | port-pwr-change |
port-pwr-deny | port-pwr-over-30w | port-pwr-overload | port-short-circuit |
thermal-shutdown ]
Parameter
over-max-pwr-budget ——Triggered when the total power required by the
connected PDs exceeds the maximum power the PoE switch can supply.
port-pwr-change ——Triggered when the total power required by the
connected PDs exceeds the maximum power the PoE switch can supply.
port-pwr-deny ——Triggered when the switch powers off PDs on low-priority
PoE ports. When the total power required by the connected PDs exceeds the
system power limit, the switch will power off PDs on low-priority PoE ports to
ensure stable running of the other PDs.
port-pwr-over-30w ——Triggered when the power required by the
connected PD exceeds 30 watts.
port-pwr-overload ——Triggered when the power required by the connected
PD exceeds the maximum power the port can supply.
410
port-short-circuit ——Triggered when a short circuit is detected on a port.
thermal-shutdown ——Triggered when the PSE chip overheats. The switch
will stop supplying power in this case.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable all PoE traps for the switch：
T1600G-28MPS(config)# snmp-server traps power
49.16 snmp-server traps link-status
Description
The snmp-server traps link-status command is used to enable SNMP link
status trap for the specified port. To disable the sending of SNMP link status
trap, please use no snmp-server traps link-status command. By default, it is
disabled.
Syntax
snmp-server traps link-status
no snmp-server traps link-status
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable SNMP link status trap for port 3:
T1600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
T1600G-28TS(config-if)# snmp-server traps link-status
411
49.17 rmon history
Description
The rmon history command is used to configure the history sample entry. To
return to the default configuration, please use no rmon history command.
RMON (Remote Monitoring), basing on SNMP architecture, functions to
monitor the network. History Group is one of the commonly used RMON
Groups. After a history group is configured, the switch collects network
statistics information periodically, based on which the management station
can monitor network effectively.
Syntax
rmon history
index
interface gigabitEthernet
port
[ interval
interval
]
[ owner
owner-name
] [ buckets
number
]
no rmon history
index
Parameter
index
—— The index number of the entry, ranging from 1 to 12, in the format
of 1-3,5.
port
——The Ethernet port number.
interval
—— The interval to take samplings from the port, ranging from 10 to
3600 in seconds. By default, it is 1800.
owner-name
—— The owner of the history sample entry, ranging from 1 to 16
characters. By default, it is “monitor”.
number
—— The maximum number of buckets desired for the RMON history
group of statistics, ranging from 1 to 130. The default is 50 buckets.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the sample port as Gi1/0/2 and the sample interval as 100 seconds
for the entry 1-3:
T1600G-28TS(config)# rmon history 1-3 interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
interval 100 owner owner1
412
49.18 rmon event
Description
The rmon event command is used to configure the entries of SNMP-RMON
Event. To return to the default configuration, please use no rmon event
command. Event Group, as one of the commonly used RMON Groups, is used
to define RMON events. Alarms occur when an event is detected.
Syntax
rmon event
index
[ user
user-name
] [ description
descript
] [ type { none |
log | notify | log-notify }] [ owner
owner-name
]
no rmon event
index
Parameter
index
—— The index number of the event entry, ranging from 1 to 12. You can
only select one entry for each command.
user-name
—— The name of the User to which the event belongs, ranging
from 1 to 16 characters. By default, it is “public”.
descript
—— The description of the event, ranging from 1 to 16 characters.
By default, it is empty.
type —— The event type, with none, log, notify and both options. None
indicates no processing, log indicates logging the event, notify indicates
sending trap messages to the management station, and both indicates
logging the event and sending trap messages to the management station.
owner-name
—— The owner of the event entry, ranging from 1 to 16
characters. By default, it is “monitor”.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the user name of entry 1, 2, 3 and 4 as user1, the description of the
event as description1, the type of event as log and the owner of the event as
owner1:
T1600G-28TS(config)# rmon event 1-4 user user1 description description1
type log owner owner1
413
49.19 rmon alarm
Description
The rmon alarm command is used to configure SNMP-RMON Alarm
Management. To return to the default configuration, please use no rmon
alarm command. Alarm Group is one of the commonly used RMON Groups.
RMON alarm management allows monitoring the specific alarm variables.
When the value of a monitored variable exceeds the threshold, an alarm event
is generated, which triggers the switch to act in the set way.
Syntax
rmon alarm
index
{ stats-index
sindex
} [ alarm-variable { revbyte | revpkt |
bpkt | mpkt | crc-lign | undersize | oversize | jabber | collision | 64 | 65-127 |
128-511 | 512-1023 | 1024-10240 }] [ s-type { absolute | delta} ]
[ rising-threshold
r-hold
] [ rising-event-index
r-event
] [ falling-threshold
f-hold
] [ falling-event-index
f-event
] [ a-type {rise | fall | all} ] [ owner
owner-name
] [ interval
interval
]
no rmon alarm
index
Parameter
index
—— The index number of the Alarm Management entry, ranging from 1
to 12, in the format of 1-3,5.
sindex
—— Specify the statistics index.
alarm-variable —— The alarm variable. By default, the option is revbyte.
s-type
—— Sample Type, which is the sampling method for the selected
variable and comparing the value against the thresholds. There are two
options, absolute and delta. Absolute indicates comparing the values directly
with the thresholds at the end of the sampling interval. Delta indicates
subtracting the last sampled value from the current value, and then
comparing the difference in the values with the threshold. By default, the
Sample Type is absolute.
r-hold
—— The rising counter value that triggers the Rising Threshold alarm,
ranging from 1 to 2147483647. By default, it is 100.
r-event
—— Rise Event, which is the index of the corresponding event which
will be triggered if the sampled value is larger than the Rising Threshold. It
ranges from 1 to 12.
f-hold
—— The falling counter value that triggers the Falling Threshold alarm,
ranging from 1 to 2147483647. By default, it is 100.
414
f-event
—— Fall Event, which is the index of the corresponding event which
will be triggered if the sampled value is lower than the Falling Threshold. It
ranges from 1 to 12.
a-type —— Alarm Type, with rise, fall and all options. Rise indicates that the
alarm event will be triggered when the sampled value exceeds the Rising
Threshold, fall indicates that the alarm event will be triggered when the
sampled value is under the Falling Threshold, and all indicates that the alarm
event will be triggered either the sampled value exceeds the Rising Threshold
or is under the Falling Threshold. By default, the Alarm Type is all.
owner-name
—— The owner of the entry, ranging from 1 to 16 characters. By
default, it is monitor.
interval
—— The alarm interval time, ranging from 10 to 3600 in seconds. By
default, it is 1800.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure rmon alarm entries 1-3 binding with statistics entry 2, the owners
as owner1 and the alarm intervals as 100 seconds:
T1600G-28TS(config)#rmon alarm 1-3 stats-index 2 owner owner1 interval
100
49.20 rmon statistics
Description
The rmon statistics command is used to configure the entries of
SNMP-RMON statistics. To delete the corresponding entry, please use no
rmon statistics command. The maximum supported entries are 1000.
Syntax
rmon statistics
index
interface gigabitEthernet
port
[ owner
owner-name
]
[ status { underCreation | valid }]
no rmon statistics
index
Parameter
index
—— The index number of the statistics entry, ranging from 1 to 65535,
in the format of 1-3,5.
415
port
—— The statistics port number, in the format of 1/0/1.
owner-name
—— The creator of the event entry, ranging from 1 to 16
characters. By default, it is “monitor”.
status —— The status of the statistics entry, either “underCreation” or
“valid”. “underCreation” means this entry won’t take effect until it is modified
to “valid”; “valid” means this entry takes effect immediately after it is created.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the statistics entries 1-3 with the statistics port as 1/0/1, owner as
owner1 and status as valid:
T1600G-28TS(config)#rmon statistics 1-3 interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
owner owner1 status valid
49.21 show snmp-server
Description
The show snmp-server command is used to display SNMP configuration
globally.
Syntax
show snmp-server
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Display SNMP configuration globally:
T1600G-28TS# show snmp-server
49.22 show snmp-server view
Description
The show snmp-server view command is used to display the View table.
416
Syntax
show snmp-server view
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Display the View table:
T1600G-28TS# show snmp-server view
49.23 show snmp-server group
Description
The show snmp-server group command is used to display the Group table.
Syntax
show snmp-server group
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Display the Group table:
T1600G-28TS# show snmp-server group
49.24 show snmp-server user
Description
The show snmp-server user command is used to display the User table.
Syntax
show snmp-server user
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
417
Example
Display the User table:
T1600G-28TS# show snmp-server user
49.25 show snmp-server community
Description
The show snmp-server community command is used to display the
Community table.
Syntax
show snmp-server community
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Display the Community table:
T1600G-28TS# show snmp-server community
49.26 show snmp-server host
Description
The show snmp-server host command is used to display the Host table.
Syntax
show snmp-server host
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Display the Host table:
T1600G-28TS# show snmp-server host
418
49.27 show snmp-server engineID
Description
The show snmp-server engineID command is used to display the engineID
of the SNMP.
Syntax
show snmp-server engineID
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Display the engineID:
T1600G-28TS# show snmp-server engineID
49.28 show rmon history
Description
The show rmon history command is used to display the configuration of the
history sample entry.
Syntax
show rmon history [
index
]
Parameter
index
—— The index number of the entry selected to display the
configuration, ranging from 1 to 12, in the format of 1-3, 5. You can select
more than one entry for each command. By default, the configuration of all
history sample entries is displayed.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Display the configuration of all history sample entries:
T1600G-28TS# show rmon history
419
49.29 show rmon event
Description
The show rmon event command is used to display the configuration of
SNMP-RMON Event.
Syntax
show rmon event [
index
]
Parameter
index
—— The index number of the entry selected to display the
configuration, ranging from 1 to 12, in the format of 1-3, 5. You can select
more than one entry for each command. By default, the configuration of all
SNMP-RMON enabled entries is displayed.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Display the Event configuration of entry1-4:
T1600G-28TS# show rmon event 1-4
49.30 show rmon alarm
Description
The show rmon alarm command is used to display the configuration of the
Alarm Management entry.
Syntax
show rmon alarm [
index
]
Parameter
index
—— The index number of the entry selected to display the
configuration, ranging from 1 to 12, in the format of 1-3, 5. You can select
more than one entry for each command. By default, the configuration of all
Alarm Management entries is displayed.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
420
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Display the configuration of the Alarm Management entry 1-2:
T1600G-28TS# show rmon alarm 1-2
49.31 show rmon statistics
Description
The show rmon statistics command is used to display the configuration of
the specified statistics entry.
Syntax
show rmon statistics [
index
]
Parameter
index
—— The index number of the statistics entry selected to display the
configuration, ranging from 1 to 65535. By default, the configuration of all
statistics entries is displayed.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Display the configuration of the statistics entry 1:
T1600G-28TS#show rmon statistics 1
421
Chapter 50 PoE Commands
Note: Only T1600G-28MPS supports PoE function.
PoE (Power over Ethernet) technology describes a system to transmit electrical power along
with data to remote devices over standard twisted-pair cable in an Ethernet network. It is
especially useful for supplying power to IP telephones, wireless LAN access points, cameras
and so on.
50.1 power inline consumption (global)
Description
The power inline consumption command is used to configure the max
power the PoE switch can supply globally.
Syntax
power inline consumption
power-limit
Parameter
power-limit
——The max power the PoE switch can supply, ranging from 1 to
384w. By default, the value is 384.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Configure the max power the PoE switch can supply as 160w:
T1600G-28PS(config)# power inline consumption 160
50.2 power profile
Description
The power profile command is used to create a PoE profile for the switch. To
delete the configured PoE profile configuration, please use no power profile
command. PoE Profile is a short cut for the configuration of the PoE port. In a
PoE profile, the PoE status, PoE priority and power limit are configured. You
can specify a PoE profile for each PoE port individually.
422
Syntax
power profile
name
[supply {enable | disable} [priority {low | middle | high}
[consumption {
power-limit
| auto | class1 | class2 | class3 | class4 } ] ] ]
no power profile
name
Parameter
name
—— The PoE profile name, ranging from 1 to 16 characters. If the name
being assigned contains spaces then put it inside double quotes.
supply —— The PoE status of the port in the profile. By default, the PoE
status is “enable”.
priority —— The PoE priority of the port in the profile. The priority levels
include “high”, “middle” and “low” in descending order. When the supply
power exceeds the system power limit, the PD linked to the port with lower
priority will be disconnected. By default, the PoE priority is “low”.
consumption
—— The max power the port in the profile can supply, with five
options: “power-limit”, “auto”, ”class1”, “class2”, “class3” and “class4”.
“Power-limit” indicates you can manually enter a value ranging from 1 to 300.
The value is in the unit of 0.1 watt. For instance, if you want to configure the
max power as 5w, you should enter 50. “Auto” indicates the value is assigned
automatically by the PoE switch. “Class1” represents 4w. “Class2” represents
7w. “Class3” represents 15.4w. “Class4” represents 30w.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Create a PoE profile named “IP Camera” whose PoE status is “enable”, PoE
priority is “low” and the power limit is “5w”:
T1600G-28PS(config)# power profile “IP Camera” supply enable priority
low consumption 50
50.3 power inline consumption (interface)
Description
The power inline consumption command is used to configure the power limit
the corresponding port can supply.
423
Syntax
power inline consumption {
power-limit
| auto | class1 | class2 | class3 |
class4 }
Parameter
power-limit
—— The max power the port in the profile can supply, with five
options: “power-limit”, “auto”, ”class1”, “class2”, “class3” and “class4”.
“Power-limit” indicates you can manually enter a value ranging from 1 to 300.
The value is in the unit of 0.1 watt. For instance, if you want to configure the
max power as 5w, you should enter 50. “Auto” indicates the value is assigned
automatically by the PoE switch. “Class1” represents 4w. “Class2” represents
7w. “Class3” represents 15.4w. “Class4” represents 30w.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Configure the power limit as “5w” for port 2:
T1600G-28PS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T1600G-28PS(config-if)# power inline consumption 50
50.4 power inline priority
Description
The power inline priority command is used to configure the PoE priority for
the corresponding port
Syntax
power inline priority { low | middle | high }
Parameter
priority —— The PoE priority of the port. The priority levels include “high”,
“middle” and “low” in descending order. When the supply power exceeds the
system power limit, the PD linked to the port with lower priority will be
disconnected. By default, the priority level is “low”.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
424
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Configure the PoE priority as “low” for port 2:
T1600G-52PS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T1600G-52PS(config-if)# power inline priority low
50.5 power inline supply
Description
The power inline supply command is used to configure the PoE status of the
corresponding port.
Syntax
power inline supply { enable | disable }
Parameter
enable | disable —— The PoE status of the port. By default, the PoE status is
“enable”.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Enable the PoE feature for port 2:
T1600G-28PS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T1600G-28PS(config-if)# power inline supply enable
50.6 power inline profile
Description
The power inline profile command is used to bind a PoE profile to the
corresponding port. To cancel the bind relation, please use no power inline
profile command.
425
Syntax
power inline profile
name
no power inline profile
Parameter
name
—— The name of the PoE profile to be bound to the port. If the name
being assigned contains spaces then put it inside double quotes.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Bind the PoE profile named “IP Camera” to port 2:
T1600G-28PS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T1600G-28PS(config-if)# power inline profile “IP Camera”
50.7 power inline time-range
Description
The power inline time-range command is used to bind a PoE time-range to
the corresponding port. To cancel the bind relation, please use no power
inline time-range command.
Syntax
power inline time-range
name
no power inline time-range
Parameter
name
—— The name of the PoE time-range to be bound to the port.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Bind the PoE time-range named “tRange2" to port 2:
426
T1600G-28PS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T1600G-28PS(config-if)# power inline time-range tRange2
50.8 show power inline
Description
The show power inline command is used to display the global PoE
information of the system.
Syntax
show power inline
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the PoE information of the system:
T1600G-28PS# show power inline
50.9 show power inline configuration interface
Description
The show power inline configuration interface command is used to display
the PoE configuration of the certain port.
Syntax
show power inline configuration interface [ gigabitEthernet
port
]
Parameter
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the PoE configuration of all ports:
427
T1600G-28PS# show power inline configuration interface
50.10 show power inline information interface
Description
The show power inline information command is used to display the PoE
information of the certain port.
Syntax
show power inline information interface [ gigabitEthernet port ]
Parameter
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the PoE information of all ports:
T1600G-28PS# show power inline information interface
50.11 show power profile
Description
The show power profile command is used to display the defined PoE profile.
Syntax
show power profile
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the defined PoE profile:
T1600G-28PS# show power profile
428
Chapter 51 ARP Inspection Commands
ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) Detect function is to protect the switch from the ARP
cheating, such as the Network Gateway Spoofing and Man-In-The-Middle Attack, etc.
51.1 ip arp inspection
Description
The ip arp inspection command is used to enable the ARP Detection
function globally. To disable the ARP Detection function, please use no ip arp
detection command.
Syntax
ip arp inspection
no ip arp inspection
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the ARP Detection function globally:
T1600G-28TS(config)#ip arp inspection
51.2 ip arp inspection validate
Description
The ip arp inspection validate command is used to enable the switch to
check whether the reveided ARP packet is illegal. To disable,the feature
please use no ip arp detection validate command.
Syntax
ip arp inspection validate { src-mac | dst-mac | ip }
no ip arp inspection validate { src-mac | dst-mac | ip }
429
Syntax
src-mac —— Enable the switch to check whether the source MAC address
and the sender MAC address are the same when receiving an ARP packet. If
not, the ARP packet will be discarded.
dst-mac —— Enable the switch to check whether the sender IP address of all
ARP packets and the target IP address of ARP reply packets are legal. The
illegal packets will be discarded.
ip —— Enable or disable the switch to check whether the sender IP address
of all ARP packets and the target IP address of ARP reply packets are legal.
The illegal packets will be discarded.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the switch to check whether the source MAC address and the sender
MAC address are the same when receiving an ARP packet
T1600G-28TS(config)#ip arp inspection validate src-mac
51.3 ip arp inspection vlan
Description
The ip arp inspection vlan command is used to enable the ARP Detection
function on VLANs. To disable the ARP Detection function on VLANs, please
use no ip arp detection vlan command.
Syntax
ip arp inspection vlan
vlan-list
no ip arp inspection vlan
vlan-list
Syntax
vlan-list
—— Enter the VLAN ID. The format is 1,5-9.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
430
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the ARP Detection function on VLAN 2:
T1600G-28TS(config)#ip arp inspection vlan 2
51.4 ip arp inspection vlan logging
Description
The ip arp inspection vlan logging command is used to enable the Log
function on the specific VLAN. To disable the Log function on the VLAN,
please use no ip arp detection vlan logging command.
Syntax
ip arp inspection vlan
vlan-list
logging
no ip arp inspection vlan
vlan-list
logging
Syntax
vlan-list
—— Enter the VLAN ID. The format is 1,5-9.
logging —— Enable the Log feature to make the switch generate a log when
an ARP packet is discarded.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the log feature on VLAN 2:
T1600G-28TS(config)#ip arp inspection vlan 2 logging
431
51.5 ip arp inspection trust
Description
The ip arp inspection trust command is used to configure the port for which
the ARP Detect function is unnecessary as the Trusted Port. To clear the
Trusted Port list, please use no ip arp detection trust command .The specific
ports, such as up-linked port and routing port and LAG port, should be set as
Trusted Port. To ensure the normal communication of the switch, please
configure the ARP Trusted Port before enabling the ARP Detect function.
Syntax
ip arp inspection trust
no ip arp inspection trust
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the Gigabit Ethernet ports 1/0/2-5 as the Trusted Port:
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/2-5
T1600G-28TS(config-if-range)#ip arp inspection trust
51.6 ip arp inspection limit-rate
Description
The ip arp inspection limit-rate command is used to configure the ARP
speed of a specified port. To restore to the default speed, please use no ip
arp inspection limit-rate command.
Syntax
ip arp inspection limit-rate
value
no ip arp inspection limit-rate
432
Parameter
value
——The value to specify the maximum amount of the received ARP
packets per second, ranging from 1 to 300 in pps(packet/second). By default,
the value is 100.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the maximum amount of the received ARP packets per second as
50 pps for Gigabit Ethernet port 5:
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5
T1600G-28TS(config-if)#ip arp inspection limit-rate 50
51.7 ip arp inspection burst-interval
Description
The ip arp inspection burst-interval command is used to configure the burst
interval of a specified port. To restore to the default speed, please use no ip
arp inspection burst-interval command.
Syntax
ip arp inspection burst-interval
value
no ip arp inspection burst-interval
Parameter
value
—— Specify a time range. If the speed of received ARP packets in this
time range reaches the limit for this time range, the port will be shut down.
The valid values are from 1 to 15 seconds, and the default value is 1 second.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
433
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the burst interval as 2 seconds for Gigabit Ethernet port 5:
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5
T1600G-28TS(config-if)#ip arp inspection burst-interval 2
51.8 ip arp inspection recover
Description
The ip arp inspection recover command is used to restore a port to the ARP
transmit status from the ARP filter status.
Syntax
ip arp inspection recover
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Restore Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/5 to the ARP transmit status:
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5
T1600G-28TS(config-if)#ip arp inspection recover
51.9 show ip arp inspection
Description
The show ip arp inspection command is used to display the ARP detection
global configuration including the enable/disable status and the Trusted Port
list.
434
Syntax
show ip arp inspection
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the ARP detection configuration globally:
T1600G-28TS(config)#show ip arp inspection
51.10 show ip arp inspection interface
Description
The show ip arp inspection interface command is used to display the
interface configuration of ARP detection.
Syntax
show ip arp inspection interface [ gigabitEthernet
port
]
Parameter
port
——The Ethernet port number.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the configuration of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1:
T1600G-28TS(config)#show ip arp inspection interface gigabitEthernet
1/0/1
Display the configuration of all Ethernet ports:
T1600G-28TS(config)#show ip arp inspection interface
435
51.11 show ip arp inspection vlan
Description
The show ip arp inspection vlan command is used to display the VLAN
configuration of ARP detection.
Syntax
show ip arp inspection vlan
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the ARP Inspection configuration of VLAN:
T1600G-28TS(config)#show ip arp inspection vlan
51.12 show ip arp inspection statistics
Description
The show ip arp inspection statistics command is used to display the
number of the illegal ARP packets received.
Syntax
show ip arp inspection statistics
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the number of the illegal ARP packets received:
T1600G-28TS(config)#show ip arp inspection statistics
436
51.13 clear ip arp inspection statistics
Description
The clear ip arp inspection statistics command is used to clear the statistic
of the illegal ARP packets received.
Syntax
clear ip arp inspection statistics
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Clear the statistic of the illegal ARP packets received:
T1600G-28TS(config)#clear ip arp inspection statistics
437
Chapter 52 ND Detection Commands
The ND Detection feature allows the switch to detect the ND packets based on the binding
entries in the IPv6-MAC Binding Table and filter out the illegal ND packets. Before configuring
ND Detection, complete IPv6-MAC Binding configuration. For details, refer to IPv6-MAC
Binding Configurations.
52.1 ipv6 nd detection
Description
The ipv6 nd detection command is used to enable the ND Detection function
globally. To disable the ND Detection function, please use no ipv6 nd
detection command.
Syntax
ipv6 nd detection
no ipv6 nd detection
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Example
Enable the ND Detection function globally:
T1600G-28TS(config)#ipv6 nd detection
52.2 ipv6 nd detection vlan
Description
The ipv6 nd detection vlan command is used to enable ND Detection
function on a specified VLAN. To disable ND Detection function on this VLAN,
please use no ipv6 nd detection vlan command.
Syntax
ipv6 nd detection vlan
vlan-range
no ipv6 nd detection vlan
vlan-range
438
Parameter
vlan-range
——Enter the vlan range in the format of 1-3, 5.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Example
Enable the ND Detection function on VLAN 1,4,6-7:
T1600G-28TS(config)#ipv6 nd detection vlan 1,4,6-7
52.3 ipv6 nd detection vlan logging
Description
The ipv6 nd detection vlan logging command is used to enable Log function
on a specified VLAN. To disable Log function on this VLAN, please use no
ipv6 nd detection vlan logging command.
Syntax
ipv6 nd detection vlan
vlan-range
logging
no ipv6 nd detection vlan
vlan-range
logging
Parameter
vlan-range
——Enter the vlan range in the format of 1-3, 5.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Example
Enable the Log function on VLAN 1,4,6-7:
T1600G-28TS(config)#ipv6 nd detection vlan 1,4,6-7 logging
52.4 ipv6 nd detection trust
Description
The ipv6 nd detection trust command is used to configure the port for which
the ND Detection function is unnecessary as the Trusted Port. To clear the
Trusted Port list, please use no ipv6 nd detection trust command .The
specific port, such as up-linked port, routing port and LAG port, should be set
439
as Trusted Port. To ensure the normal communication of the switch, please
configure the ND Detection Trusted Port before enabling the ND Detection
function.
Syntax
Ipv6 nd detection trust
no ipv6 nd detection trust
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet/ interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Example
Configure the Gigabit Ethernet ports 1/0/2-5 as the Trusted Port:
T1600G-28TS(config)#interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/2-5
T1600G-28TS(config-if-range)#ipv6 nd detection trust
52.5 show ipv6 nd detection
Description
The show ipv6 nd detection command is used to display the ND detection
global configuration including the enable/disable status.
Syntax
show ipv6 nd detection
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Example
Display the ND Detection configuration globally:
T1600G-28TS(config)#show ipv6 nd detection
52.6 show ipv6 nd detection interface
Description
The show ipv6 nd detection interface command is used to display the
interface configuration of ND Detection.
440
Syntax
show ipv6 nd detection interface[ fastEthernet
port
| gigabitEthernet
port
|
ten-gigabitEthernet
port
| port-channel
port-channel-id
]
Parameter
port
——The Ethernet port number.
port-channel-id
—— The ID of the port channel.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Example
Display the configuration of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1:
T1600G-28TS(config)#show ipv6 nd detection interface gigabitEthernet
1/0/1
Display the configuration of all Ethernet ports:
T1600G-28TS(config)#show ipv6 nd detection interface
52.7 show ipv6 nd detection vlan
Description
The show ipv6 nd detection vlan command is used to display the VLAN
configuration of ND Detection.
Syntax
show ipv6 nd detection vlan
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Example
Display the ipv6 ND Detection configuration of VLAN.
T1600G-28TS(config)#show ipv6 nd detection vlan
441
Chapter 53 System Log Commands
The log information will record the settings and operation of the switch respectively for you to
monitor operation status and diagnose malfunction.
53.1 logging buffer
Description
The logging buffer command is used to store the system log messages to an
internal buffer. To disable the log buffer function, please use the no logging
buffer command. Local Log is the system log information saved in the switch.
It has two output channels, that is, it can be saved to two different positions,
log buffer and log flash memory. The log buffer indicates the RAM for saving
system log and the information in the log buffer can be got by show logging
buffer command. It will be lost when the switch is restarted.
Syntax
logging buffer
no logging buffer
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable the system log buffer:
T1600G-28TS(config)#logging buffer
53.2 logging buffer level
Description
The logging buffer level command is used to configure the severity level and
the status of the configuration input to the log buffer. To return to the default
configuration, please use no logging buffer level command.
442
Syntax
logging buffer level
level
no logging buffer level
Parameter
level
—— Severity level of the log information output to each channel. There
are 8 severity levels marked with values 0-7. The smaller value has the higher
priority. Only the log with the same or smaller severity level value will be
output. By default, it is 6 indicating that the log information with level 0-6 will
be saved in the log buffer.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Set the severity level as 5:
T1600G-28TS(config)#logging buffer level 5
53.3 logging file flash
Description
The logging file flash command is used to store the log messages in a file in
the flash on the switch. To disable the log file flash function, please use no
logging file flash command. This function is disabled by default. The log file
flash indicates the flash sector for saving system log. The information in the
log file of the flash will not be lost after the switch is restarted and can be got
by the show logging flash command.
Syntax
logging file flash
no logging file flash
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
443
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable the log file flash function:
T1600G-28TS(config)#logging file flash
53.4 logging file flash frequency
Description
The logging file flash frequency command is used to specify the frequency
to synchronize the system log file in the log buffer to the flash. To resume the
default synchronizing frequency, please use the no logging file flash
frequency command.
Syntax
logging file flash frequency { periodic
periodic
| immediate }
no logging file flash frequency
Parameter
periodic
—— The frequency to synchronize the system log file in the log
buffer to the flash, ranging from 1 to 48 hours. By default, the synchronization
process takes place every 24 hours.
immediate —— The system log file in the buffer will be synchronized to the
flash immediately. This option will reduce the life of the flash and is not
recommended.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Specify the log file synchronization frequency as 10 hours:
T1600G-28TS(config)#logging file flash frequency periodic10
444
53.5 logging file flash level
Description
The logging file flash level command is used to specify the system log
message severity level. Messages will a severity level equal to or higher than
this value will be stored to the flash. To restore to the default level, please use
no logging file flash level command.
Syntax
logging file flash level
level
no logging file flash level
Parameter
level
—— Severity level of the log message. There are 8 severity levels
marked with values 0-7. The smaller value has the higher priority. Only the log
with the same or smaller severity level value will be saved to the flash. By
default, it is 3 indicating that the log message marked with 0~3 will be saved
in the log flash.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Save the log messages with their severities equal or higher than 7 to the
flash :
T1600G-28TS(config)#logging file flash level 7
53.6 logging host index
Description
The logging host index command is used to configure the Log Host. To clear
the configuration of the specified Log Host, please use no logging host
index command. Log Host is to receive the system log from other devices.
You can remotely monitor the settings and operation status of other devices
through the log host.
445
Syntax
logging host index
idx
host-ip level
no logging host index
idx
Parameter
idx
—— The index of the log host. The switch supports 4 log hosts at most.
host-ip
—— The IP for the log host.
level
—— The severity level of the log information sent to each log host.
There are 8 severity levels marked with values 0-7. The smaller value has the
higher priority. Only the log with the same or smaller severity level value will
be sent to the corresponding log host. By default, it is 6 indicating that the log
information marked with 0~6 will be sent to the log host.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable log host 2 and set its IP address as 192.168.0.148, the level 5:
T1600G-28TS(config)# logging host index 2 192.168.0.148 5
53.7 logging console
Description
The logging console command is used to send the system logs to the
console port. To disable logging to the console, please use no logging
console command. This function is enabled by default.
Syntax
logging console
no logging console
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
446
Example
Enable logging to the console port:
T1600G-28TS(config)# logging console
53.8 logging console level
Description
The logging console level command is used to limit messages logged to the
console port. System logs no higher than the set threshold level will be
displayed on the console port. To restore the threshold level to default value,
please use no logging console level command.
Syntax
logging console level
level
no logging monitor level
Parameter
level
—— Severity level of the log information output to the console port.
There are 8 severity levels marked with values 0-7. The smaller value has the
higher priority. Only the log with the same or smaller severity level value will
be output to the terminal devices. By default, it is 5 indicating that all the log
information between level 0-5 will be output to the terminal devices.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Output the log information with severity levels between 0-7 to the console
port:
T1600G-28TS(config)# logging console level 7
447
53.9 logging monitor
Description
The logging monitor command is used to display the system logs on the
terminal devices. To disable logging to the terminal, please use no logging
monitor command. This function is enabled by default.
Syntax
logging monitor
no logging monitor
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Disable logging to the terminal devices:
T1600G-28TS(config)# no logging monitor
53.10 logging monitor level
Description
The logging monitor level command is used to limit messages logged to the
terminal devices. System logs no higher than the set threshold level will be
displayed on the terminal devices. To restore the threshold level to default
value, please use no logging monitor level command.
Syntax
logging monitor level
level
no logging monitor level
Parameter
level
—— Severity level of the log information output to the terminal devices.
There are 8 severity levels marked with values 0-7. The smaller value has the
higher priority. Only the log with the same or smaller severity level value will
448
be output to the terminal devices. By default, it is 5 indicating that all the log
information between level 0-5 will be output to the terminal devices.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Output the log information with severity levels between 0-7 to the terminal
devices:
T1600G-28TS(config)# logging monitor level 7
53.11 clear logging
Description
The clear logging command is used to clear the information in the log buffer
and log file.
Syntax
clear logging [ buffer | flash ]
Parameter
buffer | flash —The output channels: buffer and flash. Clear the information of
the two channels, by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Clear the information in the log file:
T1600G-28TS(config)# clear logging buffer
449
53.12 show logging local-config
Description
The show logging local-config command is used to display the configuration
of the Local Log output to the console, the terminal, the log buffer and the log
file.
Syntax
show logging local-config
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the configuration of the Local Log:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show logging local-config
53.13 show logging loghost
Description
The show logging loghost command is used to display the configuration of
the log host.
Syntax
show logging loghost [
index
]
Parameter
index
——The index of the log host whose configuration will be displayed,
ranging from 1 to 4. Display the configuration of all the log hosts by default.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
450
Example
Display the configuration of the log host 2:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show logging loghost 2
53.14 show logging buffer
Description
The show logging buffer command is used to display the log information in
the log buffer according to the severity level.
Syntax
show logging buffer [ level
level
]
Parameter
level
—— Severity level. There are 8 severity levels marked with values 0-7.
The information of levels with priority not lower than the select level will
display. Display all the log information in the log buffer by default.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the log information from level 0 to level 5 in the log buffer:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show logging buffer level 5
53.15 show logging flash
Description
The show logging flash command is used to display the log information in
the log file according to the severity level.
Syntax
show logging flash [ level
level
]
451
Parameter
level
—— Severity level. There are 8 severity levels marked with values 0-7.
The information of levels with priority not lower than the select level will
display. Display all the log information in the log file by default.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the log information with the level marked 0~3 in the log file:
T1600G-28TS(config)# show logging flash level 3
452

Navigation menu